Major Frank W. Cavanaugh 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



BY 

MAJOR FRANK W. CAVANAUGH 




BOSTON: 

SMALL, MAYNARD AND COMPANY 

PUBLISHERS 



Copyright, 1919 

Small, Maynard and Company 
(Incorporated) , 



-3 '.yi'^ 



©Cl A53508e 



To the memory of the many football men of America 
who gave their lives in their country s service 
during the war against the imperial govern- 
ments of Germany and Austria- Hungary , 
this book is dedicated. 



PREFACE 

All my other Octobers, I thought, had been so 
unlike and yet so like to this one. The smell of 
saddle leather was vaguely evocative of that odor 
of new footballs which sets the memories of many 
seasons flowing. In the air was the same crisp 
tang of other autumns, and beneath our feet the 
rustle of withered leaves. From beyond the hill we 
could hear the clanking and grinding of artillery. 
Before us the long hillside fell away to a shining 
river. Beyond, the far horizon was lit with lightning 
flashes, not out of heaven but out of an inferno of 
man's making. And from above rained down the 
light and radiance of other worlds. It seemed very 
strange to be so far away from home and fireside, 
very singular to find oneself present amid surrotmd- 
ings so weird, so unreal. It seemed very strange 
indeed to be directing a squad of cannoneers instead of 
a squad of football players. Strangest of all, came the 
certainty that it was very much the same thing after 
all, that the little problems and perplexities were 
very like indeed to the old problems and per- 
plexities. * 'Football,'* I reflected, ''is very like war- 
fare, after all, and warfare would be very like foot- 
ball, were there as much intelligence in it. There is 
more intelligence/' I added, "in one football game, 



PREFACE 



badly though it may be played, however disgusting 
to the coaches, than there is in a whole war;'' for it 
seemed to me that of intelligence in modem warfare 
there was very little, that the music of Mars is a 
mad music, that his votaries are filled with a certain 
witlessness, and go blind and blundering into battle 
like men who know not what they do. Then my 
thought strayed and roamed among the men around 
me, the men in olive drab, who had won the head- 
gear and jersey of the other Octobers. I could always 
pick them out, the football players, although many 
there were who, never having played the grand old 
game, nevertheless Jiad plenty of muscular control, 
good discipline, coolness under fire and cheerfulness 
in adversity. * 'These men,'' I reflected, "would 
have made good football players; it is only that they 
never had sufficient opportunity to play it." I 
thought of the heavy percentage of rejections from 
our army and navy recruiting stations, and that 
very few of the men thus humiliated had been foot- 
ball players. The ex-players, to be sure, were 
picked men originally; but there seemed to me to be 
no valid excuse for such a large proportion of down- 
right inferiority. Athletics, and especially foot- 
ball, would have spared many of our young men this 
shame," was my mental conclusion, and I added: 
After this war we shall hear a cry for imiversal 
drill and military preparation; but universal athletics, 
and especially football, would hit nearer the mark. 
There is nothing like our football that I know of to 
make a young man alert and receptive, active and 



PREFACE 



cotirageous; and possession of these qualities is 
worth, for preparedness' sake, a year's output of the 
Bethlehem munitions works or a lifetime spent in 
drilling. After the war," I said, 'Ve shall play a 
lot of football, and it will not be played in a molly- 
coddle spirit. We shall have better football, if we 
can find a sufficient number of coaches who know 
the game. Many coaches will be needed, and, 
moreover, we ought to make an immediate effort 
to restandardize our football; for there is too much 
confusion among us, too much bewilderment. A 
consistent theory of the whole art of football, if 
stated, would have at least the merit of being con- 
sistent. If sound, it should aid in the standardiza- 
tion of our football, and if unsound, at least it 
might provoke a sound and thorough criticism, 
which leads to the same thing. A book written with 
this in mind shotild prove invaluable," I decided, 
*'but I do not imagine that I shall have the oppor- 
tunity to write it. I shall keep the thought in mind, 
however." 



CONTENTS 



Chapter Page 

Preface 

I Beginning the Season 1 

II The Warrior's Armor 12 



III The TackHng Dummy .... 17 

IV Scrimmage and Corrections ... 22 
V The Grass Drill . . . . . . 27 

VI Training, Diet, Injuries and Water . 34" 

VII Welcoming the Old Grad .... 57 

VIII Captains and their Authority . . 60 

IX General Theory of Line Defense . . 66 

X Defense Against Shifts and Spreads . 74 



XI Secondary Defense . . . . . 82 
XII Centers and the Spiral Pass . . . 86 

XIII Quarterback Play 94 

XIV Backs and Backfield Tactics . . .107 
XV Backs in Running Attack. . . .113 

XVI Protection by the Guards . . .117 

XVII Ends and End Play 125 

XVIII The Tackle's Brutish Charge. . .136 
XIX Plays and How to Make Them . . 141 
XX The Essence of Offense . . . .146 
XXI Rushline Play in Line Attack . . 153 



XXII Sideline Plays and Straight Bucks . 163 
XXIII Sequence Plays in Theory and Reality 174 



Chapter Page 

XXIV Long and Short Forward Passes . . 178 

XXV The Only Starting Signal . . . .185 

XXVI Essentials in Scouting 199 

XXVII Punting (1) The Surprise Kick . .208 

XXVIII Punting (2) The Regular Formation. 214 

XXIX Punting (3) Blocking Kicks — The 

Spiral .223 

XXX Punting (4) the Runback 232 

XXXI Drop Kick and Placement Kick . . 244 

XXXII Kick-Off and the Run-Back. . . 253 

XXXIII Onside Kick and Puntout . . .263 

XXXIV Generalship Zone Play . . .267 
XXXV "H Hour" . . . . . . .286 

XXXVI The Finishing Touches .... 293 
XXXVII Getting Under his Skin . . . .299 
XXXVIII The Mystic Nexus . . . . .317 



Inside Football 



CHAPTER I 

BEGINNING THE SEASON 

A NEW coach's first talk to a squad is the one 
which makes the deepest impression on the largest 
nimiber. This coach will never have a better oppor- 
tunity to set his pupils thinking on a high plane. 
They should be reminded that the season beginning 
at the college or school calls for sacrifice, endurance, 
the exercise of will-power and pride in bodily and 
mental improvement, including the maintenance of 
a high standard of scholarship. The season must 
be one of co-operation, unity of purpose, concen- 
tration, team-work and unselfishness in the com- 
monly accepted meaning of that term. Urge all 
members of the squad, moreover, to discourage 
chronic wet-blankets and objectors who have no 
remedies to offer, whether members of the squad or 
outsiders. Players with new ideas, moreover, 
should be encouraged to impart them to the coach. 
I have sometimes told a squad at the first meeting: 
**If you are not willing to sacrifice an arm or a leg 

1 



2 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



for the good of the cause — not that any one hopes or 
expects or desires that such a sacrifice be made — the 
cause is not sufficiently serious to you, and you 
ought not to be on the squad/' 

It is not to be intimated, or understood, that any 
coach would be so self-seeking, or any school expect 
so much, that any man should be called upon to 
sacrifice the equivalent of a limb. It is not to be 
presimied that a coach would be so brutal as to take 
any unnecessary chances with his men. But it is 
entirely reasonable to require that men of the calibre 
desired for a football team be willing to make 
such a sacrifice. 

A team should have the do-or-die spirit. If a 
game of this nature is not important enough to 
fight for, it would be a travesty on sport to play it 
at all. Here, then, is the beautiful school in which 
sacrifice for an ideal is taught, developed and made a 
part of the man. Strange as it may seem to the 
fanatics of rest, peace and quiet enjoyment, the 
large majority of the men who are thus taught 
come to love the lesson and its teacher. 

Keep the players on the field in a serious frame of 
mind. Contrary to a prevalent opinion, enthusiastic 
football students can maintain and increase that 
enthusiasm by sustained application more readily 
than by a diversion of frivolity and relaxation. 
The squad should include men of a serious and 
studious turn of mind, who, even if they are not of 
varsity timber, will encourage their fellows to bring 
up important questions as they arise. A one-man 



* 



BEGINNING THE SEASON 3 

team is seldom a winner. That two heads are better 
than one is a good adage, but eleven heads are even 
better; that is to say, eleven thinkers, not eleven 
leaders; for there should be only one quarterback 
or captain, too many frogs muddling the football 
puddle very decidedly. 

While the serious attitude of the players should 
never be discouraged, there are times at mid-season 
when the going is hard and men easily become 
irritable. Under such conditions, the coach should 
make special opportimity for less serious play, never 
riotous or risky, but based on forms of light exercise 
such as all men know. These games may be relied 
upon to rekindle naturally happy dispositions, in 
order to build up a mental reserve for the especially 
severe grind at the end of the season. 

Discipline is a very important habit to form early, 
or it will never become a fact. Before any practice 
is attempted the men should be informed that they 
must not and shall not be late to meals or practice. 
Delay in dressing before or after practice should not 
be countenanced. A football team cannot become a 
well drilled and disciplined machine without insist- 
ence upon the trifles, so called. The spirit of a 
squad that gets out early and with snap at the start 
of the season is always superior. 

There should be a preliminary exercise of calis- 
thenics, to loosen the muscles and warm the body 
(but not for body and arms alone, with the legs in a 
rigid position). The legs must also be encouraged 
to work with the mind. Leg exercises, with the 



4 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



legs in a crouched position, have no merit; as it has 
been historically demonstrated to a convincing degree 
that a quick man can get a slow, heavy man out of 
the way. 

The main idea should be to keep all the men 
moving all the time, except when they are listening 
to instruction; as a busy squad acquires a much more 
convincing sense of duty well done, with its accom- 
panying mental satisfactions, as well as a keener and 
earlier awakening to the fact that somebody is 
taking care of it who knows his business. 

The preliminary practice should be conducted in 
accordance with a schedule, but that schedule 
should be reconstructed if it is found to be inade- 
quate. No matter how large the squad, every man 
should be kept occupied, one group tackling or 
blocking at the dummy, another falling on the ball, 
others going through signals, others punting or 
passing. The fundamentals are the essentials. 
Once positively and firmly grounded, the team, with 
any reasonable opportunity, will grow and develop. 

Everybody is an end and everybody is a pass 
thrower and a punter as well, for the first three or 
four days of preliminary conditioning; days divided, 
if possible, into forenoon and afternoon workouts of 
short duration, with vigilant watchfulness exercised 
against overexertion or excessive fatigue. Short 
tossing of the ball and fielding of the same gives 
every man a good stretch. These tosses should 
have a maximum of twenty-five yards, and there 
should be exchanges of punts at the same distance, 



BEGINNING THE SEASON 5 

with attention to form both in punting and catching. 
The wearing of very Hght clothing is advisable 
during these early sessions, often undertaken during 
one of summer's late revivals; and all candidates 
should be warned to report fatigue or the slightest 
lameness in arm or leg. 

The players may be divided into squads of a 
dozen, and sent ambling around the field, throwing 
the ball from one to another; perhaps choosing sides 
and making a semi-basketball affair out of it, but 
always with a sharp eye to exhaustion. 

After the first day, pick out any of the possible 
heavy men who might become centers or sub-centers, 
and put quarterback candidates behind them. 
Show the latter the positions to assume with a view 
to forward passes, while standing in various receiv- 
ing positions at various distances. Show the 
Centers how to make passes, including the spiral 
pass, which cannot, however, be relied upon exclu- 
sively, because of its impracticability on muddy 
days. Then start the handling of the ball, sending 
ends down imder the resulting passes, which should 
be so short that they can be fielded without strain, 
but long enough to develop handling and fielding 
the ball, and also return throwing. 

Gradually increase the distances, both of the 
forward passing and the punting. Stmimer punters, 
whose legs are already in fair shape, may begin to 
get length on their kicks, and the army of *'ends,'' 
including tackles and guards in the making, will 
begin to go down under kicks and passes faster, 



6 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



though less frequently, walking back along the side 
lines to make place for the next set of forwards 
which comes clattering down under the punt. 

The receivers should practice a smart getaway- 
after catching, but should play it safe, first making 
sure of the catch. The ball is received on the solar 
plexus, to bound out slightly against the left hand 
and drop into the right hand held underneath to 
complete the pocket. Punt receivers should bind 
the first two and also the third and fourth fingers 
together with tape, thus avoiding nine-tenths of 
the early season finger injuries incidental to punt 
catching. It is well to remember, incidentally, that 
a really sore knuckle or toe becomes almost painless 
if bound to its neighbor for support. Tagging the 
receiver takes the place of tackling in preliminary 
down-the-field work, but the punt catchers should 
begin immediately to practice the use of the straight 
arm and the use of the free arm by the side to break 
a man's tackle. 

On the fourth day of practice, start the men 
falling from a standing position on a stationary 
football contained in a small circle six feet aw;ay; 
paying special attention to form. After a few days 
this specialty can be practiced with the man run- 
ning and the ball in motion. Teach the player to 
go over the ball straight, after the manner of a 
down-swooping hydroplane, running lower and 
'lower with each stride, until the final plxmge has 
more of a skimming than a falling motion. The 
player's body, with shoulders equidistant from the 



BEGINNING THE SEASON 7 



ground, should barely avoid grazing the ball. He 
completes its recovery by turning over upon either 
hip, as comes most natural to him, at the same time 
pulling in the ball so that the upper legs and lower 
body form a right-angled pocket, which the arms 
complete. 

Players should not be asked to fall on the ball in 
twos, threes or fours until after the first game, or 
after a fair amoimt of scrimmage work. Many 
men seem to reserve all their natural and acquired 
climisiness for this operation, which to other football 
players presents no more difficulty than a kitten 
experiences while at play with a ball of yam. Cltimsy 
men injure themselves and injure others ; and falling 
on the ball, although a highly essential specialty to 
acquire, is watched with misgivings by coaches and 
trainers, who never know when an accident may 
occtu*. The risks are apparently heavier than in 
scrimmage itself, and yet a great majority of natural 
football players fall on the ball year after year with- 
out suffering the slightest injury. 

Quick starts and quick stops, both so necessary 
in football, may be practiced at an early stage in 
the season. Never give so many starts that the 
element of speed is lost through fatigue. Rest as 
often as necessary; but get the genuine snap into 
both the starting and the stopping. Develop the 
utmost in muscular response to brain command. 

Shadow dodging is another important means of 
developing rapid co-ordination and bringing out nat- 
ural dodging speed. For this exercise twenty to thirty 



8 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



posts or sticks should be set up at irregular intervals 
within a square measuring fifteen yards on each 
side. Players should learn to dodge by running at 
speed through this maze of obstacles, avoiding the 
latter and also one another by complete turns of 
the body. Accomplished and highly elusive dodgers 
tend to run with restraint, and should therefore be 
given at least their full share of work in falling on 
the ball, and tackling the dimimy. 

Begin to use the dummy after three or four days 
of preliminary exercise. Men learn at the dtmimy 
how to block in interference, as well as tackling, but 
it is well to postpone blocking exercises until after 
the first two or three scrimmages. Heart and enthu- 
siasm make the tackle, but at the dummy he can be 
taught to watch the knees and lower legs rather 
than the head. The coach meanwhile should 
impress his own interest, thoroughness and **pep" 
on the tackier, arousing as much enthusiasm as 
possible by his voice — in order to solace the novice 
for his skinned elbows. The coach should instil also 
the spirit of rivalry and fight by the voice, by com- 
parisons, and by the trend of his conversation. 

From the first day of practice the coach should 
use a large blackboard for instruction in signals, 
formations, and plays. Three basic plays, which 
can be worked on either side of the line, will, with 
the punt, give him a total of seven plays to serve 
as the foundation of his working offense. These 
plays should be explained in full detail to the squad. 
Each man should learn not only where he goes and 



BEGINNING THE SEASON 9 

what he does, but also the individual assignment 
of every man on the team. The coach must 
have in his own mind a very clear and precise 
reasoning of what each player is to do on every 
play, and he must know his plays as he knows 
his alphabet; else, under cross-examination, his 
prestige will suffer an enormous decline. If the 
slightest changes are made later in any play, the 
changes must be explained and learned as thoroughly 
as the original moves. Further plays should be 
added to these as fast as the squad can assimilate 
them. The system of signals which will govern the 
plays should be expounded in as clear and concise a 
manner as possible. The signals themselves must be 
the simplest possible and the most easily changed on 
short notice. Put the signals on the blackboard, 
and drive them home with diagrams of the plays. 
Then, on the field, line up the squad into teams on 
attack. Let the teams walk through the plays, at 
first, against a wholly imaginary defense; each man, 
however, taking out, blocking off or charging back 
the invisible opponent assigned to him. 

Scales, stakes, rope, blackboard and dummy are 
the principal inanimate devices which new coaches 
will find most serviceable and necessary in teaching 
football. 

In addition to a setting-up drill at the start of 
practice, a calisthenic exercise at the end of the day 
is advisable, especially if the men have been spend- 
ing considerable time in listening to instruction. 
The practice should conclude with a sprint to the 



10 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



training house, rather than with a long run. It 
appears to be a general practice to scrimmage men, 
or work them otherwise, as far as the men can go, 
and then send them on long runs. This is a wholly 
unnecessary hardship. If men, after practice, are 
still capable of long runs, with no atom of interest 
in the performance, it seems much more advisable 
to prolong the instruction in practical football. 

Every man on the squad should have a proper 
amount of work each day, and if there are substi- 
tutes who have been of necessity neglected, and if 
darkness has fallen so that further coaching is 
rendered impossible, the long run may serve a useful 
purpose; but players generally regard it as merely a 
form of torture. The proof is not far to seek. It is 
only necessary to take a football squad and send it 
for a mile on the track after an average afternoon's 
work. Watch the men's faces as they run and their 
attitude when they finish. Then the next night 
call the men together at the end of the practice and 
say: * 'That's all for tonight. Now, then, everybody 
sprint for the gym ! ' ' After the long run the men were 
worn out and silent. Tonight they are happy, full 
of life and off with a live step and a joyous heart for 
the showers. 

Occasionally a coach may order a run as one of 
the surprises which are such a great element in 
holding attention, whether always pleasant, or now 
and then disagreeable. Even the disagreeable sur- 
prise will arouse interest, and the long run easily 
includes itself in a list of the disagreeables. Unless 



BEGINNING THE SEASON 11 



a man's attendance is required for study purposes, 
he should be sent at once to the dressing room after 
taking him out of a practice, especially in chilly 
weather. He can get from his bath, if taken imme- 
diately, a snap and a revival not to be expected if his 
body is allowed to chill in the bitter autumn breezes. 

Men on the field, once they start exercising, 
should be kept busy, and there is always plenty for 
them to do. They must get accustomed to falling 
on the ground and to protecting their muscles and 
conserving their wind and endiu'ance as a matter of 
second nature, before they are ready for football. 
It is the trainer's business and the coach's business, 
meanwhile, to see to it that no man in practice 
exerts himself to the limit; watching especially the 
new men who report late, but watching, also, the 
varying weights of all the men, and turning all sus- 
pected cases of organic disturbance over to the 
physician, before it becomes too late. 



CHAPTER II 



THE WARRIOR'S ARMOR 

In the general sense I am not in favor of heavy, 
burdensome protective devices. Whatever pro- 
tection is used should be particularly chosen with 
a view to strength and lightness. A man can be 
injured by first becoming exhausted through carry- 
ing too many pounds of pads and braces, for even 
these are insufficient if the wearer's muscles are 
relaxed from excessive fatigue. In addition to the 
protection which every athlete provides for himself, 
no football man should ever go on the field for a 
scrimmage or a game without a headgear. It 
neither makes a coward out of him to wear one nor 
a braver man to go without. If for no other reason, 
over a span of ten years the headgear will take away 
from the alarmists many opportunities to cry down 
football. Many cuts requiring stitches, and other > 
serious head injuries, are avoided by wearing head- 
gear. There is no penalty of discomfort from 
wearing this protection and no psychological dis- 
advantage. 

Shoulder braces of light, substantial material 
should be used for the protection of the scapula. 
Light hip pads for the top of the hip bone afford some 

12 



THE WARRIOR'S ARMOR 13 



protection also to the floating ribs. These pads are 
sewn inside the trousers, and protrude above in 
semicircular shape. Light kidney pads of leather 
faced felt are similarly adjusted. Thigh pads are 
fitted into pockets on the front and inside of the 
trouser legs. The knee cap should be protected 
by a light pad contained in the roll of the trouser 
leg and a thin, flat sponge is preferable to a pad. 
The sponge should be wet, most of the water then 
being squeezed out. It is very light, but offers 
remarkable protective resistance. 

As a rule, shin guards do not appear to be neces- 
sary. They have nearly gone out of use. Yet I 
would recommend them strongly for occasional men 
who have supersensitive shins. If a man is more 
comfortable with shin guards, let him wear them; 
and the same applies to nose guards. I would 
specially urge very low cut shoes for all players. 
Were it not for the ankle bone, I would have them 
cut as low as the stmimer oxford. Since 1898 
until comparatively recent years, when I found an 
athletic goods house which would make them at 
short notice as I wanted them, I used to cut down 
the standard football shoes before they were served 
out so that the upper would extend no higher than 
the middle of the ankle bone. 

These shoes were intended to protect the ankle, 
and often reached the calf of the leg. When such a 
shoe was laced tightly it gave a decided sensation of 
protection, an impression which the player carried 
into the game with him. As the ankle worked 



14 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



about in the shoe, the pressure of the laces read- 
justed itself, the result being increased tightness 
around the top of the shoe. The wearer still used 
his ankle as if it were braced, though it now had no 
brace whatever. The result was an extraordinary- 
number of sprained ankles. Cutting the shoe down 
and lacing it tightly over the instep, giving no brace 
whatever to the ankle, forced this joint to do its 
work and protect itself. I cannot recall three cases 
of sprained ankle in fifteen years of coaching. 

Of course, the man who steps into a hidden hole 
on a football field is liable to a sprain, but nothing 
will ever be invented to prevent an accident of this 
kind, if the freedom of the joint is to be considered. 

The group photographs in the football guide show 
not one team in twenty uniformed with canvas 
jackets; variously padded and camouflaged jerseys 
being apparently very much in the mode. This 
fashion appears to me to involve a somewhat thought- 
less sacrifice of efficiency. Canvas jackets should 
by all means be worn, as the jersey is a hundred per 
cent easier to grasp. If it is a good jersey it will 
stretch without tearing. An unbroken hold on a 
jersey by a man of reasonable strength will catch 
the wearer with one leg in the air and snap him 
back as if the jersey were a powerful spring. 

Within recent years I have seen two touchdowns 
lost in important games in this manner. In one 
case the ball was carried to a point directly over the 
goal line, if not slightly beyond it, when the runner 
was snapped back without ceremony. In the excite- 



THE WARRIOR^S ARMOR 15 



ment, the referee either failed to notice that the ball 
had been actually carried to a point where, under 
the rules, a touchdown should have been awarded, 
or else lost his nerve. An3^ay the next lineup took 
place six feet from the goal line. One finds it diffi- 
cult to censure the official too severely, considering 
how difficult it was to believe one's own eyes as to 
the elasticity of a jersey and the distance the run- 
ner's sudden recoil had covered. 

The jacket should be tightly laced, with due 
regard to freedom of breathing. Good results can 
be obtained by fitting the men to jackets and 
trousers separately, and then having the garments 
united by a tailor so that the whole will fit the body 
perfectly, and give entire freedom of action. Elastic 
material is generally used to effect the union. If 
the team's treasury can afford it, have a special 
shoe for muddy fields, rigged with three long cleats 
under the ball of the foot, as far apart as possible, 
so as to give them the least chance to hold caked 
earth. Place at most two cleats of the same kind 
on the heel. Drop kickers cannot use these mud 
cleats, and this is a small point to remember. 

I have found it particularly worth while to equip 
backs and ends with a special light shoe for their 
important games. These shoes by their very nature 
are not guaranteed to stand a season's work, but 
imagination when well directed is a fine thing to 
cater to, and the extra life and dash exhibited by 
players thus equipped is positive. Stockings should 
have white feet — regardless of the college color; 



16 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



this as a safeguard against infection. Even better, 
players might wear short white socks under the 
stockings. Blankets of good quality and generous 
size should be a part of the team's equipment. 
They should be used during all long waits, even when 
the weather is not cold. Chewing gtmi (or equiva- 
lents) should be discouraged during practice or a 
game. Chewing increases rather than diminishes 
thirst. Do not forget to give the players a swallow 
of water between periods. Between the halves hot 
coffee, with or without milk and sugar, is a better 
stimulant than drug or dram. Bar positively the 
powerful drugs. A man's future is more important 
than even football.^ 



CHAPTER III 



THE TACKLING DUMMY 

I HAVE watched carefully the charging machine, 
the bucking strap, and many other mechanical 
devices, employed to develop football players. In 
the first place, they are abhorrent to me. They 
suggest the training of a dog for a dog fight. They 
cannot by any chance elevate the moral standards 
of the man. Generally speaking, I have a great 
aversion for this manner of development. After 
two decades of observation and experimentation, I 
am convinced that it is inferior and inadvisable. 
Work of this sort is drudgery, and tends to deaden 
the imagination. It is unreal, and just different 
enough from the actual combat against live forces 
to raise a question as to its efficacy, even disre- 
garding its other undesirable features. 

The charging machine, although novel and 
astonishing, I have never even considered. There 
are those who claim that practice upon the charging 
machine develops rhythm and unity of charge. 
Undoubtedly this is true, to a questionable degree. 
But the machine has no individuality, no come-back, 
stands dead waiting for the attack; and the men 
charging it, not being interested and soon becoming 

17 



18 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



fatigued, learn instinctively to keep the rhythm and 
the unity of charge while slowly but surel}^ discard- 
ing the most important things, snap and speed. 
Unless it is absolutely necessary, it is poor judg- 
ment to order young, intelligent men to attack an 
inanimate object, where there is a complete lack of 
the thrill of personal contact or the danger of prompt 
and effective retaliation. Signal drills develop unity 
of charge sufficiently, and this without building slow, 
heavy muscles. 

The man running into a bucking strap springs like 
an animal; leaps into it, tearing up the ground, and 
struggles and fights like a trapped beast. If the 
man has any individuality or the fire of freedom in 
his soul, he is mentally registering a protest against 
his degradation. The prayer for these devices is 
that they develop muscle. But in the various phases 
of football there is no end to the interesting work 
that can be given to a football man which will 
develop muscle as fast as he can put it on, at the 
same time developing enthusiasm. The only chance 
one has to retain the respect of the man who is in 
the bucking strap, and to preserve for him his own, 
is by the weak and ineffectual use of compliment or 
flattery; weak especially in this case because the 
man's physical position, bound up as he is, is too 
base to enable him to respond to either. There is 
no element of personal combat. Those who are 
holding the ends of the strap have an overwhelming 
advantage if they care to exercise it; and they are 
not in any sense considered as antagonists by the 



THE TACKLING DUMMY 19 



halfback who straggles in the throes of a ridiculous 
endeavor. They are often two of the most useless 
members of the squad: a clincher against arousing 
any enthusiasm on the bucker's part. 

Now the tackling dummy is a necessary evil. 
It is open to many of the same objections registered 
against the charging machine and the bucking 
strap. But a most compelling argument for the 
dimimy is that because of the need for constant 
practice in tackling and blocking, the exclusive use 
of members of the squad in lieu of the stuffed image 
would develop more injuries than the squad could 
afford. It is a strange phenomenon that when the 
dimimy is discarded in favor of tackling practice 
against real men carrying the ball so many shoiild be 
injiured, both ranners and tacklers, whereas in 
games or scrimmage practice injuries from this cause 
are infrequent. 

Undoubtedly this difference is attributable to the 
added zest of real play as against feature practice. 
Increased enthusiasm makes for a disregard of pos- 
sible injury, which, in turn, means a full, natural 
muscular pressure, the best possible insurance 
against injury. Lack of interest means an attitude 
mentally conservative, which results in muscular 
conservatism. This is a natural shrinking of the 
muscles from their full duty, thereby exposing 
ligaments, tissues, bones and tendons to shock. 

Tackling the dtmimy by no means teaches the 
complete lesson of tackling. It trains the man, 
however, to throw himself at the object from either 



20 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



foot, until the movement becomes instinctive and 
any natural or possible hesitation is removed. 
The same may be said of blocking on the dummy. 
Accurate tackling and blocking are more or less 
instinctive in an enthusiastic player. What the 
dummy does is to give the first lessons in form. It 
teaches that both tackling and blocking are reason- 
ably easy. It relieves the beginner of fear or mis- 
apprehension with regard to safety from injury 
when the dummy is missed, or when, for any reason, 
the player falls into clumsy or uncontrollable 
positions. 

Successful tackling gives perhaps the most wonder- 
ful and satisfying sensation that football provides. 
Success is based on the lesson, well learned, to 
watch the runner's knees; second, good muscular 
control on the part of the tackier; third, enthusiasm; 
and fourth, the determination to go through the 
man, not to the man; in other words to assimie that 
the runner must be reached a foot to two feet beyond 
where he is actually seen to be. 

To be sure, there are other necessary qualifications 
but they appear to be included in those already 
given. Muscular control involves the instinctive 
turning of the head away from the runner's knee. 
There is a law, both written and unwritten, that a 
tackier should throw his body across, and in front 
of the runner. For years I have seen this method 
taught, practiced and accomplished; but I question 
if I have ever seen a man who tackled in this fashion 
who was able for long to keep out of the infirmary 



THE TACKLING DUMMY 21 



or the hospital. The idea is as pernicious as it is 
foolish. 

Of course, there are times when a man finds him- 
self in such a position, and compelled to act so 
quickly, that he has no choice in the matter. The 
head is the directing force, physically as well as 
mentally, after the final lunge has been made. It 
should be pointed directly at the objective point of 
the final lunge. If at the runner's knees, the tackier 
must learn to turn his head while tackling, so as to 
avoid unnecessary punishment. Such punishment 
cannot be avoided if the player persists in throwing 
his head across the pathway of the runner. 



CHAPTER IV 



SCRIMMAGE AND CORRECTIONS 

Scrimmage practice should begin as early as pos- 
sible, and naturally a team will require and desire 
two or three such sessions before entering its first 
game. The early scrimmages are so often inter- 
rupted for purposes of explanation that plenty of 
respite is provided; but the coach and trainer should 
keep a sharp eye on the physical condition of the 
players. Many an exhausted player has suffered 
because a coach has said to himself: * 'We'll try a 
few more plays; the men are tired, but they need the 
work.'' The blackboard and explanations on the 
field should be used in pla<;e of scrimmage so far as 
possible. 

The bulk of the scrimmage work necessary 
should be completed early in the season, to dis- 
cover material, develop the men's ideas and arouse 
the spirit of competition; also to harden the players 
and for the sake of the teaching of football possible 
only in scrimmage. Minor or more serious injuries 
sustained in scrimmage will have all the more time to 
mend before the important games if the bulk of the 
scrimmage work is done early. Having acquired 
the idea and habit of scrimmage, it will be better for 

22 



SCRIMMAGE AND CORRECTIONS 23 



the players later in the season to go into their games 
with a little less knowledge but also without the 
sore spots, than with a little more knowledge plus 
the sore spots. The latter lead unconsciously to a 
defensive attitude which may result in fresh and 
unnecessary injuries. 

Coaches in charge of scrimmage practice should 
specialize upon thoroughness to the last detail. 
Monday should be a corrective day if there has been 
a Saturday game ; a limbering-up day for the men who 
played half the game or more, and a scrimmage day 
for the remaining substitutes, if there are enough 
of them and also enough competent coaching 
available to superintend their work. Tuesday and 
Thursday are generally the best scrimmage days for 
the .first string men. The line men should also be 
scrimmaged on Wednesday, holding out the ends and 
backs. This statement presupposes a larger ntmi- 
ber of substitutes than many school teams possess. 
But a coach should not overdo scrimmage whether 
his squad is large or small. There is plenty of very 
necessary detail work that can be put on when it 
seems inadvisable to scrimmage. 

Every team has a gam6 during the first half of 
the season when the tackling is ragged. When the 
players reassemble on the following Monday, I 
usually indulge in a few remarks concerning indi- 
vidual and collective shortcomings, explaining that 
they attempted to reach runners with their arms, 
instead of driving with their shoulders to **the man 
beyond the man**; or that they watched the runner's 



24 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



upper body, instead of his knees and feet, before 
making the final swoop. I then designate a certain 
day in the near future as ''Bloody Wednesday,*' or 
''Bloody Thursday,'* as the case may be, notif3ang 
the squad of the nature of the intended celebration. 

A portion of the afternoon in question is used to 
send unfortunate substitutes down the line with 
footballs, also with full liberty and license to go at 
any speed possible, and to use as much of the field as 
they may require. The varsity players should make 
four or five tackles apiece without shirking the test 
in any respect. The wild man in the open usually 
proves sufficiently elusive and determined to make 
the test entirely valid. 

It is a tough game, and hard on the team. There 
may be a few bruises and sore spots at nightfall. 
But it generally serves, a few suitable invectives 
aiding, to put the team on its mettle; at least to put 
it in a spirit of determination to avoid occasion for 
other bloody days. "Bloody Thursday** is not 
without its psychological value, and it certainly 
provides one of the hardest tests of tackling, which 
is more a matter of spirit than of skill. 

I have been asked a hundred times what I do to 
eradicate fumbling. I always answer: "Nothing.** 
Develop good passes and a fighting team and the 
fumbling will take care of itself. A team may, and 
probably will, suffer from fimibling in a violently 
epidemic form, at some stage of its career, but it 
will recover. Fortunately, the one bad day usually 
occurs early in the season. To harp on the subject 



SCRIMMAGE AND CORRECTIONS 25 



excessively might create a permanent nervous habit. 
A coach may take it for granted that his players do 
not desire to fumble, and that they will cure them- 
selves of the tendency, time aiding, if he keeps 
cool himself. 

This is not at all the same thing as saying that a 
coach can never give an individual a helpful sug- 
gestion which will enable him to make his own cor- 
rections. For instance, if you have a punt catcher 
who muffs, although his general form seems to be 
good, look and see if he does not catch with too 
wide a straddle. If so, his basket has no bottom to 
it. On the same principle, teach punt catchers not 
to draw away from the ball as they would from a 
fast liner in baseball, where a player is taught to 
yield with the catch. 

Quizzes on the rules should be held frequently 
early in the season, and not omitted late in the 
season. Insist, particularly, that the men learn the 
penalties. This is a very good way to teach the 
game, as a matter of fact, for there is a great deal 
of football wrapped up in the definitions of offenses, 
and players show at least a certain degree of ciui- 
osity to find out what may happen to them in case 
they do commit any forbidden action. Every mem- 
ber of the squad should be provided with a rule 
book. It is unfortunately true that most of these 
choicely illustrated volimies will be thrown away, 
possibly in consequence of the inborn horror of 
books which brought their possessors to college or 
school. But a few men, at least, on every squad 



26 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



will prove apt students and able football lawyers. 
The coach should encourage all forms of liberal 
education. And please teach your team how to line 
up for a punt-out! 



\ 



CHAPTER V 

THE GRASS DRILL 

The grass drill I greatly prefer to the regular 
line of calisthenics. This drill a generation of foot- 
ball players at Dartmouth recall with mingled 
emotions, but with no lack of appreciation of the 
benefits they derived from it, or of the many humor- 
ous occurrences which lightened their toils when 
newcomers were introduced to the exercise for the 
first time. 

The idea of the grass drill suggested itself to me 
in the course of a conversation with Stephen Chase, 
the former intercollegiate champion high hurdler 
and world's record holder. His spiked shoes long 
since laid aside, Mr. Chase was describing to me, 
during a train ride which found us fellow passengers, 
a game which he had taught to his two little boys, 
one three and the other five years of age. 

He caused them to lie on the floor, in unnaturally 
tangled-up postures arranged by himself, until, at 
a given signal, they were to imtangle themselves 
and jtunp to an erect, standing position, as speedily 
as possible. The prize to the winner was one cent. 
The most interesting part of the story to me was his 
statement that although at first the older boy 
invariably won the prize, their father was much 

27 



28 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



surprised and pleased to find, at the end of two weeks, 
that the competition was becoming intense, the 
problem of deciding the winner increasingly diffi- 
cult, and that the prizes were being divided on 
substantially a fifty-fifty basis. 

After the recital of this story my first thought was 
that if such an increase could be brought about in 
the mental alertness and bodily nimbleness of a 
three-year-old boy by the development of his speed 
and the eradication of the clumsiness natural to his 
age, what wonders might not be performed with 
the big, heavy men of imperfect co-ordination 
whom coaches are perpetually and often hopelessly 
attempting to develop into football players. The 
grass drill was the result of this refiection, and I have 
never ceased to be thankful to the children of 
Stephen Chase and to their father. The pleastue 
which he took in their development I have been able 
to appreciate and share the more completely when 
my two hundred-pounders in green began to be 
able to keep up with the small, fast men of a 
Dartmouth squad in the exacting movements of the 
grass drill. 

The grass drill is an extraordinary means of 
development for the long, heavy men, whose back 
muscles especially seem to need strengthening. 
And for all who participate in it this exercise leads 
to perfect muscular co-ordination through move- 
ments arduous but interesting, because involving 
both mental and physical effort besides an intense 
spirit of competition. The drill demands and 



I 



THE GRASS DRILL 29 

teaches immediate response to the word of com- 
mand. It has the priceless value that the test of 
endurance which it provides takes place under the 
direct supervision of the coach. The lazy man only 
too easily and nattirally foregoes a very large per- 
centage of the value to be derived from ordinary 
calisthenics; it being next to impossible for the 
leader to discover the lack of individual effort as 
the exercise is conducted. Furthermore, in calis- 
thenics there is apt to be too much exercise while 
the legs are held in a rigid position. This position 
of the legs is especially to be avoided in football. 
Every effort, on the contrary, should be made to 
loosen the muscles of the upper leg and to increase 
their flexibility and snap. 

To introduce the grass drill, line up the entire 
squad in rows six feet apart, with the men six feet 
apart in the rows. The commands are: Attention. 
Front. Right. Left. Back. Go. Faster. Slower. 
Halt. Rest. * * Attention' ' is the well-known position 
of a soldier, and all positions asstimed on these 
commands except '^attention'' and '*go'' are taken 
with the body stretched on the ground. At the com- 
mands **front,'' ' nght," 'left'' and ''back," the body 
is stretched rigidly along the ground ; on the first three 
with the head toward the line on which the coach 
or drill leader is stationed. The position ''back" 
is taken with feet to the front and head to the rear, 
but still at right angles to the line on which the 
men stood at attention. 

The arms in all positions other than '^attention" 



30 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



are purposely placed in the most clumsy and least 
helpful position, in order that the transitions from 
'*back'' or "front" to *1eft" or "right" may be 
rendered as difficult as possible and the muscles less 
frequently used brought into action. At these 
commands the men revolve their bodies in the 
fastest possible manner, never rising to the feet 
except at the command of ^'attention." 

All movements are to be made with the least 
possible motion, exertion or wasted effort, but with 
the greatest possible speed. At the command 
"front," given while the player is standing at 
attention, he throws his feet behind him and falls 
on his stomach, at the same time folding his arms 
so that his hands will protrude from beneath his 
arm-pits. 

If the next command is "back," the movement, 
when completed, finds him with the feet and head 
in reversed positions, the body lying supine and the 
arms folded behind and beneath, so that the finger 
tips protrude at the waist. At "right" or "left" 
the man rolls, revolves or drops himself, depending 
upon his former position, until he is Ijdng on either 
his right or his left side. He throws both arms behind 
him, grasping one wrist with the opposite hand. 

The balancing of the rigid body on either side 
in the position outlined is by no means easy. It 
calls for considerable practice and for muscular 
control. 

Hands, body, feet, neck, everything, in fact, 
should be used in making the revolving and twisting 



THE GRASS DRILL 



31 



movements. The purpose is to throw the body 
into each succeeding position with the greatest 
possible speed and to make it difficult to get the 
hands into a position to help. At the command 
**go,'* the men jump or scramble to their feet, face 
the line on which the drill leader stands, and begin 
the half dancing, half running motions of a sprinter's 
loosening-up exercise. This running, or rather 
trotting, while neither advancing nor retreating, is 
accompanied by high knee action. The further 
command ''faster" increases the speed. This aux- 
iliary command can be reiterated until the men 
reach their limit in rapidity of motion. 

After attaining this limit it is advisable at first, 
by periodic commands of ''slower,'' to decrease the 
speed of motion until the command "attention'' is 
suddenly given. The command "attention," for 
brevity and snap, may be abbreviated to " 'tention." 

One of the most thrilling and wonderful exhibi- 
tions by the squad is accomplished when the men, 
having been given the command "go," and brought 
by successive stages to the highest possible develop- 
ment of speed, suddenly hear the command "front." 
After three weeks to a month of practice, the sud- 
denness of the change from the extreme of upright 
activity to a prostrate position on the groimd, and 
the ease with which it is accomplished, are amazing. 
One might conclude from this description that the 
drill is too rough, and might easily lead to broken 
bones. As a matter of fact, the men readily acquire 
the skill needed to make a perfect fall, and in six 



32 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



years I have never seen an injury resulting from the 
grass drill. 

The command **rest*' may be given while the 
men are in any position; preferably after the com- 
mand *'back'* has been executed, or the command 
"attention/* If the ground is dry, the former 
position is preferable for rest, as the relief is more 
complete in that position. The command **rest'' 
should mean complete relaxation, the men merely 
retaining their positions on the ground or standing, 
according to their positions when the command 
is given. 

Participation in this drill for one month v/ill 
produce notable results, especially in the clumsy 
men and in the tall, heavy men. In four to six 
weeks the muscular development in heavy men of 
the long, rangy type has been amazing. The drill 
is very easy to learn, and can be mastered in two 
days when the commands are given slowly. It 
should be borne in mind that the exercise is severe, 
though in no sense dangerous, even when the com- 
mand **back'' is given while the men are standing at 
attention; therefore the men should be allowed 
frequent rests, and preferably when they are on the 
ground. 

The mental benefits are often as pronounced as the 
physical. Just as a man in a football scrimmage 
finds himself unable to think quickly while his body 
occupies an unnatural position, just so participants 
in the grass drill find it difficult at first to follow and 
instantly execute the commands. Even after the 



THE GRASS DRILL 



33 



drill has been thoroughly mastered, the mental 
processes demanded are by no means simple, as 
greatly increased speed is called for. Logically, the 
drill develops greater speed and accuracy of thought 
in the man, and the ability to think speedily and 
accurately whatever the physical dilemma. 

The grass drill had been in use for six years at 
Dartmouth, and by Dartmouth coached teams, 
when America entered the world war. Army 
officers who had seen the exercise in operation were 
full of appreciation of its value as a means of con- 
ditioning soldiers, physically and mentally. The 
adoption of this drill for the entire forces in France 
was contemplated, but the almost continual rain 
and mud encountered abroad rendered the idea 
impractical as the soldier has only one suit of clothes. 

Coaches who adopt the grass drill should make 
use of it every day, except in excessively rainy or 
muddy weather, in order to get the full benefit. 
The exercise, of course, shoiild not be overdone. 
The coach stands in front, to watch the effect of the 
work on the men, and to see to it that each move 
is completed by every man. The drill can be made 
very interesting, and an extraordinary amount of 
effective exercise can be teased out of men where 
less salutary means would often prove mere drudgery. 



CHAPTER VI 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES, AND WATER 

CAiiEFUL weighing of each player on accurate 
scales before and after every practice will provide 
coach and trainer with the surest index to physical 
and mental condition in the squad. Care of the 
scales and the task of weighing should be included 
among the duties of painstaking assistant managers. 

The players* names may be tabulated alpha- 
betically on a large pasteboard sheet, arranged with 
parallel columns for each practice session, one sheet 
covering several weeks. Each colimm should be 
wide enough to include two sets of figures: the 
weight of each man going out, and his weight 
retimiing from the field. This sheet, when not in 
use, should be posted in plain sight in the training 
quarters. Its presence there helps to arouse that 
interest which induces men to give some serious 
thought to their own physical condition, with 
regard to proper eating, adequate sleep and sys- 
tematic care of the body. 

It may be argued that attention to weights may 
tend to breed worry in certain men and render 
them neurasthenic. The answer is that all red- 
blooded boys are so eager to make the tean^ that 

34 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 35 



each and every one of them may in any event 
develop neurasthenia, unless an outwardly careless 
treatment of all deficiencies is adopted by trainer 
and coach. Neurotic S3rtnptoms can be detected at 
the scales more promptly than anywhere else, and 
it is there, too, that the formula of outward careless- 
ness can be applied most effectively. But outward 
carelessness should be merely the mask for proper 
solicitude and prompt corrective action; operative 
in the case of the neurotic by association with happy 
natures, and by tactful investigation with a view 
to the application of remedies which will reach the 
cause. 

Either the coach or the trainer or at least some 
person in authority in the football department 
shoiild be a man who will belittle all injiuries to the 
men who receive them; who is always optimistic, 
while never explanatory; who will talk fight, and 
enlarge upon the merits of great fighters. But 
while talking with set purpose in a fixed direction, 
the trainer, in reality, will work in quite another; 
and a too rapid loss of weight, when not regained for 
the most part during the intervals of rest and sleep, 
is one of the danger signs which put a competent 
physical director instantly on watch. At least 
three-fourths of the weight stripped off during a 
day's practice should be regained overnight, except- 
ing in the case of the excessively fleshy candidate 
whose poundage is being reduced by a special 
regime of exercise, heat and diet. 

If a football man is losing too much weight on 



36 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



exercise and not getting enough of it back, some- 
thing is wrong. Probably the man is reducing not 
his superfluous flesh but the useful tissues of his 
body, and also his stamina and nervous energy. 
Working like a steam engine, he has already ex- 
hausted the steam engine's supply of water, contained 
in his body in the fat. This fat is not entirely 
useless. It should be gradually converted into hard, 
substantial tissue, rather than stripped away. 

All weights should be kept as nearly as possible 
at the starting point as is consistent with speed and 
endurance, and the man who happens to carry a 
thin layer of external fat at the beginning of a 
season should lose very little of it during the first 
fortnight. Thereafter his weight should tend to 
increase. The normal man should suffer no loss 
of weight after the middle of the season, except 
temporarily in hard scrimmages or games. 

Many teams and players are still trained on the 
old, obsolete and highly dangerous theory that it 
is fatal to take liquids into the system during hard 
exercise. As a matter of fact, the active human 
body should, on the contrary, be treated like a steam 
engine. It should be supplied with its water for 
fuel purposes. If there is neither water nor fat in 
the system to supply energy, valuable flesh and 
muscle must suffer. Oatmeal water in the pro- 
portion of one to four should be supplied during 
practice, if men are expected to work and not to 
lose weight unnecessarily. During a hard practice 
the average man can absorb a pint of this refresh- 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 37 



ment if given to him at three or four intervals. 
In fact, the trainer should see to it that the men 
do dip their noses in the bucket, and this is espe- 
cially true and especially important at mid-season. 
Thousands of players have become overtrained, 
without the knowledge of their overseers, and have 
been accused of falling off in their play, or even of 
quitting, when actually their sum total of failure 
could have been avoided easily by the proper use 
of water during practice. 

Too much water, like too much of anything, is 
harmful. To say that a man should drink a lot of 
water dining or after hard practice, or a game, 
would be foolish. Such teaching might have 
dangerous consequences; but if the water is not in the 
system, the tissues must suffer. Therefore it is 
advisable, in all except specific cases of excessive 
weight, to lead the squad to water like animals, or 
as one would keep a locomotive supplied. The 
amount taken at one time should be small, but 
water should be served to the men at least thrice 
during the afternoon workout. A total of a pint 
of water, taken at intervals during practice or a 
game, cannot harm and must do good, while a 
quart and a pint additional of water taken 
during the remainder of the day, equalling six 
ordinary glasses, is not too much for a man in 
training. 

The old theory of abstinence from water by 
athletes has left many failiu^es and some wrecks 
along the way, and the ancient command: Gargle, 



38 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



don't swallow itr* is still audible on football fields 
and elsewhere. It is absurd and almost criminal 
to see the great boxer train for his contest under 
extreme mental and physical pressure, rinsing his 
throat, religiously, instead of taking down the small 
swallow of water which would improve his mental 
and physical condition at least ten per cent. The 
gargle is one of the old, iron-clad customs of the 
dark ages. It is a horrible fallacy. 

Concerning the ethical questions involved in the 
establishment and maintenance of a training table 
there has been much debate. Practically, the 
training table is very necessary, and in the sphere 
of ethics I cannot grant that objectors have estab- 
lished a valid position of antagonism. 

Football players are young and impressionable, 
and every reasonable attention that can be shown 
them receives its reward in increased effort. A seat 
at the table should be used as far as possible as a 
reward of merit. When so recognized many players 
can be encouraged to stay with the game and be 
developed through receiving the honor of being 
taken to the table. The very fact of this disposition 
proves, on the face of it, that the man is considered 
worthy timber. To the young man himself, it 
means the inward glow of thinking that any day he 
may begin to realize his possibilities, become a 
whirlwind, and win his letter as well as fame. 
Again, the grind of the football season at the two- 
thirds stage is monotonous and severe. To take a 
few players from the scrub to the training table is 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 39 



one very encouraging and stimulating method of 
tiding over this vicious spot in the season. 

And because everything in reason should be done 
at all times to brighten the mental outlook of the 
football player, to keep him serene of spirit, of 
better cheer than before, so the training table fur- 
nishes the coach with an important means of afford- 
ing contrast and entertainment, and of placing men 
in a helpful environment. 

As a means of physical improvement, the training 
table gives the players a ch^ance to live differently, 
and to live rather better than they would be apt 
to do ordinarily. Boarding and fraternity houses 
in college towns undoubtedly provide too much 
pastry, pudding sauces and gravies, too much tea 
and coffee and too much fried food for the best 
interests of the undergraduate stomach. It is true 
that the football player could digest these dainties 
with less actual injury than the non-athletic student, 
but as the object of training is to make the player 
as superior as possible, he should be required to 
abstain from eating anything which could fail to 
benefit him. There is a certain thrill which accom- 
panies denial, and the football man who is put on 
the table, and is thereby impressed with the fact 
that his eating and drinking is regarded as specially 
important, feels at once that it is almost an honor 
to be asked to abstain from eating and drinking 
certain things. 

Training table, however, need not exclude all of 
the smaU pleasures of life with iron rigidity. Strict 



40 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



avoidance of tea and coffee is not essential or even 
advisable. These luxuries, served out with judg- 
ment as special boons, give the men greater con- 
tentment. Tea and coffee in excess are undoubtedly 
injurious, but the damage they do is after all slight 
compared, for instance, with milk, when this food, 
as at nearly every training table, is indulged in 
without restraint. Many of the strongest athletes 
have seriously injured themselves for the work in 
hand on the assimaption that it is impossible to 
drink too much milk. One great tackle, selected 
by Walter Camp and a host of other experts for 
their '^alF' teams, drank so much milk before this 
peculiarity of his appetite was discovered and 
checked that he induced an internal condition 
strikingly suggestive of fatty degeneration. A 
fifty yard sprint left him gasping and breathless. 
Some men, as a matter of fact, cannot drink milk 
at all without being injured for athletics. A quart 
of milk a day is sufficient for almost any athlete. 

As for cream, nothing makes a man more logy. 
One can almost feel it choking his wind as it slides 
deliciously down the throat in its happy environ- 
ment of strawberries or peaches. Milk, rather than 
cream, should by all means be served with cereals at 
a training table, and used, too, with the hot bever- 
ages permitted. Table water should be cooled in 
glass jars in the refrigerator, but not served with 
ice. The men should be discouraged from drinking 
while eating. Before and after the meal a glass of 
water is sufficient. While no serious harm may 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 41 



result from the moderate use of water during meals, 
the arguments against the practice are sufficiently- 
strong to govern the man who is striving for the 
attainment of the highest form of physical excellence. 

Yeast bread less than twenty-four hours old 
should not be eaten by anybody, unless thoroughly 
toasted. Toast is occasionally somewhat con- 
stipating, and stale bread is the preferable food for 
athletes. Whole wheat, rye, barley and oatmeal 
breads are all more nourishing than white. The 
bread supply should be carefully selected. It is 
very important that this be done. Ordinary baker's 
bread is not good enough. 

The training table should supply all the vege- 
tables, excepting turnips, carefully cooked and 
properly served. Vegetables should feature espe- 
cially at the evening meal, when by their use the 
men may avoid the error of constiming too much 
meat. Men can digest more meat during the foot- 
ball season than at other times, but they will be 
better off if they consume comparatively small 
quantities of it at the evening meal. However, the 
backbone of the training table is its liberal supply 
of high-grade lamb and beef, chops and steaks. 
Eggs are a staple, too. Fresh fish, poultry, bacon, 
and occasionally ham, should be included for the 
sake of variety, but not veal or pork; except that 
on rare occasions a man who is naturally a great 
pork eater may be allowed a cut of good pork as a 
special boon, to encourage him in the belief that 
life is, after all, worth living. 



42 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



It is of the utmost importance that the food 
shall be properly cooked and brought to table, 
which means, among other things, that the players 
must be prompt in their attendance at meals, so 
that courses may be served in digestible condition. 
Potatoes and eggs should not be fried in heavy 
grease. Thick soups are to be avoided, and thin 
soups should be skimmed repeatedly before they 
appear on the table. Butter, like cream, is a thing 
to be used sparingly by athletes. Baked beans 
should be thoroughly cooked. When they are 
thoroughly cooked, they become one of the most 
strengthening articles of diet that an athlete can 
select. 

The supply of fresh and cooked fruit should be 
as abundant as possible. Prunes are not to be 
disdained, by any means, and among the fresh 
fruits only bananas need to be regarded with the 
slightest suspicion. Home-made jam, jelly and 
marmalade give variety to the bill of fare. Pota- 
toes are to be avoided if fried, and also when reduc- 
tion of weight has become imperative. All kinds 
of boiled greens are desirable. Griddle cakes in 
the morning need not horrify a sensible trainer. 
The men can digest them without injury. The 
great danger from griddle cakes is found in the 
syrups which usually accompany them. Served 
with a little butter and sugar, the damage they do 
is negligible. 

For desserts, puddings and fruit salads are safest 
things to offer. As a general rule, the ban on pie 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 43 



and otjier lard-made pastry should very seldom be 
lifted. Plain cake, however, follows only the rule 
for bread; when new-made it is unfit for consump- 
tion. Many trainers will serve cottage pudding 
whose hands go up in horror at the mention of cake. 
Cottage pudding plainly implies cake, and the 
material used in this confection should stand at 
least twenty-four hours after the original baking. 
Indian pudding, bread pudding, com starch, tapi- 
oca, rice and custards are recommended, and ice 
cream may be served occasionally for variety. 
Nuts and raisins also provide a welcome relief in 
the dreary wilderness of puddings. 

Players and others should avoid overindulgence 
in salt. Often, through a misconception of its use, 
or through appetite, men use salt to a degree which 
thickens the blood, to the ultimate destruction of 
health. • 

A trainer should study individual peculiarities 
and tastes in the matter of diet for just such indi- 
vidual excesses as overindulgence in salt or milk. 
Athletes, moreover, are apt to be high strung, 
nervous, and at times irritable. Well kept, cleanly, 
airy, sunny eating rooms wUl offend nobody; while, 
on the other hand, many a young man reared in an 
atmosphere of refinement has become disgusted 
and nauseated by the slap-dash service and stained 
tablecloth of the average training table. The linen 
should be white, the glass and silver polished until 
they shine. 

The seating arrangement at table should be 



44 INSIDE FOOTBALL 

capable of such readjustment as will remove a sensi- 
tive man from the immediate neighborhood of one 
whose taste in wit and humor, or whose audible 
method of attacking soup, is plainly causing discom- 
fort and loss of appetite. 

Break up cliques and fraternity groups. For 
the time being the greatest frat in college is the 
squad. 

The trainer, presiding at table as he does, can 
also see to it that enough conversation and disci- 
pline is maintained to counteract the American 
tendency to strive for records in speed while acquir- 
ing the necessary amount of nourishment. On 
the walls may well hang at least one picture of a 
cow, an animal whose thoroughness in the matter 
of mastication of food offers an example singularly 
worthy of imitation during the football season. 
Arrange, if possible, the table in the form of a square 
or circle, with the sitters facing inward, both for 
sociability's sake and in order that their appetite 
and contentment, or the lack of either, can be readily 
noted by the presiding officers. 

Avoid serious football talk, for the benefit of the 
few who otherwise vAll begin immediately to play 
the game mentally, and bolt their food. Jokes, 
based on the humorous incidents of thq gridiron, 
are allowable, but there should be nothing in the 
nature of serious discussion or of adverse criticism. 

Without babying his men unnecessarily, the 
trainer decidedly should give attention to those 
who at certain stages of the season need pampering. 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 45 



There are times when it is far better to disregard 
training rules and consult an individual appetite; 
at such a time a good cut of roast pork, with the 
fat trimmed off, would often do an individual far 
more good than harm. In a more extreme case, 
when a man's recorded weights show that he is 
inclined to get fine, it sometimes pays to dismiss 
him from the training table for a time, and allow 
him carefully cooked food of his own selection 
elsewhere. 

The varsity captain, while properly safeguarding 
his official prestige, should be the chum of his men 
while at table. That is to say, he should be amen- 
able to the trainer's discipline in the matter of eat- 
ing and drinking. 

If there is a trainer, the head coach should eat 
elsewhere than at the table, where a degree of famil- 
iarity obtains which would include the coach, if 
present, and which is too pronounced for the very 
best results in the handling of the men. This as a 
general proposition. The coach should, of course, 
show the utmost interest in the conduct of meals, 
both by occasional visits and by intelligent question- 
ing of members of the squad. 

Meals should be served at the same hour through- 
out the season, excepting that on the day of a game 
set for an earlier hour than the regular hour of 
practice, the lunch hour should be set back, and the 
quantity of food reduced. This delicate operation 
should be accomplished without leaving any open- 
ing through which the mental attitude of the players 



46 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



can be injured. The player must not be permitted 
to imagine that starvation may overtake him 
between the earlier hour of luncheon and the end 
of the game; nor should he be given excuse for sus- 
pecting that his bodily strength may fail him in 
the first quarter, because of undernourishment at 
noonday. 

At the same time, players should be told plainly 
that piling the stomach with food before a game is 
aiding the opposition; and that the digestion is 
unequal, during the nervous excitement which pre- 
cedes a great game, to the performance of its ordi- 
nary task. A shirred egg with toast and tea is an 
entirely adequate luncheon for a player who is going 
into a championship game, and if the game is to 
begin at two o'clock the men should sit at table not 
later than eleven forty-five in the morning. At 
least two hours should always elapse between the 
end of a meal and the beginning of any period of 
severe physical exercise. 

While outwardly belittling all injuries, the trainer 
and his assistants in reality will keep sharp eyes 
open for the merest scratches. The smallest cut 
may become infected and cause serious loss of 
efficiency. They must also look out for incipient 
boils, avoiding the use of poultices, which relieve 
one infection while spreading it to surrounding 
healthy tissue. Boils should be cut through with 
the proper surgical instrument in competent hands, 
and the infected area thoroughly washed out with 
solutions of alcohol or iodine. 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 47 



Cuts in safe places should be left open to the air 
and sunlight, but they must usually be covered for 
protection, and frequent attention must be given 
to the processes going on beneath the bandage. 

The doctor or doctors who cooperate with the 
football department, and to whom should be reserved 
the treatment of all fractures, actual or suspected, 
ought to work along the same lines as the coach 
and trainer. The doctor should not go into too 
much detail in informing a player of the nature of 
minor injuries, and should strive to encourage in 
the injured man the mental attitude which will aid 
him in healing his own troubles and save him, 
moreover, for future efficiency. If necessary, he 
can have the player laid off, without going too 
deeply into the nomenclature of his specific injury. 

Both physician and trainer, when any of the 
authority is delegated to them, should use it for the 
good of the coach, who, in using properly his own 
authority for the good of the team, is safeguarding 
the interests of every member of the football depart- 
ment. The coach, whether he is fortunate enough 
to have a competent trainer or not, must know as 
much as a trainer about the physical and mental 
condition of his men. He must understand, whether 
the trainer does or not, that mental and physical 
condition go hand in hand together; that it is almost 
impossible to draw the line between them. With 
a stem sense of his responsibility for the health 
and well-being of the young men entrusted to his 
care and guidance he must learn to lose games, if 



48 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



necessary, by making substitutions, rather than 
permit a player to suffer permanent harm by play- 
ing even in the final game of his career while physi- 
cally unfit. Common sense will teach the coach 
to avoid the error of using up in a preliminary game 
a player on whom reliance is placed for the cham- 
pionship contests. 

The trainer's responsibilities are obviously heavy; 
but he should never be given any authority, nor 
should he assume any privileges, that will tend to 
weaken the hold of the coach on the men. If it is 
necessary to give the trainer the right to take men 
out of the game, then the trainer should never 
omit to give the final word to the coach, so that the 
players will understand that the coach is running 
the team. 

The great difficulty in cases of divided authority 
comes in the fact that if one lazy man discovers a 
possible and likely avoidance of his tribulations 
through appeal to the trainer, the whole squad 
takes cognizance of this interesting condition of 
affairs. Nevertheless, a trainer who goes on the 
field to consider an injured man unquestionably 
should be in a position to take the man out of the 
game, if necessary. But coach and trainer should 
have a common knowledge of the men who compose 
the machine. They should know the reliables as 
well as the fakers. The trainer should know when 
he sees a man stretched out on the field of play the 
probabilities of his being really injured, and that he 
and the coach understand the man in the same 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 49 



way. If in doubt, he should remove the supposedly- 
injured man; but he should make no haphazard 
guesses that will tend to injure the esprit de corps. 
He should make no remarks as to the injury of the 
player, remembering that he is treating one man 
and not the squad; remembering also that unnec- 
essary condolences and learned disquisitions on an 
injury may seriously affect the player's mental 
condition, present and future, and his recovery. 
A trainer, in removing an injured player from the 
field, may lose the game by a remark which fills 
the listening players with undue fear or gives them 
a mental shock sufficient to undermine their whole- 
hearted effort. It takes eleven men to play the 
game, and one or two men, physically perfect but 
mentally affected, are often difficult to discover 
from the side lines although at the same time they 
may be actually so inefficient as to ruin team work 
and success. Finally, the trainer should never 
attempt to convince the players that he is a football 
coach, whatever his merits in that direction may 
actually be. He should regard himself rather as 
the right arm of the coach, and their mystical imion 
should be a very real one in point of actual fact. 

It is especially essential that the coach under- 
stand the desirability of developing his team with 
the least possible amount of scrimmage. Better 
an underscrimmaged than an overscrimmaged team. 
One of the best teams ever known to the writer had 
but one short scrimmage of five minutes' duration, 
and that only to perfect a new play, during the last 



50 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



five and a half weeks of the season. To be sure, this 
unusual lack of scrimmage work was due to a 
decision that the substitute material was especially 
weak; so that although much attention was paid 
to scrimmaging the substitutes, to develop them, 
the varsity team proper was not scrimmaged during 
the period mentioned. No coach should order 
scrimmage without careful planning of its object, 
or allow scriramage to start without deciding as to 
its approximate length. He shotild inform his 
trainer or other assistant and be notified frequently 
of the flight of time. He will require such notifica- 
tion because, as it is impossible for a coach to attain 
success without enthusiasm, so it is impossible for 
an enthusiastic coach to realize the speedy passage 
of time during scrimmage. He must have some 
one to serve the useful purpose of an alarm clock, 
or he will attempt to make all of his corrections in 
one day. Young men are very strong, but young 
men overworked are very weak, and a man abused 
even at his favorite pastime will lose interest. 
And it is much easier to lose interest than to 
revive it. 

Handling and playing with a football under the 
right conditions before school or college begins 
give a candidate a flying start. The average young 
man takes a certain amount of exercise during the 
summer as a preparation for football. Tennis and 
baseball, not indulged in to excess, afford as natural 
a preparation as any ; while golf, walking and riding 
are excellent. Yachting and motor car driving 



I 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 51 

have no preparatory value. Swimnaing fails to 
develop successful land rauscles. 

There have been several examples of seashore life 
guards who have found it difficult to get into shape 
for football, and who have proved to be compara- 
tively short of wind, less responsive of muscle, and 
more lacking in stamina. In fact, it is quite possi- 
ble to overestimate the value of bathing and swim- 
ming in the life of an athlete. The temporary glow 
and exhilaration which follows a bath is inevitably 
followed by a reaction, and tmquestionably too much 
bathing lowers the vitality and resistance. After 
hard work it is essential that a man cleanse his 
body, using cool to cold water, however; as warm 
water is particularly weakening. The exposiure to 
water should be as brief as consistent with cleanU- 
ness. A football player should endeavor to get as 
clean as he can on the least possible quantity of 
water after practice, and to let the rest of the water 
alone as completely as possible during the remainder 
of the day; remembering that luxury and football 
do not go together. 

If a man can keep clean by the one bath which he 
takes after practice, he should not take any more. 
The cold shower at night before retiring, which 
many young collegians seem, for various reasons, 
to regard as essential, should be avoided. Properly 
instructed youths know nowadays that nocturnal 
emissions, if not abnormally frequent, are entirely 
natural, carry no injurious consequences and afford 
no occasion for alarm. The young man who has 



52 



INSIDE FOOTBALL > 



been so instructed and who attaches no importance 
to natural incidents is under no danger that his 
uninstructed fears might become a reality. 

Players who go under the shower daily should 
note the percentage of bald major leaguers in base- 
ball, and accordingly refrain from wetting the hair 
too often — ^although many men, and women, too, 
wet the hair every day and yet carry abundant 
tresses through a long lifetime. The player should 
start the season with a hair cut, and should wear a 
bathing cap when he goes under the shower, unless 
his hair be very dirty or sweaty. 

He should also be advised strongly against bor- 
rowing headgear and other protective devices 
worn next the skin. Seemingly healthy men have 
caused infections of the skin in other healthy men 
by exchanging headgear, especially where a tight 
fit is effected by the swap. Ordinary perspiration 
may exert an extremely irritating effect. 

Prom eminent medical authority and experience 
coaches and trainers have found that a large majority 
of physical deficiencies can be cured by proper 
applications of hot and cold water. The general 
rule to follow is to use cold water for unopened 
wounds, such as ordinary black eyes, swollen 
testicles and '*charley horses*'; while hot water is 
usually applied to bleeding wounds, both to relieve 
pain and to promote a flow of blood sufficient to 
cleanse the injury and to draw out the dead and 
broken tissue. 

For injuries involving ligaments, or where the 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 53 



swelling IS severe, it is often of great value, after 
making use of ice bags, to apply massage, with 
moderate strength, in order to aid the restoration 
of normal circulation. Then make a second series 
of cold applications, and, finally, bandage the part. 
In obstinate cases, leave the cold packs in position. 
Alternating ice applications with moderate massage 
will relieve **charley horse" more quickly than any 
other treatment. Water-on-the-knee or on the 
elbow, readily diagnosed by the softness of the 
swelling occasioned, should be treated with dry 
heat, to cause perspiration which will draw off the 
water in that way and, if possible, avert the neces- 
sity of surgical intervention. Dry heat is also 
employed to requicken circulation in case of injury 
to the joints, or wherever ligaments are abundant, 
as the use of hot water applications may cause 
serious adhesions. 

Players driven so hard on the football field that 
they are unable to study because of drowsiness, 
other things being equal, are getting too much work. 
It is a mistake to suppose that men can be kept 
attentive to football all the afternoon and evening 
and still maintain a satisfactory rating in scholar- 
ship. A boy at school or college is, or should be, 
there for education first, with athletics as a part 
and by no means the whole of the curriculum. 

The question of physical condition in relation to 
Lord's Day observance is sometimes perplexing. 
It may be said that a man who undertakes a foot- 
ball season owes himself the duty of taking the best 



64 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



possible care of himself, mentally and physically. 
After playing a game on the Saturday, he needs 
some form of light exercise on Sunday, to loosen his 
muscles and correct slight injuries by quickening 
the circulation. It becomes his duty to accept the 
attentions of the rubbers, and it is advisable for the 
whole squad to take a walk in the country, at a gait 
as lively as the time of the season renders natural, 
this exercise to be followed by a short cold shower 
bath and a vigorous rubdown. An entire layoff 
from Saturday until Monday has been shown in a 
long series of years to be injurious. A large per- 
centage of injuries are suffered on Monday, despite 
the fact that coaches never work a man that day 
who has even a slight injury, and hesitate to give 
much sudden hard work even to the men who are 
fit. When the muscles are stiff, the tendency to 
protect small bruises is all the more pronounced, and 
injuries occur because the man is not working in a 
natural position, but is contracting his muscles 
defensively when he should be distending them 
for attack. 

The trainer should be assisted if not by expert 
massaeurs at least by rubbers who can carry out the 
instructions of an experienced head. Little sore 
spots, slight wrenches and unimportant muscle 
bruises can be cured by one or two massage treat- 
ments. It is highly advisable from the standpoint 
of the athlete's peace of mind, and to preserve his 
enthusiasnJi, that he be cared for by the rubber after 
a scrimmage or game. After great efforts the blood 



TRAINING, DIET, INJURIES 55 



settles down, as if for a rest. Fatigue toxins form, 
and injinies become painful. Depression of the 
player's spirits, just what coaches are always 
fighting against, occurs. 

An intelligent and helpful rubber can do a great 
deal, incidentally, to keep a man filled with love of 
the game and a scorn of slight injuries; never, 
however, allowing him to take unnecessary or foolish 
chances by failing to report to the trainer a con- 
dition which appears to be serious. 

A brisk rub night and morning for every football 
man would be ideal from the trainer's standpoint, 
but unfortunately there are never rubbers enough 
to go around. But the player's roommate, or any 
other friend who has the interest of the game and 
of the school at heart, can render very valuable 
service by volunteering as a rubber and submitting 
himself to necessary instruction in the art. 

The trainer's intention must always be to send 
as few men as possible home from football with 
depressed souls. One discouraged spirit, at certain 
times in the season, working diligently as gloom 
ever does, speedily gathers other malcontents to his 
banner. The trainer should teach the joys and 
thrills of the game, and the necessity of sufficient 
sleep, regular hours and a system for everything. 
It is impossible to keep a man joyful when his 
bowels are on a strike. Every man should report 
to the trainer the failure of his bowels to operate 
regularly and at least once every day. A man with 
diarrhoea should not be worked. He needs castor 



56 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



oil, or a dose of salts, properly administered with 
relation to meals, and rest. If the weather is 
favorable, let him be present on the field to learn 
what he can, but by observation and attention and 
not through physical effort. 

Trainers should give special observation early in 
the season to the tall, rangy men. Four out of five 
of them are weak in the back and are unable to 
endure the gaff as well as men bviilt closer to the 
ground. 



CHAPTER VII 



WELCOMING THE OLD GRAD 

There is a much better understanding nowa- 
days than formerly regarding the proper scope and 
fimction of graduates who revisit the campus to 
assist the coach and to bring back the inspiration of 
many hard-fought fields to the players. The 
graduates themselves understand that they should 
not and must not attempt to coach players except 
in the fullest accord with the central policy and plan. 
They do not asstmae to know what any man needs 
unless satisfied that they understand the whole 
system of coaching. 

There was a time when zealous graduates wrought 
a great deal of confusion in more than one football 
camp. One coach who attained later to high renown, 
began his regime by cleaning out a whole regiment 
of former stars, because convinced that a complete 
change of system was necessary. He was resolved 
that henceforth his men should receive consistent 
coaching, directed toward predetermined objects. 

It is obvious that if the ends are coached in a 
certain manner, the tackle play also will be entirely 
different from what it would be if the ends 
were being instructed otherwise, A voltmteer 

67 



58 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



graduate coach, attempting on his own responsi- 
bility to make alterations in the play of an end, 
without taking the head coach into his confidence, 
might easily disrupt team work; and often he did. 

Veteran stars nowadays have learned sufficient 
self -repression, as a rule, and their attitude more 
nearly than formerly represents that of a dignitary 
on a reviewing stand. They go on the field to urge 
and inspire the men, congratulating them or calling 
them down if sure of their premises; but specific 
picking out of any detail that may permit of two 
views, and attempts at correction or advice thereon, 
would no longer be ventured, I believe. 

There is only one way to coach; coach alone if 
you must; have assistants, from one to four, if you 
can get them, selected to cover fairly the whole 
game, under the style you have decided to follow, 
and to help develop material for future seasons. 
Give these assistants strict instructions that no 
other style is to be attempted without obtaining the 
sanction of the head coach. It is very pleasant, 
if a head coach, to be considered a fine fellow by 
one's assistants, but it is better to be considered 
a **mean cuss'' than a **fine fellow," at the expense 
of discipline and thoroughness. One or two inex- 
perienced assistants, who are willing to coach under 
instructions, are far more useful than any number 
of high-class and experienced aids who are jealous 
of their own ideas and insist upon urging them to 
the players in the absence of the head coach. 

The return of the old, scarred veterans to the 



WELCOMING THE OLD GRAD 59 



college town to help the team is a very great benefit 
when these ideas are as generally accepted and as 
acceptable as they seem to be nowadays. The 
inspiration to the player of a new face and an old 
name, at a stage of the season when time and 
tempers are running short, is immediate and 
immensely helpful. These reunions of veterans, 
moreover, are occasions so entirely delightful and in 
accord with the spirit of the sport that no one would 
desire to see them discontinued, and I hope that 
they never will be. 



CHAPTER VIII 

CAPTAINS AND THEIR AUTHORITY 

The captain should have the authority, until 
he abuses it, to call for a substitute to take a man's 
place during a game. He can see things oftentimes 
that the coach from the sideline is unable to detect. 
But the moment abuse or favoritism steps in, this 
power should be taken from him. The coach can 
use his own method, as circumstances dictate, to 
communicate this change to a captain; but the cap- 
tain should be spared such humiliation as might 
hurt his play or the confidence of the team in him. 
There should always be a head to any serious busi- 
ness. No sane, logical person could consider any 
one else, except the man who has been engaged 
because of demonstrated ability and superior experi- 
ence as the head of a football team. That man is 
the coach. 

Like a man in business, a captain who talks too 
much, is seldom able to command attention. Speech 
making, as a habit, is to be deplored. Words of 
commendation or of justifiable complaint to indi- 
viduals are advisable; but his address to the team 

60 



CAPTAINS AND THEIR AUTHORITY 61 



as a whole, on or off the field, should be selected 
with the nicest discernment, used as seldom as possi- 
ble, and at the psychological moment only. 

By custom, at many schools, the captain is 
expected to talk as if he were a superior being. He 
should not forget that he was a private the season 
before, took his medicine from the coaches like the 
rest, and exhibited his defects to his team mates. 
They have thought enough of him to elect him 
captain, but when occasion arises they can recall 
his defects in seasons past very quickly, as well as 
his present defects. Even the soldier is human, 
though oftentimes his superior officer forgets it. 

If a captain, as sometimes happens, is not a good 
mixer with his men off the field, he should, without 
in any way weakening his position, avoid unneces- 
sary association with them. Here the word "unnec- 
essary'* is important. No captain should ever 
place himself in a position to be criticized adversely 
by avoiding reasonable association. Bearing in 
mind at such times the importance of maintaining 
the prestige his captaincy should give him, he 
must show entire readiness to meet and talk and 
joke with the players. In fact, so far as possible, 
his status as captain should disappear on these 
occasions, which should, however, be few. 

The good mixer can afford to associate more 
often with his men as an equal, without weakening 
his prestige on the field. 

The captain should take exceeding care to be 
in fine fettle when his season opens. He is looking 



62 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



disaster in the eye if he assumes the position of a 
guardian and overseer only; of the man who is 
through with the pick and shovel, but is going to 
tell his last year's playmates how and where to dig. 
To be sure, he should convince them at the begin- 
ning of the season, and maintain that position 
throughout, that he is their leader. But he should 
be able and eager to help carry the burden and to 
do, if anything, a little more than his share. 

He should talk, and he only should talk, to the 
officials during the game, on most points. He 
should know the basis of his contention; which does 
not preclude his having other men on the team who 
also know the rules and the right or wrong of the 
point involved. 

He should make it a rule never to interfere with 
the quarterback, unless fully satisfied that inter- 
vention is necessary. Even then he should not 
order a change in the signal unless the quarter is 
unable to convince him that the original signal 
should stand. If possible to avoid it, do not weaken 
the quarterback's confidence in his own good judg- 
ment. 

At some colleges and schools the duties and 
privileges of the varsity football captain have 
declined and diminished to two. He runs on the 
field ahead of the team, carrying the ball; and he 
continues to hold the chief implement of the game 
in the group picture taken at the end of the season. 

At the other extreme, where the tradition of the 
captain's prestige ha3 persisted longest, is the 



CAPTAINS AND THEIR AUTHORITY 63 

undergraduate leader who takes advice grudgingly 
from the elders of the game, picks his own coach, 
and raises more or less doubt as to who may be the 
president of the college or school. Where is the 
reasonable mean between these two extremes? 

Sound football does not admit of the election of 
a captain on grounds of popularity or politics. The 
captain should be chosen for his fighting quality 
and playing ability. The extraordinary power of 
leadership, often discovered at election time in 
some man who has never had actual opporttmity 
to prove that he has it, develops too often as propa- 
ganda, indulged in by enthusiastic political groups. 
The biggest men on a football team in the day of 
battle are the men who produce results, regardless 
of their popularity or affiliations off the field. . 

Give the players the leader of their natural choice, 
who can be their inspiration where inspiration wins. 
I believe that a captain should be a senior, if a suit- 
able man can be found in that class. It is better 
for the game, however, to take a junior choice, if 
the man has the real, big qualifications, than a 
senior who from all indications will not qualify. 
No senior worthy of his school or college will hesi- 
tate to give his best to a junior captain if the jimior 
is a better man than he. 

You are not trying to make a hit with your 
adversary by your choice of a captain; you are 
trying to make a hit with your own team, and no 
subterfuge should hide this truth. The captaincy 
is, and should be, a reward of merit; for there is 



64 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



no ofher solid basis in the showing up to that time 
on which to elect. 

It is often debated whether the captaincy award 
should be so considered, or whether captains should 
be chosen for ideal qualities, such as a fancied 
ability to lead. Both points of view are harmonized 
when the true scrapper is chosen. Sometimes a 
man is found who seems to have the necessary 
qualifications, but who is shy in some particular, 
the lack of which should eliminate him from serious 
consideration. 

The man who loses his temper will fail too often 
as a fighter to be placed high in that category. 

The man of inferior moral standards eliminates 
himself likewise. The man who is merely pug- 
nacious is not a true fighter in the football sense. 

But the true scrapper is a man who contributes 
unbegrudgingly all that he has to the cause; not 
to the game or to the day, but to the team, to the 
whole season. 

He will be a captain who feels to the fullest the 
importance and the responsibilities of his position. 
He will insist on the performance, in every detail, of 
all that may contribute to success. He will recog- 
nize his solemn duty to know the rules, and be able 
to talk earnestly and convincingly to the officials 
whenever the occasion arises. 

No team should ever be left entirely to the 
devices of the captain or the quarterback. No 
team should be subject to the failure of the captain 
or quarterback. Every team should have at least 



CAPTAINS AND THEIR AUTHORITY 65 



five men who know the game and know the rules 
well; and at least two men who have the rules at 
their finger tips, and who can and will come to the 
rescue if their superiors are unable to continue in 
the game. 



CHAPTER IX 



GENERAL THEORY OP LINE DEFENSE 

There are three ways to defend against closed 
formation plays: first, with every lineman stand- 
ing up; second, with all men from tackle to tackle 
on the ground, charging through the spaces and 
converging toward a point fifteen yards beyond 
center; third, a combination of the foregoing 
styles. In the .standing defense, the forward is 
instructed to be prepared to charge his immediate 
opponent by a forward leap into a position from 
which he cannot himself be dislodged, with one leg 
thrown forward, the other braced behind, and arms 
extended to meet the charge. He is coached to 
hold the opponent off until the direction of the 
play is properly sensed; then, if the onslaught 
comes his way, to fight through to it, or else use 
opponents' bodies and his own to block the play 
until help arrives from one side or the other. 

The standing defense, however, permits the 
attack its chance to get to the line of scrimmage. 
This virtually invites the players on the opposite 
side of center to run across behind their own line 
and render aid. The amount of help a player can 
give after running across behind his own center is 

66 



THEORY OF LINE DEFENSE 67 



seldom equal to the value of the help the player 
originally attacked could have given himself had 
he charged fast into the threatened space instead 
of holding off his immediate opponent pending the 
arrival of reinforcements. The time to stop a play 
is when it starts. Ask any halfback whether he 
prefers to play against an end who waits at the line 
of scrimmage or against one not naturally quite so 
capable who rushes into the bacldield! 

The standing line, by its very nature and policy, 
is, to a certain degree, conservative from the start. 
Except at the tackles, it makes little attempt to 
get into the backfield to do things there. It calls 
rather for a waiting attitude, for attempts at diag- 
nosis and for action only when action can be based 
on that diagnosis. When the diagnosis is incorrect 
the danger is grave, especially with respect to the 
men who have felt impelled to attempt to stop 
plays on the other side of the line, a brilliant per- 
formance which may even lead to an * 'All-America" 
rating if often and conspicuously repeated. Unfor- 
ttmately the players who leave their positions thus 
are very decidedly exposing their team to return 
plays and delayed bucks. To be trustworthy, their 
power of diagnosis must be sure indeed. 

The standing, waiting defense enjoys the favor 
and approval of several of the more renowned 
among the big varsity coaches. It is employed by 
a majority, perhaps, of the big varsity teams. It 
is unquestionably sufficient against inferior teams, 
and it takes no advantage, certainly, of an equally 



68 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



efficient team if the latter plays the same style of 
defense. But for those who favor it comes the 
alarming sight every year of one of these standing 
teams, so coached, but in adversity, unable to stop 
the attack, suddenly throwing up the defense it 
has practiced all the season and assuming a lower 
and still lower defensive position; until finally the 
line is down where it belongs, on its hands, on the 
grotind, where a man can naturally protect himself 
to best advantage, and making its most desperate 
effort in that lowly position. The sorely beset line 
generally manages to turn the tide back. It has 
been forced into the instinctive position of all lines 
when compelled .to the conclusion that something 
desperate must be done in order to hold at least 
the ground it still can call its own. 

The crouched defense, with all men from tackle 
to tackle on the ground and ready to spring at the 
first snap of the ball, is not of itself sufficient at all 
times. If the guards are outside the attacking 
guards, and if the center is charging every time, 
nothing can come through the middle of the line, 
provided the defensive quarter knows his business 
and will play the game. But against many forms 
of attack it is very essential that certain men be 
crouched in a sufficiently high position to be able 
to see what is going on behind the opponents' line. 
This brings us to the third method of defense, and 
the correct one, which assumes an extreme crouch 
against regular formations, and by certain men a 
more nearly erect position against shifts and spreads. 



THEORY OF LINE DEFENSE 69 



One marked superiority of the charge from the 
ground through spaces is the almost incontestable 
advantage that the players employing it gain from 
being able to observe the minutest movement of the 
ball and the telltale habits of the center and quar- 
terback. The standing defense charges at best after 
the attacking team has started, or the fastest mem- 
ber of it. The crouched defense, catching the 
rhythm of the numbers leading up to the starting 
signal, and able to see the ball, is able, at least 
occasionally, to match the jump of the attack with 
a practically simultaneous charge. This defense, 
if there is any fair degree of equality in personnel 
between the two lines, will stop many more plays 
before they reach the scrimmage line than will the 
stand-up style. 

Take seven men charging ferociously with the 
snap of the ball, regardless of where the play is 
going, their arms and bodies so placed that they 
cannot be rooted up, and no plays except center 
bucks can be formed well. It is called a blind 
charge, as each man advances with no other assump- 
tion than that he, and he alone, must stop the play; 
but it is very far from being a blind charge in reality. 
For although the head and neck are carried in stiff 
alignment with a straight spine, using the skull as 
a battering ram, the players are taught to look up 
through their own eyebrows as they advance and 
to miss no detail of information which might prove 
serviceable. 

If there were a perfect defense there would never 



70 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



be any gains, and football would be dead. But I 
believe this defense to be theoretically correct and 
practically adequate. 

Although the terms '^offensive'' and ''defensive*' 
are used herein to distinguish the team which has 
possession of the ball, I recognize the fact that 
''defensive'' is an extremely unfortunate word to 
employ in football coaching. The psychology of 
the word is bad. It poisons the mental attitude of 
a team and robs its work of many sterling qualities. 
Personally I have always instructed my teams that 
they are on the offensive when the other team has 
the ball. They are not defending themselves, 
they are taking the ball away from the opponents. 

The team imbued with the idea that it is "on the 
defensive'' is too prone to acquire a mental attitude 
inferior to that of the team carrying the ball. This 
often very naturally develops a smug sense of defense 
which only too frequently comes to include a feeling 
of protection against injury, or prevention of long 
gains. This attitude once acquired by the defend- 
ing team cracks the fighting spirit, and exposes the 
man who is trying to play football with the idea of 
self-protection to a greater liability to injury. Too 
many football players lose a certain degree of inter- 
est when not in possession of the ball. They should 
be taught to believe that so-called defensive play 
is every whit as aggressive as any actual attempt to 
advance the ball. 

Of the five linemen from tackle to tackle I expect, 
then, and demand, on defense, a low crouch, hands 



THEORY OF LINE DEFENSE 71 



on the ground, an iramediate charge, powerful and 
determined, regardless of the direction of the play. 
The only possible exceptions, on account of the 
interference, oftentimes from the outside of the 
offensive end, or under certain conditions, to be 
specified later, are the tackles. 

The tackles must at all times make a decisive 
charge without waiting for the direction of the 
attack; but they may, by special permission, charge 
from a higher position, either to improve their 
charge or to circumvent the opposing end. 

Against the narrow side of an unbalanced line, 
and also, at certain times, against very wide, quick 
shifts, in cases where they find themselves practi- 
cally doing the duty of ends, with the actual ends 
falling back to become secondary defense men, 
tackles are also permitted and even advised to 
charge from higher positions than the guards and 
center. 

The defensive play of the tackle and end would 
be almost similar were it not that the tackle must 
expect considerable interference with his plans from 
a wily and determined offensive end. Palpably, if 
there were not serious interference by the offensive 
end with the predatory plans of an able and deter- 
mined defensive tackle, there would be little need 
for a defensive end. The defensive end, as a rule, 
encounters no immediate opposition, and his charge 
may be made from a less extreme crouched position 
than the other forwards must adopt. 

The unbalanced attacking formation, sometimes 



72 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



called tackle over, generally results from shifts, and 
when completed leaves four men on one side of 
center and two on the other. From this formation 
it is to be assumed that at least sixty per cent 
of the plays will go to the strong side, although 
there should be, and generally are, very effective and 
dangerous plays which go to the short side. This is 
typically a running attack formation. The defensive 
tackle on the short side should stand up. He must 
be ready to make a stiff charge, with his arms in 
front, in order to meet the periodical attack and to 
assure himself that he will not be blocked by the 
attacking end on the same side. Against a balanced 
formation, however, both tackles should be down on 
the ground. 

If the attacking quarterback now leaves his posi- 
tion, one center trio man at once becomes a second 
defensive quarterback, except on kick formations, 
when a kick is assured; but ordinarily one should 
never trust to a six-man line, unless for some specific 
game or for some special reason. At best the loose 
center foregoes the advantage of being able to give 
the snapperback that direct shock every two or 
three plays which wears the latter out so rapidly, 
and makes his job so difficult. As a general propo- 
sition the center's place is on the line where he can 
continually worry and tire the opposing center, 
disturb the quarterback, and stop plays directed 
through the middle. 

The low defense, with a sprinting charge directed 
at spaces rather than at opponents, is immeasurably 



THEORY OF LINE DEFENSE 73 



the better against a normal line. Even when the 
men stand and spread against shift plays in order 
that they can close in more readily to meet the shift, 
linemen do not use their hands and arms as in the 
standing defense; but take their new positions 
quickly for a blind charge. The attacking line, 
unsteady after making its jtmip, is bound to be 
upset somewhat by a driving charge. The defensive 
charge continues to be a blind charge, for the reason 
that every man must assume that the play is coming 
at him. 



4 



CHAPTER X 
DEFENSE AGAINST SHIFTS AND SPREADS 

Defense against the regular formation, balanced 
line, where one man is called over to the other side 
to make a four and two combination, generally calls 
for only a slight modification. There is usually no 
haste or deception involved, and the defense man 
can shift as quickly as his enemy. The tackle on 
the narrow side generally assumes a standing posi- 
tion. He takes the same relative position to the 
attacking end as before, if the end is playing moder- 
ately close to the next inside man. If unable to 
drive through the end, to prevent his going down 
under forward passes, the tackle*s next thought is 
for check plays, criss-crosses and quarterback runs 
to the short side. 

The next man inside tackle assumes a position 
opposite the quarterback, if the. latter is standing 
on either side of center. If the quarter is directly 
behind center, however, he charges the guard hole 
nearest his tackle on the short side. He and all 
the remaining line play the straight, low charging, 
defensive game, fighting to the play after the initial 
charge. This last statement means that they can 

74 



DEFENSE AGAINST SHIFTS 75 



at least give support to the defensive man on either 
side. 

The next phase is the unexpected sudden shift 
of the line to left or right. Plainly there is no 
opportunity to send men over to either side to bal- 
ance the shift. Here the opponents are depending 
upon speed in the shift and the immediate charge 
to take advantage of weakness. This calls for a 
slide of the defensive line to the side toward which 
the shift has been made, merely balancing the line 
as before. If the defensive team keeps cool, there is 
no fundamental reason for finding itself under any 
disadvantage. The quick shift of a line with a 
play immediately ensuing has a strong tendency to 
weaken the charge, which offsets what would other- 
wise be a considerable advantage. 

Here again the tackle on the deserted side plays 
the standing defense. The secondary defense merely 
moves over into a position of balance. 

Now we come to the more important and danger- 
ous shifts. They are only dangerous, however, 
when the defensive team has not been coached 
soimdly on the principles of defense against fast 
shifting offense. Let us take the best known shifts 
of this kind, where the center alone remains upon 
the line, or the center and two guards, or perhaps 
the center and the two ends playing wide. The 
rest of the team retires to a formation in the back- 
field from which at a given signal it can quickly 
adjust itself into a legal formation and get away at 
once with its play. 



76 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



There are two things now which must be done 
by the defense as soon as opponents are called into 
the backfield to take their positions. First the 
tackles and ends must be spread to be in the strong- 
est possible defensive position for the widest close- 
formation line possible; that is to say, five men on 
one side of center and one on the other. There- 
fore each tackle, asstmiing that five men are to pile 
on his side of center, should be outside the next to 
the last man, and practically opposite the last man, 
prestmiably an end, unless this last man leaves a 
large space between his presumable tackle and 
himself. 

In this case the defensive tackle assumes a posi- 
tion just outside the offensive tackle, driving behind 
the opponents' line of scrimmage at all costs, and 
taking special care not to be blocked by the offensive 
end. 

The second necessary preparation is to bring back 
one of the center trio, the best man for the purpose, 
placing him four yards behind the line of scrimmage 
in a position between his defensive guard and tackle 
as they would be in regular formation. The defen- 
sive quarter assumes a corresponding position on 
the other side of center. Each remaining center trio 
man asstmies a position halfway between the ball 
and his own tackle. All are standing as high as 
necessary to observe at the first possible moment 
the extent of the shift. The moment this is ascer- 
tained the defensive shift is made accordingly. 

If the worst that can happen to a line that was 




DEFENSE AGAINST SHIFTS 77 



unprepared does happen, to wit, a five-man jtimp to 
one side of center, the tackle on the strong side 
immediately drops to the ground, preparatory and 
all set for an immediate charge against a line that 
is wobbly. The end also is in a state of prepared- 
ness. The defensive guard on the side of the shift 
has only a slight readjustment to make. He jumps 
over one man and makes his charge between the 
twin tackles and the twin guards. The guard on 
the weak side slides rapidly to a position opposite 
but slightly outside the offensive guard next to 
center on the strong side. The tackle on the weak 
side slides to a position slightly outside the one 
forward, probably an end, on his side of center, to 
charge against him and toward the quarter, guarding 
especially against any quarterback nm. The end 
on the weak side comes in halfway toward center, 
to charge into the backfield, watching for criss- 
crosses and chasing the play. 

The two defensive quarterbacks have shifted 
immediately with the strength of the play. The 
quarter who found himself nearest to the short side 
of the line crosses slightly to the other side of oppo- 
nents' center, keeping an eye on the offensive quarter- 
back until the latter has moved away from center 
or until the ball has been passed. The other defen- 
sive quarter stands behind and just inside his own 
tackle. The two defensive quarterbacks are used 
in this case plainly because of their excellent power 
of observation from this position, their increased 
defensive strength due to the lost power of charge 



78 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



by the line which has just shifted, and as an insurance 
against any faulty shifting of their own line. 

The two defensive halfbacks balance their own 
line. 

If the shift develops into a four and two line, the 
defensive tackle on the strong side slides in the dis- 
tance of one space. The guard is already set. He 
charges the second space from center. The guard 
on the weak side shifts to a position between guard 
and center on his side. He charges toward and 
through center, to prevent quarterback plunges and 
to defend against center bucks. The tackle on the 
weak side charges through the outside man. The 
defensive quarterbacks assume corresponding posi- 
tions four yards from the line of scrimmage, bal- 
ancing the line as before. So, too, the defensive 
halfbacks stand as usual eight yards from the line 
of scrimmage. 

Strange to say, the most disconcerting shift after 
the withdrawal of most of the oJffensive team into 
the backfield is the sudden return to an evenly 
balanced line. As the line and backs make their 
jump there are sufficient numbers leaping to either 
side to confuse slightly the defensive line as to its 
own immediate moves. Both tackles are inclined 
to believe that the power of the shift is coming to 
their side. The guards may also be deceived, and 
fail to shift sufficiently, or with sufficient speed, or 
both. The result is that wide gaps are left in the 
line. The principal idea in meeting quick shifts is 
to place tackles and ends in the most effective posi- 



DEFENSE AGAINST SHIFTS 79 



tions possible before knowledge can be had of the 
exact proportions of the shift. A defensive team 
is in a better position if caught by the snap of the 
ball sliding toward center than sliding away from 
center. As the chief purpose of quick shifts is to 
develop a method of rounding the tackles, the safest 
basis to start from is to locate the tackles before 
the shift in positions where they can thwart that 
intention. 

There are thousands of plays from very widely 
spread formations. The same general system of 
defense holds against all of them. In practically all 
cases most of the defensive line is standing. The 
only important exception to a standing line defense 
under these conditions is where foiur or five attack- 
ing forwards including center remain in closed 
formation, with the quarterback under center. If 
this number is sufficient to warrant the defense of 
three linemen, one man should be playing on the 
groimd, opposite the quarterback. If the quarter 
is directly behind and facing center, this defender 
should charge through the center rush toward the 
strength of the opponents* line. 

Naturally, with a line decidedly spread, it is 
essential that a defensive line should see what is 
going on. It is also essential that the enemy's 
strength or weakness be taken in at a glance, It is 
important to note whether the backfield remains 
intact or not. If the backfield is spread consider- 
ably, its power of running attack is much reduced. 
Therefore, beyond careful defense around center, 



80 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



there is little cause for balancing the opposing line 
with defensive linemen. Perhaps four or five line- 
men should be used, not too far from the ball, in 
order to circumvent any wild attempt by the oppo- 
nents. But against such formations it is seldom 
necessary to maintain more than five men on the 
line. The more plainly it is shown that the' forma- 
tion is distinctly a forward-passing one, the more 
surely should the defensive strength against the 
passing game be augmented. Keep firmly in mind 
this special rule. Always balance the offensive 
team, not the offensive line, nor the offensive back- 
field. 

A good example is the defense on a formation in 
which two or three men are sent out to one side, 
fifteen to twenty yards away from the rest of the 
team. If these two or three men are backs, the 
running attack of the team is practically ruined. 
If two of these men, for example, happen to be a 
tackle or guard and an end, it will be seen at once 
that one of the defensive linemen can be spared from 
the line. The tackle or end on the weakened side 
can be dropped back into the defensive halfback's 
position on that side. The halfback, so relieved, 
can take a deep position, in a line with the far- 
flung squadron sent to the side of the field for the 
ostensible purpose of receiving a forward pass. If 
he plays twenty yards deep, the teams are now well 
balanced. The linemen who took the defensive 
halfback's position can back up the line if necessary, 
though two linemen are gone, and can also be effec- 



DEFENSE AGAINST SHIFTS 81 



tive agamst forward passes in the territory half- 
way between his position and that of the halfback 
who is playing deep. 

Many teams are needlessly unnerved by the 
appearance of two or three opponents in a distant 
position, and feel that they must match them man 
for man. They fail to grasp two ideas: first, this 
forward pass will be hurried by the defensive men 
on the wings; second, only one ball will be thrown, 
and defensive players must of necessity, in case of 
long passes, play the ball in total disregard of the 
men. In short, remember that a guard, tackle and 
end without a full line are superfluous; and one of 
them, at least, is in his wrong position. Therefore, 
if the offensive savors of a forward pass, one of these 
men should be in his own backfield, to prevent its 
consummation. Do not forget that your wingmen, 
whether guards, tackles or ends, are charging into the 
backfield immediately, to break up plays before 
they are formed and to hurry or block forward 
passes or kicks. 



1 



CHAPTER XI 
SECONDARY DEFENSE 

The defensive quarter, in normal defensive 
alignment, plays four yards behind the center. 
The halfbacks play eight yards behind and slightly 
outside of the ends, who are playing eight feet from 
their tackles. The defensive quarter is really the 
backbone of the defense. He should be heavy and 
powerful, but above all he must be a man of rare 
judgment and quick decision. He is directly respon- 
sible for practically all long gains. He must stop 
line bucks, outside tackle plays and end runs; he 
must defend against short forward passes from one 
end of the line to the other. A willing worker with 
great ability in this position offsets a mediocre rush 
line. But the best lines are not strong enough with- 
out a good defensive quarter. 

The primary rule for the secondary defense is 
to keep all eyes on center; then quarterback, if he 
is playing under center; then ends. A secondary 
defense man with his eyes on center cannot fail to 
see the quarterback and both ends. If the quarter- 
back does not leave center there is cause for uneasi- 
ness by the defensive quarterback, unless he can see 
the ball go. Unless the ball goes the quarterback 

82 



SECONDARY DEFENSE 83 



has it. The two defensive halfbacks must watch 
the same thing, because the defensive quarterback 
might not. Defensive backs also get the story 
immediately if the ends are coming down the field. 
It is not sufficient for the left halfback to center his 
attention on his opponents' right end. The enemy 
may have planned to surprise and deceive by send- 
ing the other end diagonally across the field, to take 
a long forward pass behind the position which the 
halfback has failed to guard. The halfbacks, as 
well as the defensive quarter, have a very difficult 
task, which necessitates quick judgment and intel- 
ligence; but these things, the movement of the ball 
from center, its pass, and the charge of the ends, are 
all observed in a moment, and all three men must 
be in preparatory positions for speed as the ball is 
snapped. Their charge into the defense must be 
very fast, but the observation of these especially 
important matters will not perceptibly impede their 
motion. 

There is another very important thing to look 
for which only occurs occasionally but is dangerous 
to overlook. That is the running back by the man 
in possession of the ball, or one not in possession of 
it, into a receiving position. The discovery of this 
movement in time may be the means of preventing 
a very successful forward pass. I have always 
called the defensive halfback on the side away from 
the play **the conservative back.'* He is second- 
arily responsible for criss-crosses or delayed bucks 
on his side of the line. He is the only man left to 



84 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



defend his entire side of the field against a diagon- 
ally thrown forward pass, cleverly contrived for 
use when the attack has started in the other direc- 
tion and when everything looks particularly safe so 
far as he is concerned. This does not mean that he 
should not and does not figure against plays on the 
other side of the line, especially if they are wide and 
have gained some ground. He merely waits until 
he has seen the run started, with the criss-cross 
possibility eliminated, and until assured that neither 
end is charging in his direction. Furthermore, he 
must be especially sensitive to the merest suggestion 
that either end is slipping into the territory that 
the defensive quarter has left unprotected; for the 
defensive quarter, having seen the ball passed, or 
the quarterback running from behind center, pre- 
sumably with the ball, is justified in rushing to the 
point of probable attack. So, also, is the other 
defensive halfback justified, having seen no evidence 
of a forward pass into his zone. Therefore this 
third and last, close secondary defense man must 
defend the region that the defensive quarterback 
has left. 

For the treatment of the immediate secondary 
defense I have purposely omitted from this discus- 
sion the defensive fullback, who is, all this time, 
playing twenty-five yards from the line of scrimmage, 
and, like all the others, counting the down and, so 
far as possible, the distance to be gained. He is 
standing in a position where he can best take part 
in whatever may happen on either side, and there- 



SECONDARY DEFENSE 



85 



fore with a tendency toward the center of the field 
as regards the sideHnes, even when the teams are 
playing close to the sidelines. He should observe 
carefully every injunction that is put upon the three 
other backs. Judging by results, there are very 
few defensive fullbacks who would qualify along 
these lines. It is a very conamon sight to see a 
back or an end outstripping this last and final 
defender of the goal line. It seems almost incredible 
that he should not at least get a chance to tackle 
the runner, if he has kept his eyes and his ears open. 



CHAPTER XII 



CENTERS AND THE SPIRAL PASS 

Weight and "height, within reasonable limits, 
are of no particular significance in selecting a center. 
Among the best centers I have seen there was one 
whose average weight for the season was one hundred 
fifty pounds, and another who tipped the beam 
regularly at two hundred twelve pounds. Candidly, 
I have a slight preference for the two hundred twelve 
pounder, not only for the mental effect of his bulk 
on the other team, but also because he naturally did 
have more effectiveness than the lighter man. My 
main point, however, is that not all is lost because 
the center rush is a light man. 

The light man must have plenty of fight, be a 
good diagnostician of plays, and possess a little 
extra speed to make up for the driving power and the 
defensive power of many more potmds of good flesh 
and muscle generally presumed to be necessary in 
a center. 

In picking your snapper-back, take the man with 
plenty of fight, nerve and stamina. In a pinch, the 
man with plenty of fight can be substituted, in 
choosing, for the man with stamina. Most men 
have enough of the latter at the end of the season, if 

86 



THE SPIRAL PASS 



87 



they have the willingness to use it. Always bear in 
mind that a center has a big task on his hands, and 
is veritably the hub of the wheel. Discourage him, 
and the offensive power of the team disappears. 

He seldom is given the credit he deserves. Most 
followers of the game assume a good center as a 
matter of course, knowing little of the hardships he 
must endure. He must be able to withstand all 
efforts to intimidate or to infuriate him. He must 
be willing and ready to take a bad drubbing, while 
in a position in which he has little opportunity to 
defend himself. He must pass, pass, pass, all the 
time, and ceaselessly practice the most natural 
position from which to acquire a powerful charge 
simultaneously with the pass. He must make all 
his passes from the same initial position, if he is to 
mask the play of his team. He must be able not 
only to do this, but to do it so naturally that his 
charge is very little weakened, if any, by his pass or 
by his extra duties. 

Naturally, then, all offensive play starting with 
the center (or a man who takes his place on a shift, 
thereby becoming a center) the calibre of his work 
becomes the first consideration and a very weighty 
one. He must weather continual abuse and with- 
stand a thousand efforts to *'get his goat" in practice, 
or it is doubtful if he will be able to maintain his 
standard of passing when put to those tests in a 
game. 

The center, standing on his own ten yard line, with 
his team all set for a punt, suggests the baseball 



88 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



pitcher with bases full and three balls and no strikes 
on the batter. Like the pitcher, the center stands 
alone, almost everything depends upon that pass, and 
no little attention which can legally be offered to 
make him fail will be omitted by the opposing team. 
It is indeed a tense moment, and his hand and his 
heart must be right. Think this over when you are 
picking your center. He may not have all the 
necessary qualifications when you pick him; but 
consider he is competent to rise to the standard. 
The center needs friends on a team; needs guards 
who show confidence in him; a quarterback who is 
with him heart and soul; a punter who believes in 
him. ' 

At the same time, give me the little one hundred 
fifty pound center whom I once saw on his own one- 
foot mark, with his team lined up for a kick. He 
turned around to his punter before getting down 
on the ball, and made him a little speech. He 
insisted, among other things, in no uncertain tones, 
that he and his team mates now had the opposition 
at a tremendous advantage; and that, with the pro- 
tection of the backs, the kicker was bound to boot 
the ball at least fifty yards. There is a center rush 
for you! If you have a man like him on your 
squad, let him manage the ball. 

Assuming that the quarterback is up under the 
center, the ball is passed so that the end of the egg 
goes into a cup formed by the heels of the former's 
hands and completed by his extended fingers as they 
tighten on the ball, with the tips at or near its 



THE SPIRAL PASS ' 



89 



middle. The quarterns finger tips are four inches 
from the near end of the ball when he is set to 
receive the pass. 

Nothing but absolute abandonment of the ball 
by the center can make it do anything but fit into 
the cup. The fumble of a dry ball, in case of 
doubt, should be attributed to the failure of the 
center. Nine times out of ten it is his fault. 

Centers should learn and practice two passes: the 
spiral, and the pass which may be termed regular. 
The spiral is much the faster and better pass; and 
as the handing of the ball to the quarterback can 
be accomplished just as well without changing the 
position of the hands, the spiral would be the only 
pass to learn if it could be used with a mud-covered 
ball. As a mud-covered ball is sometimes inevitable, 
centers must also be able to use the slower pass. 
They are at no particular disadvantage in this case, 
as the same mud retards charging and blocking 
rather more than it retards the speed of the passing 
for kicks. 

The ball is usually passed to the quarterback with 
the center's hands in the position used in making 
the long, regular pass. If, then, the spiral pass, 
involving a different position of the hands on the 
ball, were used exclusively for passing to the last 
man in the backfield on kick formations, too much 
advance information would be afforded the defense. 
A team should have and should use, if only for 
deception, plays in which the ball is passed direct 
to members of the backfield other than the quarter 



90 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



and the man in punting position; and on these 
plays the center should pass in the same manner 
as for the kick, pass or run resulting from passes 
to the fullback. 

It is also well for the center to mix up his passes 
to the quarterback, using the two styles alternately, 
even should he have a slight preference for the 
'^regular** style in feeding the ball to his field general. 
This is especially true if the quarterback stays 
under center until the ball is passed for kicks or 
direct to backs other than the kicker. If the 
center uses his **regular'* pass for the handling of the 
ball through the quarterback, but goes to the 
spiral when he intends to throw deep, the effect of 
the quarterback's deception, involved in his presence 
under center, is entirely lost. Therefore, when the 
spiral is used at all, many of the center's short passes 
to his quarterback should be made on the spiral plan. 

When he is in position to make the '^regular'* pass, 
the center's hands should be placed in corresponding 
positions, one on each side of the ball and slightly 
in advance of its middle as it lies at right angles to 
the lines of scrimmage; the finger tips touching the 
ground, the thumbs forward and almost meeting on 
top of the ball as they converge toward each other. 
The ball is thrown or passed with one continuous 
motion. 

The long pass is really an arm throw, with no 
snap of the wrists, the elbows being held stiff. 
The arms **follow through" until stopped by the 
contact of the elbows with the legs. 



THE SPIRAL PASS 



91 



The position of the hands is a little different 
for the spiral pass. Here the right hand is held in 
advance of the left, and in a lower position. The 
left thumb and its heel bear down on top of the 
ball, with the thiinab at its center. The right 
hand, two inches farther forward on the ball than 
the left, is tucked as far underneath as the rules 
allow, the fingers touching the ground. The pass 
is made like the longer regular'' pass, bearing in 
mind the small pressure exerted by the left thumb. 
The arms ''follow through" and are stopped by the 
thighs as in the other long pass. The natural 
inclination of the arms and shoulders is to readjust 
themselves and to go through between the legs 
equally. There is a slight sensation of twisting 
the ball as this readjustment is made. When it is 
completed, and the ball is leaving the hands, the 
left hand will have dropped and the right been 
brought up, sufficiently so that both are equi- 
distant from the ground. The elbows land on the 
legs as in the other long pass. 

The spiral is faster than the * 'regular'' pass 
because the right hand slams the ball through with 
some resenting pressure from the left, and this 
quiet resistance gives the right hand more of a 
chance to follow through. The pass is a great deal 
like a throw, and the proof of this assertion is that 
a left-handed center insists on placing his left hand 
forward on the ball, rather than his right. 

The spiral is also a more accurate pass than any 
other. A good spiral passer will look at his man 



92 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



and figure his distance before making his pass. 
After that he may or may not give a backward 
glance between his legs as the ball goes. He seems 
to be able to direct the ball while giving most of 
his attention to his own charge. 

It is by far the best pass for punters to handle. 
It comes to the kicker end first, and is very easy to 
catch. It wedges itself into the hands in the 
simplest possible position to adjust for kicking. 
The kicker has nothing to adjust, in fact, except to 
turn the ball lacing up. The pass is only impossible 
with a muddy ball, when all passing is likely to be 
poor. It is not bad in merely wet weather. ■ 

Next to fast charging ends, the fast charging 
defensive center is the most disconcerting customer. 
Prom his place on the line, or very close to it, let 
him crash into his immediate opponent the very 
first time the latter handles the ball, and on the 
next lineup, let him repeat the lesson. The snapper- 
back not only becomes worried about his passing, 
but the ambition of the quarterback to cut through 
the middle of the line with the ball is sensibly 
diminished. 

On the next down, if the quarterback is standing 
sideways, the defensive center may vary his charge 
by crowding himself into the opposite space between 
center and guard, having all due understanding of 
the number of the down and the distance to be 
gained. 

He will not omit to jar the snapper-back once 
more as he charges, but this time the object of his 



THE SPIRAL PASS 



93 



attack is to expose the quarterback and to test as 
quickly as possible the latter's nerve and steadiness 
under fire. However, by crowding against the 
center rather than against the guard, as he goes 
through, he will tend to block up the opposite guard 
hole as well as the one he has invaded ; besides slow- 
ing up the center's charge and otherwise annoying 
him. 



CHAPTER XIII 



QUARTERBACK PLAY 

In picking quarterbacks my first inclination would 
be for a man of strong, magnetic voice, confident 
manner, and pronounced natural activity. No 
doubt this idea may be considered surprising, the 
general impression being that the first requisite of 
a good quarterback is brains. I appreciate brains 
in a quarterback, if they are possible to be had ; but 
I shall not alter my list of qualifications in point of 
importance. However, if the man lacks any of the 
above qualifications, including brains, he cannot be 
my quarterback, unless he is the best of a bad lot. 
When so unfortunate as to have a quarterback of 
inferior mental calibre, I give him a cardinal rule 
to follow. That rule is: **When in doubt, kick the 
ball." 

It must be admitted that the youngster who 
impresses a coach as being good timber for quarter- 
back may seldom be accused of excessive diffidence 
regarding his own abilities and possibilities, such as 
they are. A certain amount of egotism may be 
apparent and pardonable in him. It may even be 
intimated by his critics occasionally that the young 

94 



QUARTERBACK PLAY 95 



man exhibits a barely perceptible tendency toward 
a swelled head. As he will have to calculate chances 
and make radical decisions under fire on the football 
field, it is quite as well that at least the dominant 
note of his character shall not be a profound distrust 
of his own judgment. His self-confidence, unless 
it be actual folly, is one of the last things that will 
die in him and it is generally backed up by courage. 
Probably it is based on successful participation and 
leadership in various youthful activities, and a 
certain demonstrated ability to hold his own among 
the small intrigues and feuds of boyhood. All his 
life he has loved to take chances, but he has also 
learned the importance of calculating those chances 
before making his choices. He may cherish in 
secret a world of confidence in his own * 'hunches/' 
in his lucky star, in some mystic gift of decision; 
a faith never shaken by serious failure. But, even 
so, his hunches generally are based on sound, instinc- 
tive judgment and a keen sense of reality. In any 
event, his ability to do the right thing at the right 
time has already won the decided toleration of his 
elders and the respectful admiration of his own 
''gang.'* He is considered good company, because 
he has shown that he can take care of himself. His 
popularity rests on the solid esteem which boys 
always accord to the fellow who shows courage, 
daring, and the ability to do well the things that 
bigger lads are doing. 

All these qualities are expressed and indicated, 
somehow, in the swagger, ever so slight, of his walk; 



96 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



in the clear light of his eyes; in the confident and 
undefeated timbre of his voice. You pick him, as 
I have said, on generalities, but the signs seldom fail. 
Quarterbacks are bom and not made, and it is seldom 
indeed that a fairly experienced eye can discover no 
outward sign of a spiritual heritage. There is 
something about this youngster, chosen for his 
voice, for his abundant nervous energy and for 
intelligent eyes, with a smouldering fire behind them, 
that rarely misleads his sponsor. There is something 
about him, too, which his opponents on the foot- 
ball field will be equally certain to recognize as the 
embodiment of moral force, potent for their undoing 
unless they can . match it with something finer. 
He will be able to intimidate them with that voice, 
unless they can show themselves men indeed and 
weaklings in no wise. 

It must be part of his reputation and part of his 
quality to be ever so fair, as manly boys go. He is 
rather above petty likes and dislikes, rather superior 
to all small politics. The best play for the given 
situation always, — that will be his rule of conduct 
as a quarterback both before and after he becomes 
famous. Other things being equal, he will give 
every back, regular and substitute, a fair share of 
the work and of the honors, too. Disdain to play 
favorites will apply to everybody, his own roommate 
included, and when sacrifice is demanded he will be 
the last to spare himself. Boys and men alike are 
always delighted to follow this sort of leadership. 
They will stand any amoimt of driving, or urging, 



QUARTERBx\CK PLAY 



97 



if not accompanied by abuse, when convinced that 
it is intended for the good of the team. 

Like other great leaders, our potential quarter- 
back will not always share his mental reasoning with 
those around him, nor reveal his whole intention 
to them; but he can count usually on enthusiastic 
agreement and admiring acquiescence when he 
finally gives the word and points the way. When, 
on the twenty-five yard line, with five minutes to 
play, our quarterback says to himself: '*IVe got a 
chance to tie. Tve got a good drop kicker. We are 
in front of the posts. The wind is not bad. But 
I'll not try it. I don*t want a tie. I want to win. 
A touchdown will do it. It's up to me to put it 
over" — and he barks out the signal for a forward 
pass or a running play, the dullest member of the 
eleven understands, and the least daring sets him- 
self with fiery resolution for the charge, both glad 
in their hearts that the more courageous choice has 
been made. 

The same quarterback, backed up to his own 
twenty-yard line, will hold another little argtmaent 
with himself; although the mental process will be 
over and completed in a lightning flash. Put into 
words, his reasoning might take this form: ''Accord- 
ing to zone play, I ought to kick. We are all set 
for a kick and so are they. The other team expects 
it. If we kick we shall be lucky to stop the run- 
back short of the forty-five yard line. When it's 
all over they will boot the ball back, and our posi- 
tion won't be a bit better than it is now. The 



98 INSIDE FOOTBALL 

great, big gamble here is to get away! If I throw 
a long forward pass, such as we have, there is a 
mighty good chance for us to recover it. But if 
we don't, they can't get it. Even if they should, 
our whole line will be down there. They wouldn't 
be able to run the ball back any farther than they 
might be able to run back a kick. In fact, they 
wouldn't have as good a chance. I've also got a 
trick play with very little danger in it of a fumble. 
It ought to work. It will catch them off their 
guard. We must get ourselves out of this hole. 
I've picked my play now, and I'm going to try it!" 

His plays and signals, to the minutest detail, the 
quarterback must know without mental effort. 
Upon the discovery of a weakness he should never 
have to think, **What play have I that goes there?" 
Rather should he say, **Now for 72." He must 
know his position on the field as a child knows the 
way to the doughnut pail. It should never be nec- 
essary for him to waste any time finding out whether 
he is on his own twenty-five yard line or the oppos- 
ing team's forty. 

Every member of a good football team, but more 
particularly the quarterback, must early acquire 
the habit of knowing the down and the approximate 
distance to be gained. There is no excuse for the 
execution of a ridiculous play on the fourth down, 
or on any other down, merely because the quarter- 
back has a temporary fit of mental aberration. A 
captain should instinctively discover the error at 
once, and so should every other member of the team. 



QUARTERBACK PLAY 99 



This, however, does not mean that ten men should 
immediately attempt to cram intellect into the poor 
quarterback's dome. Nor does it mean that even 
the captain should be perpetually attempting to 
prove to the quarterback, to the coach, or to him- 
self, the error of his general's judgment. The cap- 
tain, on the field, is G. H. Q. ; not the general. He 
should know fully the plan and command the game 
as a whole; should lend immediate assistance when 
the general is in a serious dilemma; but the general, 
so long as there is a chance of his being right, should 
run his own battle. The best captain I have ever 
had, the best captain I have ever known, challenged 
the quarterback's judgment, in a firm but kindly 
manner, not more than six times during the entire 
season, and on every one of those occasions the 
captain was right. The quarterback learned to 
accept these challenges with good grace and pro- 
found respect. 

The quarterback, and the other players too, 
should be just as well informed as to the down and 
distance when opponents are on the offensive. 
This knowledge materially aids in anticipating the 
probabilities of play. 

The quarter should always be an optimist when 
he passes the ball to a back. It makes a lot of 
difference to the latter whether he receives along 
with the ball a smile which seems to say, **You are 
good for forty yards on this play," or a scowl 
apparently implying, You'll fimible it, for a mil- 
lion dollars." The quarterback's confidence, or 



100 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



lack of it, IS infectious as laughter or the smallpox. 

On any center buck, or whenever he has oppor- 
tunity, the quarter should actually deliver the 
ball to the back, instead of passing to him. 
Here is an added opportunity to give the runner a 
fiery send-off, in addition to the encouragement of 
the voice and eyes. Slam the ball hard against 
the bucker's body. Instead of retarding his speed 
it will give him added impetus. The impact of the 
ball is like a touch of the spur to a spirited horse. 
The quarter should hold the ball against the back's 
body as long as he can. The back's onrush will 
release the quarter's arm in a fraction of a second. 
Don't be afraid to slam it into him if you can hold 
it there. He will like it. 

Usually the principal correction to make in your 
quarterback is for lost motion. The handling of the 
ball, after he has learned to place himself properly, 
involves no special knack. Any ftmibling by him, 
provided he is cool and the ball dry, is due usually 
to the center's careless or inaccurate passing. 

The quarterback should be placed in a position 
where he can swing out naturally into a run in the 
direction of the side he is partially facing. He 
must be able to get away in the fastest possible 
manner on the plays that demand especial speed. 

The best position for a quarter to assimie depends 
upon the style of offensive formation used. Some 
of the best teams never play the quarter imme- 
diately behind center, but use him as an extra 
halfback. In this event, of course, his position 



QUARTERBACK PLAY 101 



ceases to be that of a quarterback, for the purposes 
of this discussion. 

With the quarterback close to the center, and 
the halves and full in the backfield, my conclusion 
is, after studying various attitudes assumed in 
this style of play, that he should take the easiest 
position to make the shortest possible pass to the 
backs. Therefore, on plays going to the left of 
center, the quarterback should be close up under 
the right leg of the snapper-back, in order to make 
the pass practically a handing of the ball from one 
to the other. Incidentally, this simplifies the 
center's work and gives him opportunity as nearly 
as possible for an immediate charge to carry out 
his assignments. 

The quarterback is now facing, generally speak- 
ing, the direction in which the play is going. He 
avoids fumbles; gets away very quickly; makes a 
pass short and easy to handle and becomes very 
valuable in the interference if the play is wide. 

Many teams leave the quarterback under center 
on kick formation. Unquestionably this is done for 
piuposes of deception, an intent adequately proven 
by the position of the quarter, who is instructed to 
keep his hands, as on former plays, under center 
and in a receptive position. This deception gen- 
erally fails. The quarter, despite instructions, is 
afraid to keep his hands in precisely the same 
position he would if he intended to handle the ball. 
He holds them farther apart and farther away from 
the ball, lest he fail to withdraw them quickly 



102 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



enough to allow an uninterrupted pass from the 
center to the kicker. Therefore, it is my opinion 
that the intended threat of the quarterback under 
these conditions is mostly lost. 

Furthermore, he generally stands with his back 
toward the side of the line on which he must give 
protection to the punter. His turn and his charge 
to oppose his body against a determined assault is 
often wobbly and ineffective. If the quarterback 
on kick formation is so placed as to give ade- 
quate protection for the punter, no advantage is 
surrendered. There are innumerable and even 
increased opportunities for running plays or for- 
ward passes. Then why keep the quarterback 
under center for a deception which seldom deceives? 

Once again, the man who is to carry the ball can 
get away at top starting speed and maintain or 
increase that speed, because of the simplicity of 
handling the pass. If the play is to go to the other 
side of the line, the quarter takes the same relative 
position, facing toward his right, with his left foot 
forward and his body close to, and partially under, 
the left leg of the center. 

The immediate objection raised is that these 
changes of direction give away the side of the line 
to be attacked, and are therefore of advantage to 
the defense. It is to be hoped that no coach would 
be simple enough to give assistance to opponents. 
He has foreseen that advantage would immediately 
be taken of the quarter's seeming indiscretion, and 
the team that attempts to play according to a 



QUARTERBACK PLAY 103 



diagnosis based on the quarter's standing position 
will find that there are very formidable plays which 
can be sent to the wrong side. No quarter with a 
grain of intelligence would fail to take advantage of 
a team which played a special defense against the 
side of the line toward which he was pointing. 

Wherefore, years of football have shown that 
against a good quarterback no advantage can be 
taken simply because a majority of his plays go 
to the left when he is facing to the left, or to the 
right when he is facing to the right. And so, 
without disadvantage to himself, he is aiding the 
play of the center, handling the easiest pass from 
center, giving the best account of himself as an 
interferer and getting the ball to the backs with 
the least delay and with the simplest, shortest pass. 

Right here it might be well to touch upon the 
question whether the quarter should play the old 
quarterback position, close to center; or farther 
behind the line as one of a so-called four-man 
backfield. 

Those who play the latter game successfully 
cannot understand why the old style should persist. 
Nor can adherents of the old style understand the 
preference for a four-man backfield exclusively. 
Both methods of offense have their strong features. 

A majority of the teachers of the old style posi- 
tion play of quarterback have many strong plays 
from the so-called kick formation, and similar for- 
mations, in which they are really employing the 
four-man backfield. Their chief objection, how- 



104 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



ever, to the permanent removal of the quarterback 
from close proximity to the center is based upon 
the loss of particularly clever work which he can 
perform in that position. The delayed buck, 
hidden pass and ever threatening quarterback dive 
through center are all plays involving the quarter's 
proximity to the snapper-back. 

On the other hand, exponents of the four-man 
backfield theory claim compensation for the loss 
of these plays. They maintain that by a double 
pass in the backfield they can accomplish just as 
powerful a delayed buck; can use hidden passes of a 
different sort with a greater power of deception; 
can hit the center hard enough to gain materially, 
if insufficient defense is maintained there; and that 
by selecting a heavier man for their fourth back 
than is usually picked for quarterback, they can 
greatly increase their line-hitting power, this extra 
man being in a better position to lend assistance. 

Both contenders are right; but other things being 
equal I should prefer a combination of the two styles, 
with a tendency toward the four-man backfield if 
I were not able to discover an agile, clever quarter- 
back. 

Of course, with a four-man backfield, the techni- 
cal requirements of a center's passing are con- 
siderably increased. He no longer hands the ball 
to the quarterback. He must deliver accurately 
timed passes not to, but ahead of, the back, so 
that the ball can be taken on the run. If the play 
is a center buck, the center must deliver a short, 







QUARTERBACK PLAY 105 



dead pass, which would not carry to the fullback if 
the latter stayed in his position to receive it. This 
pass, parenthetically, must be made to an imaginary 
man about two-thirds of the actual distance from 
the center to the back who is to carry the ball. 

It may be argued that passing into space, or 
ahead of the runner, is dangerous. In theory, it 
looks so, but it must be remembered that all good 
football teams on a run aroimd end or kick forma- 
tion do precisely the same thing, if well coached. 
The pass is not thrown to the runner, for if it were 
it would be almost a physical impossibility for him 
to keep up with the fleet interference which started 
away, or should have started away, simultaneously 
with the pass. 

The greatest dangers in the passing game with 
a four-man backfield arise from mistakes in signals; 
the backs starting, or the center passing, in the 
wrong direction. As a result the long, fast pass 
sails down the field, with scarcely a possibility of 
recovery by the erring side. 

There is also some danger from miscalculation 
of the back's speed by the center, when the back is 
concealing an injury received on the previous play, 
or is not fully conscious of the severity of that 
injury or of the degree to which it will affect his 
starting and nmning speed. 

To adopt the four-man backfield one must have 
a great deal to compensate for the loss of that 
co-ordinating link between backfield and line which 
under the old style is the quarterback. This 



106 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



dominating personality, standing above and almost 
upon the line of his opponents, as he gives his 
words of encouragement and command to his own 
line and backfield, cannot fail to impress contin- 
ually upon the adversary an ever present sense of 
impending danger. Between teams of equal physi- 
cal strength and skill, personality is more than half 
the battle. 



CHAPTER XIV 



BACKS AND BACKFIELD TACTICS 

The traditional fullback was taller, heavier and 
of knottier muscles than the ''light, speedy halves/' 
His function it was to rip up rush lines from tackle 
to tackle and to endure the abuse of the onrushing 
blockers. On defense he performed the duties of 
the modern defensive quarterback, ''backing up 
the line from end to end,'' in the football jargon 
of his day. The fullback still persists on the pro- 
grams and score sheets, but unless he happens to 
assume the middle position in a parallel backfield 
and does the kicking, there is nothing to distinguish 
him from his running mates. The most powerful 
back of the four usually occupies the position of 
defensive quarter when the other team has the ball, 
because of the extra wear and tear involved; but he 
must be clever in diagnosing plays. 

First the face, then niftiness and a powerful 
running stride, denote the back. Ask yourself first 
if he looks the part; but give him further trial if 
he does not, as first impressions are not always 
conclusive. I like to think of a back who pounds 
the earth as he runs. The flat-footed runner is the 
best halfback for a tough grind, if he naturally runs 
that way and can keep his speed. He is able to 

107 



108 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



change direction, a most vital essential, and he 
has the legs to drive with. 

Let the candidate move about and handle the 
ball. If he cannot pass it, see if he has aptitude to 
learn. Watch how he handles it and how he 
handles himself. Let your backs flit about, scamper 
about, crash about. Practice them in running down 
the field, making complete, whirling revolutions in 
the air, resuming the stride immediately. 

Shadow-dodging practice will also give the coach 
a line on the men who possess fine muscular control. 
Quick starts will reveal the men who can get away 
fast. Tackling and blocking at the dummy will 
indicate men who are likely to develop into sure 
open-field tacklers. Find the men who have the 
aptitude and the quick power of diagnosis for 
defensive quarterback, the job which offers wonder- 
ful opportunities for the back with plenty of nerve. 
In fact, it is the finest one single job in the game. 

Having for the time being selected your backs, 
give them all plenty of practice in punting and in 
throwing and fielding passes. Use the more promis- 
ing ones, in fact all of them who show promise, 
interchangeably, especially during the early part of 
the season, in the first four or five plays taught, that 
each back may become thoroughly familiar with the 
work of every other. 

The predicament caused on good football teams 
by being compelled to shift a back to another 
position, and this, too, near the end of the season, 
when the number of backs available has been 



BACKFIELD TACTICS 109 



lessened through injuries or other causes, is alto- 
gether too frequent. In fact, it is a useful early 
season stunt to put the bacldield men in the line, 
so that they may get the knocks that are always 
the portion of linemen and more fully appreciate 
their obligation to the line when they return to 
their regular positions. Also, use line players as 
backfield men, in order that they, too, may learn 
the lesson of quick and thorough co-operation 
between line and backfield, and the hopelessness of 
gaining ground consistently when the line does not 
function. 

This plan teaches considerable knowledge of the 
game that can be acquired in no other way, and 
tends to develop a spirit of willing co-operation that 
is of tremendous value. There is another element 
in this arrangement that should not be disdained. 
It is the giving to the squad an opportunity to 
enjoy thoroughly, though in the very best spirit of 
hard work, the discomfiture and oftentimes ridicu- 
lous predicaments caused by these extreme shift- 
ings of players and forces. 

The best method of carrying the ball in line 
attack is described in the course of the chapter on 
sideline plays and straight bucks. Once a back 
is running loose in the open, a more individual style 
is permissible. Many excellent backs carry the ball 
with one end in each hand, using it as a consider- 
able help in dodging. I have watched this method 
with careful study. My first inclination was to 
prohibit it in my own backs, but in every case the 



110 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



player using it had genuine ability, and I generally 
ended by letting him have his way. Thus far I 
have had no reason to regret so doing. The moving 
ball seems even to exercise a mesmeric effect on 
tacklers. The backs often feint them with the ball 
vS does the boxer with his speedy left. Invariably 
he back who uses this trick claims that it helps 

n ccnside-^ably in his dodging. 

Ability straight-arm effectively is a matter of 

tural gift as well as practice. Very few backs 

a both arms with equal skill. The others, in order 
bring the better arm into play, are compelled to 

mge their running direction. The straight arm 
i mid not be elected, as a rule, if the back is a 

c dodger. The deception of tricky feet is the 
ter reliance, for a tackier with power and deter- 
ation will smash through the straight-arm, or 
go under it. Only against half-hearted tackling 
does .6 avail, after the tackier has made his final 
lunge. The proper time for straight-arming is 
before the tackier has driven in, and it should take 
him unawares. 

The straight-armer dances in on the would-be 
tackier with a lunge of the body, throwing the legs 
away while bearing head and shoulders toward the 
objective, and shooting out the arm in a sudden 
drive. 

While in theory a back rimning off tackle should 
carry the ball on the side away from the rush line, 
I prefer to allow him the use of the arm with which 
he naturally straight-arms best. After all, there is 



BACKFIELD TACTICS 111 



no certainty as to the side on which he will be called 
upon to straight-arm. 

I do not urge backs to shift the ball from one arm 
to the other, so as to be free to use a straight-arm. 
Of course, if a back is being crowded along the side 
line, he may have no alternative than to shift th^ 
ball and get the free use of his inside arm. >But i-^ 
he has the power of choice, it is usually better fr^^^ 
him to dodge. o.: ^ ^ 

The arm-split is a powerful upward swing of t^ai 
arm from a stiff, hanging position, close to ' P 
body, to break the partial or half-hearted encirc ' 
ment of a tackler's arms. It is often highly e&uj 
tive, especially against the forward arm in a tacc > 
from the side. tisA 

The same result on being tackled from the 
is often accomplished by raising the nearer k^'ra 
sharply, at the same time twisting the body a'* 'ay 
from the tackier, with the other foot as axis. 
This method of escape is often sufficiently effective 
against half-hearted tackling, or where the tackier 
is reaching with his arms instead of putting his 
shoulder to the victim's legs decisively. When you 
can twist away from a tackier, his body is not in 
contact with yours. 

Dodging is such an instinctive, natmral process 
that it can hardly be described in terms of con- 
sciousness. A thousand trifles decide what the 
ultimate direction shall be; but they all amount to a 
quick grasp of the weakness in the opponent's 
body poise. 



112 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



Uniformity of starting position by the backs is 
not essential, not even for the moving pictures. 
It is perhaps advisable to place one hand or both on 
the ground as a brace, to avoid starting before the 
ball ; but on some very fine teams none of the backs 
adopt that position. The sprinter's start, while 
doubtless superior for line-bucking, does not lend 
itself as well to lateral motion. Therefore backs 
should be, on the whole, encouraged to start from 
that position which, after due experiment, seems to 
be the best position for them. 

A back should acquire the frequently useful 
knack of making an abrupt change of direction 
immediately before hitting the line of scrimmage. 
If the play is practically a straight buck he should 
be equally efficient with either foot. But if his 
direction is slanting, at or outside the tackle, his 
more probable and helpful change of course will be 
in rather than out. In other words, his turn to 
avoid the tackier should be sudden and toward the 
inside; that is, toward the center of the line. This 
sudden turn can be made only by the outside leg 
and foot. A man can make a slow change of direc- 
tion by the use of both legs and the bending of his 
body and head ; but an abrupt change only with the 
foot opposite to the desired direction. Many power- 
ful backs could increase their effectiveness by learn- 
ing to adjust their steps so that the proper foot will 
strike the ground at the instant when this change of 
direction may be advisable. 



/ 



CHAPTER XV 
BACKS IN RUNNING ATTACK 

I HAVE heard coaches complain, since the old 
push and pull game was eliminated, that there is 
little for the extra backs to do on offense, except 
in deception. This only proves that these coaches 
do not understand the principles of co-operation 
between line and backfield. For if they did they 
would be very glad to have one or two additional 
backs on every team. Backs are still of great use 
in so-called tandem plays, provided of course that 
they have the necessary punch, to aid a lineman in 
removing a stubborn defensive player; or, if such 
aid be not required, to break down the defensive 
back; remembering that the forward back must 
not block the hole with his own body, and, if thrown, 
must try to roll away from the opening. 

We call men running ahead of the runner with the 
ball ^^interference/' Unfortunately the word inter- 
ference gives too much of the idea of mere protec- 
tion. It should be the desire and the task of every 
good defensive tackle and end to impress at all times 
upon this vanguard of the runner with the ball that 
they are indeed nothing better than protective. 
Backs who feel this way rarely advance the runner 

113 



114 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



against a good defense. Theirs should be the spirit 
of aggression, even more so than that of the runner 
with the ball. 

The runner who expects aid from his fellows, and 
who seldom pays in kind when the opportunity 
offers, should not be tolerated. Backs ahead of 
the man carrying the ball should not specifically 
protect the runner. He, rather, should use them to 
protect himself. Their mission should be firmly 
fixed in their hearts; to rip into and knock down 
whatever and whoever impedes the advance. 

There are two ways of hitting the line: one is to 
send the back to pick his hole; the other, to compel 
him to hit the ^spot the signal called for. It is 
entirely theoretical whether during a game you 
make more ground by one method or the other. 
Oftentimes the hole, though apparently non-exist- 
ent, is really in the making, and requires only the 
punch of the runner to swing wide open. The 
offensive and the defensive lines are carrying on a 
struggle, one to build the hole, the other to break 
through and stop the threatened play. They are 
simply holding their own. Backs should be im- 
pressed with the idea that any one of them, with 
reasonable speed and sufficient determination, can 
break through under these conditions. 

At the start of a game, it is impossible to tell how 
one line will match the other. Under the first 
theory of line hitting, the back advances with a 
waddle, not at full speed, holding the head high 
and watching for weakness to develop around the 



BACKS IN RUNNING ATTACK 115 



spot to be attacked. One of the great university 
teams of the east pursued this plan, without material 
success against its chief rivals, for several seasons. 

Charging the back point-blank at the spot where 
the hole is to be made is undoubtedly the sounder 
theory. Here the offensive lineman is set to a 
specific task at a specific point. He knows where 
the back intends to break through; and while he 
works to open the hole there he has in mind, so far 
as possible, the intention of not himself blocking 
the advance. But in the case where the back is 
sent toward the line with express instructions to 
pick his hole, there is a strong tendency on the part 
of the partially successful offensive lineman to cease 
working, because he knows that the runner may not 
select that specific spot, and that there may be a 
better place on the immediate left or right. 

Furthermore, in this case a good defensive quarter- 
back has just so much extra time to discover the 
specific point to be attacked, and to meet the runner 
head on. And it is questionable whether there is 
an3rthing that involves so much punishment to the 
defensive line, or so much weakening effect, as the 
crash of a hard running back, whether he gains or not. 

In the early stages of the game every play that 
a team attempts may fail to gain its proportion of 
the ten yards necessary for a first down. This 
by no means proves that this team will lose the 
game. The physical changes taking place are, as 
yet, impossible to ascertain. But the team that 
is being pounded may be losing more strength than 



116 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



the team with the ball. At any rate, one thing is 
certain. It takes practically as much physical 
strength out of a man to run at a line imder three- 
quarters speed to be knocked down as it does to run 
at full speed and meet the same result. The mental 
discouragement in the former case is certainly much 
greater than in the latter. Therefore, while you 
carry the ball, take as much out of the opponent as 
possible ; and one of the surest methods is by pound- 
ing him with a strong attack. 

Furthermore, if you work the same play two or 
at any rate three times against the same team, edu- 
cated linemen and an experienced backfield will get 
the true, accurate picture of the opposing lines at 
the moment the back attempts to break through; 
provided the linemen at that spot continue a 
determined effort to open the same hole. The 
offensive team may not have gained any ground to 
date; but the linemen should have been taught 
early in the season that their efforts now will be 
far from wasted. They have, presumably, taken 
as much out of their opponents as out of themselves, 
and have nothing to worry about on this score. 
They should know now beyond question where the 
weak spot is, at or near the point of attack, as the 
two lines struggle to thwart each other. That 
information should be imparted carefully to the 
runner; and on the next attempt he should be able, 
under the very same efforts by his linemen, to side- 
step at full speed into the point of weakness formerly 
developed with reasonable assurance of a gain. 



CHAPTER XVI 



PROTECTION BY THE GUARDS 

Countless hours of needless thought and labor 
have been placed upon the protection of the 
quarterback by the center and the guards, especially 
the latter. The old custom of guards a,nd center 
locking legs still maintains its ancient importance 
in conservative minds, to such a degree that the 
makers of the law of football have found it necessary 
to incorporate in the book, as an exception to the 
general rule, that guards and center may lock legs. 
This, no doubt, in order to stem the indignant wave 
of protest that would follow if this smug little cus- 
tom of ancient days were forbidden. And so we 
see the giants of today, like the giants of the olden 
times, standing with straddled legs. Each guard 
throws his nearest leg fearlessly and discordantly 
across the nearest leg of the center, thus making it 
almost inpossible for the poor quarterback to find 
a place to nestle. 

Yet the object of this strained effort is to protect 
the little general behind. Locking legs is a climisy 
arrangement for the center, an tmreasonable tangle 
for the guards and a sore trial for the quarterback. 
There is some protection, admittedly, but it is a 

117 



118 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



protection given at the expense of ten per cent 
efficiency in the four men involved. This would 
indeed be a worth-while arrangement if the center 
trio were blind, or physically incapable. But at 
the worst these three men have only to defend the 
quarterback against two. Their legs are not in a 
position at all times to do the bidding of their brains. 

It must almost be assumed that these three men, 
if their positions are correct, are not expected to 
charge, for they cannot do so without unravelling 
the unfortunate leg tangle. The only other justi- 
fication for this position is the assumption that the 
defense is going to get a decisive jump on them. 
But this is not . rational, either, as it is generally 
admitted that an offensive team will have at least 
a slight starting advantage over the defense. 

No coach would admit that the duty of this trio 
is not to charge with the snap of the ball. Obvi- 
ously, therefore, the power of the charge and its 
direction, principally controlled by the head and 
shoulders, are the essential elements in effective 
work. Then why not place them in the most 
natural and powerful position to do what is expected 
of them? They are close enough together so that a 
concerted charge will include the man or men who 
threaten the quarterback, unless these men assume 
defensive positions outside the guards; in which 
case their menace is slight. Furthermore, they then 
become a problem for the tackles, rather than for 
the center trio. 

If the defensive quarterback emulates the will-o'- 



PROTECTION BY GUARDS 119 



the-wisps of football tradition by throwing himself 
over the rushline to intimidate the passing, a few 
short forward passes over center will cure him of 
his ambitions in this direction, ambitions which are 
hardly likely to be realized in any event. 

If your line is going to make a resistance instead of 
an attack, then spaces should not be allowed; if it 
is going to make an attack, then spaces are allow- 
able, and, within certain limits, highly advisable. 
An extra good center and guard could line up safely 
a foot apart. If they are six inches apart, they will 
at least have room in which to operate without 
bumping one another at the wrong moment. I am 
referring here to a line which knows its assignments 
and will carry them out with a smash. 

The kick formations, however, are an exception to 
the rule. I am inclined to believe that here the 
line should be compressed as tightly as convenient 
to operate. This for the reason that the kick forma- 
tion, originally entirely defensive, still retains a 
great deal of its defensive obligation. More and 
more the theory of defending the kicker is being 
subordinated to the idea of getting the entire line 
down under the kick without delay. However, 
there is still a limited necessity of great importance 
to prevent the immediate charge of any of the center 
trio through the line. This is best accomplished by 
bunching the five forwards from tackle to tackle. 
These five men, charging with the snap of the ball, 
will include in their path of advance the center, if 
he is playing in the line, and both guards. The 



120 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



charging quintet start their charge down the field 
in the above mentioned tight formation; strike the 
defensive trio hard and without fail, and, never really 
breaking their formation, slip their bodies or hips 
sufficiently to one side to allow the intending block- 
ers to ooze through, not run through. Immediately 
thereafter the defensive quintet spreads gradually 
until its members are in a position to wage war 
against the receiver of the kick and his helpmates. 

By way of interjection, the most serious problem 
here is not so much to prevent the center trio from 
blocking the kick as to prevent the tackle-to-tackle 
quintet from going down the field. 

Even with this tight formation on kicks, however, 
avoid locking of legs by guards and center. The 
tight formation will give sufficient protection to the 
kicker against the center trio, provided a high kick 
is sent away from a point ten yards behind center 
within two seconds of the making of the pass. 

Regarding the proper distance between men on 
the offensive line in regular formation, the best 
fundamental theory is to make the line as wide as 
possible, consistent with safety. The defensive line 
must balance the offensive line ; the defensive guards 
outside the offensive guards, the defensive tackles 
outside the offensive tackles. This being true, the 
wider the offensive line, the greater the spaces 
between the defensive linemen, and the greater the 
opportunity for gaining ground. Simmered down, 
it means simply this: with rare exceptions, such as 
a very close kick formation, the crowding of the 



PROTECTION BY GUARDS 121 



offensive line is neither logical nor effective. Suffi- 
cient space to give the individual freedom of action, 
as well as to widen the attacking line without weak- 
ening it, is advisable and should be taught. 

The theory that linemen should interlock legs is 
also based on another outworn convention; namely, 
that forwards must always face slightly toward 
center, in order to see the ball and start with it. 
Both tackles may be men who get their best charge 
off the left leg; but one of them, nevertheless, must 
crouch with the left leg advanced, and make his 
spring from the right foot. One man may be hope- 
lessly placed if he is called upon to swing out of the 
line in order to get into interference. Yet, regard- 
less of his charge, or his ability to carry out his 
assignment as an interferer, the coach insists that 
he stand according to an obsolete rule. The start- 
ing signal has rendered it unnecessary for forwards 
to watch the ball, yet the old tradition persists in 
arranging the stance of rushline forwards.^^j 

There can be no argument that the natural posi- 
tion of the Uneman, within the rules, is his best 
position. But this natural position must be main- 
tained. Except for purposes of deception, a line- 
man cannot asstmie a new natural position, so called, 
after he has heard his signal. Therefore, he must 
take the position from which he can best perform all 
his assignments. There is no mystery about these 
assignments. He has been definitely instructed. 

In the case of raw material it is necessary to select 
for a man early in his career the position that the 



122 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



coach believes to be the best. But as time goes on 
and experience accumulates, there is nothing to 
justify a refusal to allow a different position, if 
results are improved thereby. The words above, 
**except for purposes of deception,'* open up a beau- 
tiful field for the really clever lineman, the man who 
knows his plays, who knows the work that he is 
expected to perform, and who can start from either 
leg; the man with first-class muscular control. 

The best defensive lineman meets his Waterloo 
in the fellow with the tricky feet. 

By changing the position of the feet, together with 
a slight inclination of the body or head, a nifty 
forward can of ten ^ misdirect the defensive man who 
is looking for early signs that will help him to a 
diagnosis of the play. I have known several for- 
wards so subtle as to be able to send formidable 
defenders on wild-goose chases, without the expen- 
ditture of any more of their own energy than was 
required to make some slight but seemingly signifi- 
cant shift of the feet or balance of the body. 

The guard must be voracious and patient; vora- 
cious when the opportunity presents itself, and 
patient to wait for it; understanding that while he 
waits he must expect a considerable amount of dis- 
agreeable trouncing. He must be a man who does 
not especially crave to become a head-liner in the 
papers, but who loves the game for its own sake. 
He must hope for little credit except from those 
who thoroughly know football, and while he is con- 
tributing his little mite, he must ever expect a 



PROTECTION BY GUARDS 123 



reasonably powerful drubbing. His must be the 
wonderfully cheerful disposition which takes its own 
reward in the consciousness of duty well done. 

It is possible to get along at a pinch with mediocre 
guards; but in the big game of the season your team 
can be defeated as readily through mediocrity there 
as in any other way. The right fielder in baseball 
may be chosen for his hitting, and sent to the sun- 
field with a prayer. But history has shown that the 
prayer is seldom answered. To be sure, if you are 
reduced to the necessity of using one inferior for- 
ward to fill out your team, it is absolutely necessary 
to play him at guard; but this is only because a 
lively center on one side and a crack tackle on the 
other, with a defensive quarter four yards behind, 
will be able to carry him through a majority of the 
games. If you wish to see the difference made in a 
team by the substitution of a first-class, powerful 
guard for an inferior one, not only in the defensive 
but in the improvement of the running attack and 
the aid that a guard can bring to center and tackle, 
try the experiment, for your own amazement. 

In the present game, under many conditions, it 
is necessary to pull out one of the center trio, to act 
as a second defensive quarterback. Tackles are 
seldom picked for this duty, for many reasons. The 
center-trio man can shift much more quickly and 
conveniently, and the best man of the three should 
be picked. If a guard is picked, and the remaining 
guard is weak, a very dangerous defensive problem 
may be discovered. 



124 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



A guard should have a powerful charge, should 
be able to work fast and successfully on the ground, 
and must not be a loafer, despite the temptations and 
comparative opportunities of his position. He must 
be a glutton for the punishment which he is sure to 
receive, and which he cannot accept or retaliate, as 
the tackle may, while occupying any traditional 
attitude of self-defense. The early Christian mar- 
tyrs were sinful and worldly compared to the guard 
who, in spite of the provocations that he often has to 
endure, maintains an attitude of sweet serenity, 
and really loves his neighbor just across the neutral 
zone. **Go thou and do likewise,'* would be a most 
unfortunate motto for a guard to follow. 

Ability to assimilate punishment and to inflict it 
implies physical strength and a fair amount of 
weight. The ideal weights for a center-trio playing 
a low charging defense would be: height, five feet 
ten to possibly six feet; weight one hundred ninety 
to two hundred pounds. But, as in the case of 
centers, many great guards have weighed much less, 
as others have weighed much more, than the figures 
indicated. The heavier and taller the man, the 
more wonderful must be his muscular development 
to render hin:^ efficient. 



CHAPTER XVII 



ENDS AND END PLAY 

The position of end is a tremendous job. More 
brains, more stamina and more accuracy are required 
for an end than for a whole backfield. It is the most 
glorious job in football; a job that calls for the most 
extraordinary vitality! When you stop to think of 
an end in a busy game — going down under fourteen 
punts and twenty-five forward passes, many of 
them long ones, in addition to his desperate battle 
with the tackle and all his other duties, some idea 
is grasped of the severity of end play. No team 
should be without four good ends, and even then 
the chances of third and fourth substitutes to '*make 
their letters" are quite as favorable as they are 
in other positions. 

The normal distance of the defensive end from his 
tackle is eight feet; but the farther back from the 
scrimmage line that the runner is likely to start, as 
from a kick formation, the wider of necessity the 
initial charge of the end, and the greater his distance, 
therefore, from his tackle. He should stand eleven 
feet from his tackle on kick formation; the tackle 
meanwhile having shifted himself some two feet 
farther from his guard than usual. The end charges 
for a point where he can meet the opposing back- 

125 



126 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



field bent on skin tackle plays or end runs. He 
charges direct for that point; the angular charge 
often T racticed being a mere waster of time and 
energy. Any very slight changes of direction 
necessary can be made readily and without difficulty 
during his direct charge. 

After all, and whatever the style of line play, the 
great secret of defense is fast charging ends. They 
intimidate the halfbacks, make them hesitate, often 
make them scatter. Forward pass? All right, just 
try it once with fast charging ends rushing into the 
backfield, ready to jump for forward passes, or to 
smash into formations! If the pass can be made, it 
must be made awfully fast. Moreover, the end who 
goes tearing into the backfield forces the offensive 
play to disclose itself immediately. Now, the 
quicker you can show it up, the quicker you can stop 
it; especially if it is not a * 'straight'' play, but some- 
thing else again. 

Many of the great university teams retain their 
ends on the line of scrimmage on plays that seem to 
presage a forward pass. In the first place, this 
teaches the end to loaf. In the second place, it 
gives the attacking team (unless a tackle, or, very 
occasionally, a center man, breaks through to hurry 
a pass) the very opportunity that all teams long for. 
Plenty of opportunity for delay before making the 
pass is all they ask, whereas a pass that is hurried 
by the defending team is seldom successful. There 
are some very quick, short passes to the ends; but 
these scarcely ever accomplish more than a short 



ENDS AND END PLAY 127 



gain, and are ever in danger of interception by tall, 
wide-awake tackles or defensive quarterbacks. The 
pass that counts is the pass that takes time and 
calls for accuracy in the thrower. 

The place to kill the forward passing game is in 
the opponents* backfield, and the passer should 
always be hurried. The end on the offensive should 
shift frequently. Ends, make a point of acquiring 
this habit. Especially when a play is going to the 
other side of the line an end should always slightly 
change his position, though for no apparent purpose. 
This frequent shifting gives him opportunity to place 
himself properly at a time when he needs to give 
everything he has to dislodge or block the tackle. 
By this time the latter's suspicions have been lulled 
by the continual, seemingly meaningless, shifting 
about of the end. 

No end is worthy of the name who neither dares 
nor is able to work successfully against his gener- 
ally more powerful tackle opponent. The most 
positive asset to an offensive team is a first-class 
end. The region around the defensive tackle offers 
the best opportunity for ground gaining. The 
spaces are fully as large as anywhere else, with the 
additional important factor that the play can be 
sent there almost as speedily as it can to any other 
point. It is also very near to the end of the rushline, 
and therefore more difficult to reinforce. The 
chances for a long gain are better here than any- 
where else. Therefore the end needs all the power 
that can be given him without sacrifice of the speed 



128 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



he must have for his down-the-field requirements. 

If an end had four eyes they would not be too 
many. He could use them all. The moment when 
he decides to rest may be the moment of his undoing. 
Other players occasionally may have a chance to 
loaf with impunity, but never the end. 

It is lamentable to see the end on some of the 
biggest and otherwise the best teams, after charging 
a few yards into the backfield on a kick formation, 
stop and wait for the run that is already started. 
He gives the play a chance to form; then backs up 
with it, using his arms to hold off interferers, show- 
ing extraordinary cleverness, oftentimes, in so doing; 
and physically exhausts himself, only to see the runner 
continue, with two or three readjusted interferers 
in front of him. In the old days that was a pardon- 
able sin ; for the poor, misguided end had the imme- 
diate aid of three defensive backs, playing up very 
close to the defensive line, one or two of whom were 
supposed to break interference and to assist the end 
in picking off the runner. 

Today, two of these men, the defensive half- 
backs, are so far away that they cannot arrive in 
time to help the end with the interference. He 
must strike at its heart as quickly as possible, before 
it has a chance to form and get under way with 
real power and speed. On a wide tackle or end 
run it is not the duty of the end to get the runner. 
He will get him if he can, but his main duty is to 
break down the interference. An end goes into a 
wide tackle or end play with the main purpose of 



ENDS AND END PLAY 129 



slowing up that play and disorganizing it. If he 
accomplishes so much, without ever taking an inter- 
ferer down, he has ruined the play. He has slowed 
it up at a time when the positive intention of the 
offensive team has been shown. This subjects the 
runner and his interferers to the immediate attack 
of the halfbacks and the tackle on that side of the 
line; while further defeating the purpose of the team 
with the ball by compelling the nmner to leave his 
interference. 

If the formation made by the interferers and the 
man carrying the ball is close, that is, if the runner 
is within two yards of the interference, it becomes 
the end's plain duty, without hesitation and with 
all his force, to throw himself across the legs of the 
man or men who are advancing in the probable 
path of the man with the ball. The cotu-se of the 
nmner extended through to the interferers in front 
of him is the line of attack where resistance must 
be applied. The idea is to force a change of direc- 
tion by the back. The interferers have no means 
of knowing which new direction the back will elect 
to take, and cannot, therefore, continue to assist 
him intelligently. Against a reasonably effective 
defense there is never time for readjustment. 
Nothing so discotirages a backfield and dashes its 
hopes so completely as a defensive end rushing 
through it before it has fairly started. 

There are times when the end should not throw 
himself into the interference, especially when the 
interference is so far ahead of the runner that there 



130 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



is neither chance to topple him over it, nor seriously 
to inconvenience him by a change of course. On a 
run from kick formation, for example, it is seldom 
that the distance between the pretended kicker and 
his nearest interferer, as the former begins his run, 
is not greater than four yards. Sometimes it is six 
or seven. A charge into the interference would not 
seriously inconvenience the runner, such being the 
case. In fact, such a charge, if made immediately, 
would not be even toward the intended course of 
the runner. The best end in the world might take 
down one and possibly two interferers; but there 
would be several left, and the runner would be 
neither slowed up nor forced to change his direction 
in the slightest degree. 

On this particular play, the real task of the end 
is to make a speedy charge to the nearest point 
along the probable path of the runner at which he 
can possibly meet him. The end knows the line 
of advance after the runner has taken two steps, 
whether it is to be a straight dash outside of tackle 
imtil the back meets his line interferers and then 
takes a wide turn around end; or whether he 
intends a wide course from the moment of starting. 
If the latter, the end should charge in so fast that 
the interferers must actually turn back a little if 
they intend to take him out of the play. If the 
end accomplishes this much, namely, forcing the 
interference back toward the runner, he has prac- 
tically ruined the end run. The direction of the 
interferers is now wrong, and probably can never be 



ENDS AND END PLAY 131 



righted; while the runner is forced to slow down if 
he intends to keep his protection. Finally, the 
runner will have to change his course. 

If the runner is heading for the outside of tackle, 
intending to meet the line interferers and swing 
out behind thera, then the end's charge is straight 
at the naan with the ball. Here, again, he must 
keep his feet, because the distance between the ball 
and the interferers is too great to accomplish much 
by spilling them. 

The mistake that ends make in this sort of play 
is to discontinue the forward charge. Every stride 
of forward charge increases the uncertainty of the 
runner as to his best ultimate course of forward 
advance, ^and also increasingly retards and delays 
the interference, which, of itself, is almost fatal to 
the play. The longer the aggressive attack is con- 
tinued, the longer it takes both interference and 
runner to get past the danger spot. 

The sooner the end stops his advance, the sooner 
the runner can pick his own path, and the quicker 
the interferers can reform. 

Stimmed up, the end should always leave his feet 
to dump the interference at the point the runner 
would pass through if left alone; provided the run- 
ner is close enough to the interference to make it 
tmlikely that he will be able to pass anywhere else. 
If the runner has a chance to make more than one 
stride, probably he will be able to change his direc- 
tion. In this case, the end should charge through 
the interference at the runner; or, if the runner is 



132 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



swinging wide, the end charges to intercept him 
at the earHest possible instant. 

When the end elects to stay on his feet, he should 
remember that this is the appointed time for a 
lavish use of the hands. 

Ends and tackles both should ever and always 
charge into the backfield; never behind their own 
line. Of course, after they discover that a play is 
positively *'gone,'* they take the shortest possible 
route to cut it off or to pull it down from behind, 
but they should not run behind their own line. 
If an end sees a play aiming apparently at tackle, 
he charges forward as usual, driving the play inside 
the tackle, if he knows the ball has gone with the 
play; but prepared also to stop an end-around-end 
run or to change his course sharply. 

A nervy, intelligent end has no trouble or diffi- 
culty with plays that come at or near him; his 
danger arises from plays that are apparently going 
away from him. Therefore he should rest never, 
but always take his charge into the backfield. 

Heavy as his defensive duties are, they will not 
compare with the severity of the requirements 
made upon him when his team is running with the 
ball. To make ground over the tackles is impossible 
without offensive ends who are able to manage 
tackles or at least hold their own with them. The 
tackle is heavier, more powerful, and can use his 
hands. To offset this, the end should have an 
advantage of position, and he does have the advan- 
tage of knowing when the ball will be snapped and 



ENDS AND END PLAY 133 



the exact point of attack. He probably has greater 
speed than the tackle, which should be a big factor 
on the charge, especially if coupled with the greater 
agility reasonably to be expected of an end. 

The end must impress his advantage of position 
on the tackle by his perpetual shifting; causing him 
all the worry and mental uneasiness possible in a 
man of probably superior weight and strength, 
just as, in the wilds of Africa, the smaller, more 
tenacious, more active, vigorous and vicious animal 
has his chance to wear down the larger brute. 

The tackle is not justified in following an end out 
beyond the limit where he can protect the territory 
inside of him. A pretense of following the end out, 
for the final purpose of getting an easier entrance 
into the backfield, is allowable. Defensive linemen 
must balance the offensive team, and he must 
shift with the idea of balancing the team, not the 
individual. 

If the end goes so wide as to engage the defensive 
end, the latter must warn his tackle, and the tackle 
must warn himself, that a kick or forward pass is in 
order; or that his own end may be blocked. His 
duty then is to break up the backfield formation, 
even if he does not get the runner. The tackle 
knows instinctively before he has taken one step 
whether a run is on or not. If it is a run, he has a 
hustle on his hands. So has the defensive end who, 
as the ball is snapped, dodges the offensive end if 
he can, using his hands also to fight his way into 
the backfield. 



134 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



The offensive end should play under the tackle 
as a general proposition; but given superior speed 
and plenty of stamina, a very fine piece of tactics 
now and then is to meet the tackle at his own game, 
so far as the rules will allow. Let the end stand up 
and take a chance, occasionally. The audacity of 
the move may have more good effects than bad. 

The long, snappy tackle is not having all pie when 
he is being pestered and knocked to the ground 
with alarming frequency by attacks directed from 
the ankle to the knee. It applies to all men on 
the line that the head and shoulders are the chief 
implements of warfare, backed up by accurate 
charge-blocking with the body. The end may not 
be able to drive the tackle out of the way; but it is 
extremely difficult for the latter to operate if he 
finds himself effectually blocked and has nothing 
left to succeed with except his hands. 

It must be assumed that the tackle will often 
prove too much for the end to control; and in many 
plays one back is assigned to complete the work 
which the end has attempted. If necessary, he 
will come to the aid of the end; but this weakens 
the play, as it takes away one back who should be 
of tremendous value against the secondary defense. 
The end seldom needs aid. It is not that the end 
individually must show continual superiority to the 
tackle; but he has advantages enough to make it 
very difficult for the tackle to work. If the end is 
able to take up the tackle's attention almost to the 
exclusion of what is supposed to be the latter's 



ENDS AND END PLAY 135 



job — breaking up interference and attempting to 
get the runner — then that end may be said to have 
accomplished his full duty. 

If on the proper side of the man, and having the 
necessary speed of charge and enough accuracy, it is 
often extremely advisable and effective so to charge 
as to meet that leg of the defensive player on which 
the latter was originally braced. It is the leg which 
must be first raised for the decisive step forward. 
Accurately hit while in the air, it means the throw- 
ing of the man off his balance. Before attempting 
this means of attack it is well to know that one is 
throwing the man away from the play, not into it; 
though even in the latter case it is sometimes a 
successful maneuver, because the man is falling 
out of control. 

Slim ends need not be afraid of the big fellow at 
tackle. One of the coaches of a leading eastern 
team in 1916 gave me as the only reason one of his 
linemen was playing on the team that because of 
his size no quarterback ever ran plays anywhere 
near him. One good team, by chance or otherwise, 
later in the season decided to try out this big man, 
and found him such a wondrous friend to their 
offense that they continued to hold conferences 
with him until they had won the game. 

Having read over these remarks about the end 
rush, what a sweet dream to a coach it would be if 
his end rush might have the weight and strength of 
muscle of a tackle in addition to his other qualifi- 
cations! 



CHAPTER XVIII 



THE TACKLE'S BRUTISH CHARGE 

The requirements for successful tackle play 
and the essentials in end rushes are tending toward 
approximation in modem football. The tackle still 
requires greater power as between the two; the end 
a clearer discernment and sounder judgment, com- 
bined with better muscular control. It is also very 
fine to see a tackle who possesses speed, but speed 
with the end is positively necessary. Both must be 
fighters, game to the core. For the crux of the 
situation in football today is the battle between the 
defensive tackle and the offensive end. 

That which used to tell the story of line play is 
now only a figure of speech. Guard no longer 
engages guard and tackle the opposite tackle on a 
man-to-man basis, in a great majority of plays. 
It can no longer be said that one tackle out plays 
the other, except as he opens holes better, or plays 
a more intelligent game. On close formations the 
defensive lineman plays slightly outside the cor- 
responding player on attack ; so that the defensive 
guard becomes the obstacle in the way of the offen- 
sive tackle, while the immediate opponent of the 
defensive tackle usually is the offensive end. 

136 



TACKLE'S BRUTISH CHARGE 137 



This is not always true, as there are certain 
specific plays where the coach will have ordered it 
otherwise; but it is true of the great majority of 
plays. As this is so, the natural conclusion of a wise 
coach is that his ends must be physically capable 
of putting up a fairly equal fight against a powerful 
tackle ; and this in turn brings us to the statement 
that a tackle must have power enough to cope with 
the end. 

The tackle, in fact, should be the most power- 
ful and relentless-charging forward on the rushline. 
On the defense, he should charge from the ground, 
and if the offensive end is playing a normal position, 
close to his tackle, he must charge through this end, 
in a direction slightly toward center; he must 
charge with head and shoulders; with the arms 
swung sharply from the ground, ready to accentuate 
and intensify the charge, either to drive the end 
back, prevent his getting down the field, throw him 
to either side, or to use him as a fulcrum from which 
the tackle may throw himself into a play directed 
outside of him. 

It is impossible to impress on tackle candidates 
too forcibly the necessity of a bold, audacious, 
crashing charge. If he would be successful at the 
smallest cost to himself, physically and mentally, 
the tackle must, by his style and power, convince 
the offensive end that he, the tackle, is lord of that 
particular bit of disputed territory and that there 
shall be no question of the fact during the remainder 
of the game. 



138 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



This is one of the glories and great secrets of 
football ; the production of the personality and power, 
on the part of every single man on the defensive 
teana, to impress early upon opponents a sense of 
the futility of attempting an advance through a 
particular territory. Every football player should 
be taught conclusively that each member of his team 
when on the defense is prepared to exert every ounce 
of power and fight that he possesses to drive away 
the adversary permanently from the place that he 
is guarding. Any man who is unwilling to guard 
his own territory in this spirit will find the attack 
hammering at his door until the end of the day; 
for he will have been discovered as a weak spot in 
the line; perhaps as the weak spot in the line. 

And the tackle, especially, must have a brutish 
charge; he must btmip opposition out of the way, 
and he must cover ground. It is very desirable that 
his other qualifications be combined with height, 
because height means reach; and four or five extra 
inches of reach, backed up by strength, is a matter 
of great assistance in the struggle with a swarm of 
interferers. A short, stocky tackle, though doing his 
best work, often finds himself a bare six inches 
from the man he wants to reach, and who is brush- 
ing by. 

It is also almost essential in a tackle that he be 
able to change his course quickly. But a tackle 
who can put himself in the enemy's backfield early 
is accomplishing much to break up formations and 
cripple the offense. An end and a tackle on either 



TACKLE^S BRUTISH CHARGE 139 



side of the line who insist upon going into the 
backfield immediately on every play, and are able 
to accomplish it, leave no alternatives for the 
attack except center plays, forward passes and 
precarious punts. 

Even when the standing straight-arm defense is 
used, height and reach are of great advantage to 
tackles, enabling them to stand off charging oppo- 
nents at the line of scrimmage until diagnosis of the 
play is completed. 

The tackle, like the guard, must be able to endure 
a great deal of punishment, but he takes it in a 
much more romantic fashion and a rather more 
human position; with a delightful opportunity to fight 
back and to see the more decisive results of his work. 

Until recent years the left tackle was picked 
especially for his speed, as it was of great importance 
that he join the two ends in their race down the 
field under punts. Oftentimes the defense against 
the ends was so severe that if the punt catcher was 
to be nailed in his tracks by any one, the duty fell 
to the left tackle. The tendency to put the faster 
and better tackle on the left very naturally persists ; 
but the reason for it has changed. It is now due 
to the habit, logical or otherwise, of running a 
large majority of plays to the right from regular 
formation; until it would almost seem that most 
backfield men are right-legged runners, turning on 
the left leg but driving with the right. Habit and 
perpetual practice are the only logical excuses for 
this somewhat one-sided development. 



140 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



All through the 1890's, the general habit of backs 
was exactly the opposite. The strongest side of 
the line on defense was always the right, because 
invariably the best backs attempted most of their 
runs against that side. 

At any rate, the left tackle continues to be the 
big noise. When he is graduated, the very excellent 
right tackle is moved to the other side of center, and 
the best of the substitutes or newcomers is broken 
in as the new right tackle. 

On offense, the tackle finds the defensive guard 
very nearly in front of him, and the defensive tackle 
too far out to handle. The general method of offense, 
an iron-clad rule 'that must always be followed, is 
to get the first man who will interfere with the play. 
Under nearly all circumstances, therefore, the offen- 
sive tackle finds that his battle is to be with the 
defensive guard. Whether he will receive aid from 
his own guard depends on the whereabouts of the 
defensive center. If the defensive center is playing 
in the vicinity of the offensive guard, the latter 
must according to one of the first laws of the game 
take this man out of the way; not only as a general 
protective measure, but specifically to save the 
quarterback from s^ous trouble. 



CHAPTER XIX 



PLAYS AND HOW TO MAKE THEM 

A COACH will shift his offense from year to 
year, although his basic system may remain the 
same. He adapts his changes to his material, but 
even if he have a veteran team it is well to make 
alterations. New plays and formations renew the 
enthusiasm of blase seniors, as well as increase the 
labors of rival scouts, thoroughly familiar with the 
strategy and tactics hitherto employed. 

But whatever changes in his style of attack a 
coach may find it necessary or advisable to order, 
the offense that scores is the offense which, whether 
familiar to the opponents or not, has unanimity of 
start, fundamentals carefully worked out and a 
strong ptmch. There is no great mystery about 
plays, or the making of plays. 

A brother coach or a schoolboy captain writes 
and asks for a play. You cannot respond intelli- 
gently unless you know at least the basic formations 
which his team is using. There are certain indi- 
vidual, specific plays, good for one try or perhaps 
for two; but the play your correspondent wants is 
one that can be put on without changing materially 

141 



142 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



his style of offense. The trouble with most offense 
is that there are insufficient check plays, any kind 
of play that has a natural tendency to prevent the 
defensive players from taking chances by early and 
immediate reinforcement of what appears to them 
to be a danger spot. 

For example, you have a shift formation to the 
right, with every indication that the attack will be 
on that side. A strong check play or two will pre- 
vent the defensive team from taking advantage of 
your shift and charging madly into the threatened 
area. 

Most teams have too many offensive formations, 
with too few plays from each formation. The plays 
they use are generally the more obvious ones, with 
insufficient checks and delayed bucks. It is far 
better to pick out the weakness of a general offense, 
so that it can be corrected, than to make a picture 
book of plays which cannot possibly avail unless 
the coach knows the little niceties of attack and the 
general idea of proper assignments. Specific plays 
explained in this book are of little value unless they 
fit into the general scheme of offense of the team 
considering them. 

Most coaches should be able without difficulty 
to devise ntimberless ground-gaining plays. The 
chief points to remember are these : 

Start at center, wherever the hole is to be built; 
as you need reasonable protection for your quarter- 
back if he is playing under center. Furthermore, 
this is the place to start in order to make sure that 



HOW TO MAKE PLAYS 



143 



you have overlooked nothing in developing the hole 
at the desired spot. 

Second, give every man a job. There is more to 
do than you have men to do with. 

Third, never send a man around behind his own 
line merely to give him an assignment. If he can- 
not be of material assistance there, shoot him 
through the opposing line to take down secondary 
defense; doing which he will incidentally inter- 
fere with players of that line who are cutting across 
to stop plays. Or send him to assist the runner 
should he succeed in breaking through. This 
assignment, also, will include interference with 
''^ostile linemen who are cutting across. 

Fourth, figure out carefully the most convenient 
man who can be spared from the task of opening 
the hole and send him against the defensive quarter, 
who is a tower of strength in your opponents' 
defense. Sometimes the player so assigned will be 
a forward, sometimes a backfield man. 

Fifth, do not neglect to make the best use of your 
backfield. Some coaches work plays in which the 
only backs engaged to bring the attack to the desired 
point of attack are the quarter to make the pass and 
a man to carry the ball. They dispose of the two 
remaining backs without much thought; and this 
tends to create a certain amoimt of doubt as to the 
effectiveness of the play and the efficiency of the 
coach. 

These men may well be used to conceal the attack 
by making false charges at other points in the line, 



\ 



144 INSIDE FOOTBALL 

with the distinct intention, however, of crashing 
into opposing linemen, both to keep them out of 
the play and to tire them. Also, the extra backs 
may be used as fake interferers around the end. To 
be sure, this hoax is very quickly discemable, but 
it lays the foundation for a real play from the very 
same formation, with the quarterback faking the 
pass and following the other two backs. Do not 
imagine that you are wasting your backs by sending 
them on their fake errands. These contradictory 
moves by backs not directly involved in the attack 
arouse the deep concern of a first-class football 
team, and oftentimes very seriously divide the 
attention of one or more of the best defensive 
players. Make your backs work all the time. 
They are strong enough to stand it. 

The coach who plots out a play for a team which 
has a fast start and the necessary punch knows at 
once, if he knows his opponents* general style of 
defense, what men must be removed to make the 
play go. If they cannot be removed, the plays 
must be avoided, at least for the time being. Many 
plays are strong against one team and weak against 
another, according to the calibre of individual 
players or the defensive methods encountered. 
The coach must make up his mind what are likely 
to be the effective plays for a given day, and advise 
his quarterbacks accordingly. He will not tie the 
quarterbacks' hands by so doing, although he may, 
for a sufficient reason, the secret of which he need 
not necessarily share, advise against, or even pro- 



HOW TO MAKE PLAYS 145 



hibit, the use of some particular play. In general, 
his advice to the quarterbacks as to the plays they 
ought to use constitutes a tip, based on his knowledge 
of opponents. 

The one last touch that gives permanent dis- 
tinction to a well drilled football team of all-round 
strength is its possession of an outstanding star 
player, a giant among strong men. But I would 
rather have a fine team of well distributed ability 
than a star surrounded by mediocrities. If the coach 
does have the dangerous and fascinating custody of 
a genuine star, the temptation to build an entire 
system of offense around him becomes almost irre- 
sistible. Certainly he should frame his plays to 
give the star man his best chance. But the coach 
ought not to sacrifice sound football, as injuries or 
the faculty may cause the star to set. By using 
the star player as a threat, ordinary plays can be 
given additional effectiveness, his own part in them 
being merely deceptive. But unless these plays 
are serviceable enough for everyday wear and tear, 
they cannot be relied upon if for any reason the star 
is lost to the team. Do not put all your eggs in 
one basket. 



CHAPTER XX 



THE ESSENCE OF OFFENSE 

One hallucination that naany coaches and quar- 
terbacks labor under is that in order to break the 
spirit of the opposing team it is well to hurl plays 
against the strongest man in the line; which plays, 
if successful, will accomplish the desired purpose. 
Focusing plays on the star lineman is sound policy 
occasionally as an experiment, or when the opposing 
team is breaking up and you aspire to its complete 
destruction; one man being seldom able to stop 
plays alone consistently. Under such circumstances, 
running down and ramming over the star lineman 
usually completes the rout of the opposition. But 
it is the extreme of absurdity to start an offense on 
the principle of attacking the greatest strength 
when both teams are fresh and neither has obtained 
an advantage. 

There is a double risk in such a course of pro- 
cedure. Not only will failure add to the assurance 
of the team attacked, but the same failure will give 
rise to serious doubts among the members of your 
own team as to their ability to gain. Furthermore, 
why is it not better on general principles to play 
through any man in the line rather than the strength? 

146 



THE ESSENCE OF OFFENSE 147 

» 



Everything favors attack on the weakest man as 
the logical idea. A chain is no stronger than its 
weakest link. Even this must not be overdone. 
Success at the weakest point will draw help from the 
player on either side, which will make the going 
more difficult. Whereupon the quarterback should 
direct his plays on either side of the original weak 
spot. When the defending players in consequence 
revert to their normal positions, then attack the 
weak member again. 

If the center is a rover it generally means that the 
two guards are playing a bit closer together than if 
he were in the line, for there is always the threat of 
a dash by the quarterback through center. Inas- 
much as the tackles cannot draw in any closer 
whether the center is a rover or not, the width of 
territory to be defended between guards and tackles 
is therefore increased. Disregarding the defensive 
play of the center, there are the weak spots in the 
line. But on straight attack we may not disregard 
the defensive play of the center, as he is in a particu- 
larly strong position. If, however, he can be drawn 
to the wrong side, for example to the left side when 
the play is to go to the right, there is developed an 
extraordinary opportunity for a substantial gain. 
This leads to the conclusion that a delayed cross- 
buck, imder good cover, should be a gainer. Or a 
feint at center, with the ball carried just outside of 
either guard, would, by drawing the center back into 
his normal position, uncover the weakness between 
guard and tackle. 



148 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



Plays agamst tackle are the foundation of any 
scheme of offense. It must be so. Any confusion 
on the part of the defending team, any inefficiency 
by the tackle or end, opens up a beautiful opportu- 
nity. Deficiency at the guards is offset in great 
measure by the work of the center and tackles, 
backed up by the defensive quarter; but even occa- 
sional and momentary weakness at the tackles may 
be fatal. 

The essence of the offense is to get the jtmip on 
the defensive line. This cannot be disputed as a 
general proposition. It would be useless to take 
this advantage without following it up. There is 
bound to be, against a strong team, an immediate 
defensive shock as the two lines meet. But with 
the advantage of the getaway there should be 
greater power in the offensive line at the first con- 
tact. If the attacking line merely gets the jump and 
expends it in the shock, stopping there, no real 
advantage has been gained. 

The lesson is, drive while the driving is good. 
The legs should be brought up fast and hard, in 
short, jerky, powerful strides; the head set firmly in 
line with the spine, the muscles of the back, shoulders 
and neck distended. It is when one leg is raised 
in a long, slow effort to place it forward and continue 
the drive that the weakness in its owner develops, 
and he is hurled back or to either side by the faster- 
stepping, more powerful opponent. In a drive, the 
faster the feet hit the ground, the surer the hole. 

Do not take a man out, or order it done, to the 



THE ESSENCE OF OFFENSE 149 



right or to the left. It is hard enough to take him 
out at all. All college coaches have been asked, 
from a hundred to a thousand times, whether the 
particular lineman inquiring shall take his adversary 
in or out. I have always answered: Never mind 
the direction. Take him. Get him out of the 
way. And, knowing where the play is going, after 
you get him at a disadvantage, slap him into the 
most harmless place. 

An offensive lineman at first is in great difficulty 
against a standing defensive player who holds him 
off with his hands. This defensive player acquires 
the habit, after he has used the method for a short 
time, regardless of his specific instructions, of jump- 
ing into a powerful brace immediately after the 
snap of the ball, instead of a possible charge; the 
result is that if the play comes at him he has no time 
to develop a charge, and must fight it out on the 
scrimmage line. 

If the attack is powerful, this means, at the best, 
stopping the play after a slight gain only. In 
jimiping into this brace he acquires the habit, as 
soon as he learns the heights of his opponent's shoul- 
ders, of shooting out both hands and arms in their 
most natural pose, that is, evenly. By this I 
mean each hand an equal distance from the groimd. 
The offensive forward can easily develop a charge 
with one shoulder down. This will result in the 
defensive man losing one shoulder, thus throwing 
himself sufficiently off balance to be removed easily 
by his opponent. 



150 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



There is another method if the offensive lineman 
has time; which he has on delayed bucks, intended 
to pierce the line at or very close to his position. 
This is, to make a fake charge with the shoulders, 
following it up immediately by the real charge. It 
leaves the defensive lineman stripped of his defen- 
sive power. His arms have been jammed forward 
and have met nothing. His poise for effective work 
is gone. The rest of him probably will go with his 
opponent's head and shoulders. 

Mix him up, get him so confused that he will 
lose confidence in his arms and in his defensive 
instructions generally, and you will soon find him 
down on the ground, where he belongs, but where 
he does not know how to work. The standing 
defense players stand up with equanimity in the 
center of the field; but most of them are found on 
their hands on the ground, trying to stem the tide 
when there is danger of being scored upon. I would 
much prefer to stop my opponent in the middle of 
the field than be compelled to do it on the ten-yard 
line; not so far as the thrill, but so far as the outcome 
of the game is concerned. 

There are innumerable offensive and defensive 
positions that a man can be thrown into by the 
action of his opponent, even when the latter is 
being outplayed. If the play is continually stopped, 
however, the defensive lineman is satisfied with his 
defense. This is where the offensive lineman has 
his opportunity to put the play up to the defensive 
quarterback at least. He knows, at every moment 



THE ESSENCE OF OFFENSE 



151 



throughout the play, just where the spot is, though 
shifting slightly from time to time, almost big or 
weak enough for the charging back to break through ; 
and by a slight shift of his body at the instant when 
he knows the back is to strike, he can increase that 
opening. 

Right here lies the golden opportunity. Strange 
as it may sound, the offensive lineman and the 
offensive back should have sufficiently retentive 
memories to store away this knowledge for future 
use; and surely the back should receive this informa- 
tion, if he does not acquire it himself, from the line- 
man or possibly from another back who discovers 
it. 

So it comes down to this: in the early moments 
of the contest the teams are figuratively sparring 
for an opening. Neither may be able to accomplish 
much with its attack. But the team that discovers 
the holes a foot or two removed from the spot where 
the coach intended or expected them to be, will soon 
make the formerly impregnable line take on a 
decidedly different appearance. 

Eyes were made for football. Do not forget your 
eyes, whether in the so called * 'blind" charge of the 
defensive line, as it charges with stiff neck but with 
forehead sufficiently turned up to enable the vision 
to take in all that is happening, or whether in the 
back as he peers into a hole or selects the correct 
moment for the straight arm or the arm split. 

Some of the best defensive players are what might 
be termed ''football gossips." They have eyes and 



152 



INSIDE FOUl^BALL 



ears in the backs of their heads. They are out for 
information at the expense of their opponents at 
all times, as they should be. Coaches and players 
should religiously guard against giving to the oppo- 
nents one iota of advance information. Watch the 
backs in practice every minute, and do not allow them 
to discover to their opponents by so much as a 
glance, shifting of the feet, or inclination of the 
body, the translation of the quarterback's signals. 
It is amazing how much some defensive players 
can help themselves by reading aright the trivial 
signs and signals that denote intention and which 
should never be given except by an occasional 
clever back who gives them only to mislead. 

Overdoing this deception is much to be avoided, 
but a back or a lineman can occasionally open a 
beautiful hole without physical exertion by a decep- 
tive glance, a movement of the body or feet or a 
carefully worked out over-balancing of the body. 
And here, while we are on the subject, it is well to 
state that the lineman who, upon hearing the signal 
for a play that calls for him to open a hole, immedi- 
ately responds by a shudder, a more resolute pose 
and a crashing of his heels into the ground, would 
make a better man to receive the drubbing in 
practice on the second team. 



\ 

CHAPTER XXI 
RUSHLINE PLAY IN LINE ATTACK 

Let us take the working-out of a play where the 
ball is to be carried between the defensive left guard 
and left tackle. In the first place, the entire prob- 
lem starts at the center of the line. Therefore, the 
first question is, whether the defensive line consists 
of six or seven men. If six, there is an extra defen- 
sive quarterback. Logically, then, one of these 
two at least must be taken care of. And if the 
system of attack with a seven-man line includes the 
problem of reaching the one defensive quarterback, 
the system with a six-man line includes the problem 
of reaching both defensive quarterbacks. 

The seven-man defense is the better defense for 
most regular formation plays, and hence will be 
considered first. The defensive center becomes the 
first serious consideration, since he is playing in the 
line. 

If the center is on his own right of the offensive 
center, the latter must be able to make the pass and 
to cut off or charge back this opponent. Now sup- 
pose that the clever defensive center, who, as the 
signal started, had purposely drifted out to his own 
right, now makes a sudden, slight shift, which places 
him on the other side of the snapper-back's head. 

153 



154 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



The passer's obligation alters immediately. He is 
no longer in a position where he can hope to guarantee 
the safety of his quarterback. And the offensive 
right guardj who had other plans before the oppo- 
nent shifted to his side of the center, is unable to 
take the chance that his own snapper-back will be 
able to protect the quarter under the new conditions. 
The positive duty of driving the opposing center 
away from the quarterback and keeping him out 
of the play now devolves upon the guard. 

Had the defensive center maintained his original 
position on the other side of the snapper-back, the 
duty of the offensive right guard would then be 
determined by the position of the defensive guard. 
If the defensive guard were playing wide, the offen- 
sive guard would have the evident duty, and the 
delightful task, of shooting through the line and 
attempting to take down the defensive quarter. 
If successful, he would increase the chances of a gain 
very materially. If his speed and skill were plainly 
insufficient to accomplish this purpose, he must help 
as best he could against the defensive center, in 
case of any possible danger from the latter, or against 
the defensive guard, continuing the work which 
by this time the defensive tackle would have begtm; 
for beyond question, under the rule stated with 
reference to the guard, the tackle must put all his 
strength upon the defensive guard if the latter is 
in his natural position, between the offensive tackle 
and guard. 

Having charged the guard with all his might, and 



RUSHLINE PLAY 



155 



finding that for reasons sufficient to his own guard 
the latter has elected to help him ; and having, tem- 
porarily at least, cut off the defensive guard from 
advancing to the point of attack, the tackle now 
slips off his opponent, and attempts to throw him- 
self into the path of the defensive quarterback. 

The chance that he takes by leaving the defensive 
guard for his own guard to handle is well worth 
while. By this time, he knows that, so far as his 
work is concerned, the most likely man to stop the 
play is now the quarterback, rather than the guard. 
Furthermore, the man with the ball is now about to 
reach the scrimmage line; and as between the two, 
the defensive guard who has been temporarily held 
up, and is now engaged with another man who 
should finish the job; and a fast-charging defensive 
quarterback, who thus far has met with no opposi- 
tion, the guard becomes of minor importance. 

This double task by the tackle of dealing with 
both the guard and the defensive quarter often can 
be done, and often has been done. It is most 
beautiful and effective work. 

If for any reason the tackle finds the defensive 
guard playing in so close that he will be easily 
managed by the offensive guard, his problem then 
becomes this: ''Who is the next most likely enemy 
to prevent our advance?'' Beyond question the 
answer is: "The defensive tackle," if the latter 
cannot be handled by the end. And here the decis- 
ion must be made. It is better to gain a yard 
than a shorter distance; and if the defensive tackle 



156 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



is in a position to get to the play faster than can the 
defensive quarter, it is plainly our tackle's duty to 
aid his end. If, however, the end is showing entire 
ability to keep the tackle out of the play, the defen- 
sive quarter becomes the offensive tackle's objective. 

What of the remaining forwards? They cannot 
be used behind the line of scrimmage on a play of 
this kind. Their work, therefore, lies ahead of 
them. 

If the left guard is speedy enough to block off 
the defensive quarterback, it is plainly his duty to 
do so. 

Here let me warn against a very common practice 
which, despite unnecessary, hard work, accomplishes 
little in comparison with the physical exhaustion 
entailed, and should therefore be avoided. Many 
teams are coached on plays of this kind to charge 
their opponents who are in front or outside of them, 
in order to prevent their sliding along behind the 
line and aiding in the defense. But the true task 
of the left guard, if unable to reach the quarterback, 
is to swing over in front of the point of attack and 
head the runner, with the idea of blocking the first 
opponent who arrives on the scene. 

The left tackle, likewise, should attempt, if pos- 
sible, to cut across between the defensive guard and 
the point of attack, with the idea, also, of heading 
the play and blocking. In any case he must get 
through the line as fast as he can. Should he find 
that the defensive guard opposite had aided in 
preventing or stopping the advance, he should 



RUSHLINE PLAY 



157 



make special efforts, on the next similar play, to 
prevent this guard from repeating. 

The left end should charge slightly to the inside 
of the spot where the defensive right tackle stood 
when the ball was snapped; thereby automatically 
and effectively preventing that defensive player 
from sliding across to the point of attack in time 
to aid in the defense. There is great importance 
in discovering early in the game the particular 
players who are preventing advances, and laying 
special emphasis on preventing them from doing so 
in the future. 

Now the great point to be brought out here is 
that the guard and tackle on this side of the line 
should be blocked off in their effort to defend on 
the other side by the offensive charge as it breaks 
through to head the play; rather than by a specific 
charge against individuals. In the former case, 
the offensive forwards can accomplish both a proper 
disposition of their opponents in the line and help 
to the runner. In the latter case, further effective- 
ness is impossible after the direct blocking of the 
opponent. 

This completes the offensive theory of a play 
aimed between defensive left guard and tackle, 
except for the work of the backfield, purposely 
omitted because I wished to point out carefully the 
assignments of the forwards, regardless of the back- 
field attack formation, provided the attack is a 
direct thrust by any of the backs, on a regular 
formation play through this point. 



158 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



The action if the attack were finally put through 
this point by a delayed buck would differ according 
to the amount of deception, and the amount of 
defense that was drawn away from the point of 
attack by the deception. Of course, the only 
defensive men of particular importance who are 
thus drawn away are the men who can return upon 
discovery of the deception. Those men are easy 
to pick out. They are the men who probably would 
withdraw the least from the actual point of attack, 
and the men, fewer in nimiber, who, if left alone, 
might be drawn toward the point of attack. The 
former should be allowed a moment in which to move 
with the deception before being charged; the latter 
should be charged immediately if they are dangerous. 

It is of infinitely greater importance to work 
out the theories of attack and defense carefully 
than to offer several diagrammed plays, which can 
never be put on properly unless the instructor 
knows the basic theory. On the other hand, if the 
theory is perfectly understood, it is the simplest 
matter to make innumerable plays; many more, in 
fact, than a coach should use during a season. 

To demonstrate further these ideas, let us take 
the same play against a six-man defensive line, with 
two defensive quarterbacks, one of the latter being 
a center-trio man, drawn back about four yards 
to assume a position behind and between the 
defensive guard and tackle; the regular defensive 
quarter moving over to a similar position on the 
other side of the line. 



RUSHLINE PLAY 



159 



There are two things that become apparent at 
once. First, the defensive Hne being of exactly 
the same width as before, the spaces between the 
men on the line are greater. Second, if we spent so 
much time attempting to block off the defensive 
quarter when he was alone, it is especially import- 
ant when there are two such men, to give attention 
to the same idea. There is a third important con- 
sideration which should be mentioned here: a 
quarterback in the old-fashioned but still sterling 
position, close up under center, becomes a greater 
menace than ever; with the apparent result that 
the defensive guards are forced to a position some- 
what closer to each other than if they had the help 
of a center in the line or only slightly withdrawn 
from it (the * 'roving center"). 

Starting once more at center, the point of attack 
being still between the defensive left guard and 
tackle, there is, in this case, no defensive man, 
provided the line is even, in front of the snapper- 
back. Without question, then, this center should 
be able to pass the ball and by his charge to cut off 
the defensive quarterback on his left. 

But if that is his assignment, nothing else appear- 
ing, his quarterback is seriously exposed to the 
defensive right guard. This fact immediately estab- 
lishes the work of the offensive left guard, who must 
at once charge across and cut off the dangerous 
man opposite to him. These two things accom- 
plished, what about the right guard on offensive? 
If the defensive guard opposite or slightly outside of 



160 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



him is not charged immediately, the menace to the 
quarterback once more becomes especially serious. 
For example, suppose an offensive right guard 
attempts at once to charge against the defensive 
quarter, already presumably cared for by the 
center. If for some reason, right or wrong, the 
right tackle has charged elsewhere than into the 
defensive left guard, the latter, charging, and 
finding no opposition, crashes accurately and de- 
structively into the quarterback; and the play is 
ended with a material loss. 

Thus the lesson is taught again most forcibly that 
the offensive lineman must always attack the first 
man who can injure or stop the play. 

The moral is : always get the first dangerous man. 
Therefore, this right guard, having a guard almost 
opposite to him but slightly on the outside, must 
defend his quarterback by driving his man out of 
the way and preventing his return. If he can 
manage this defensive guard absolutely he notifies 
his own right tackle of this fact; but, even then, 
the right tackle must note carefully how far over 
the defensive guard can get before the offensive 
guard loses his power to control him. It is a matter 
of inches only. Therefore, in spite of the apparent 
ability of the offensive guard to control the defen- 
sive guard, if any doubt arises in the tackle's mind, 
because of the slightly changed position of the 
defensive guard toward the tackle, the latter also 
must charge the guard. 

This charge will be only momentary. He will 



RUSHLINE PLAY 



161 



leave one guard to the other as soon as he can, and 
attempt to reach the second defensive quarterback, 
really the main dependence now of his team. The 
surer the offensive guard of his ability to control 
the defensive guard, the more positive becomes the 
chance of a big gain, because the tackle is then left 
practically free to put the nearer defensive quarter 
out of action. 

But this immediately raises the question again, 
will not the defensive tackle stop the play? The 
action of the offensive end will answer this question. 
He has at least an advantage in position. This is 
especially true if the defensive tackle is standing 
high. 

Furthermore, the defensive tackle is never so 
uneasy as when the offensive end is standing outside 
of him. Here is a play where the end especially 
desires to stand inside the tackle, and gains a clear 
advantage by so doing. In fact, he should be able 
to prevent the tackle from stopping the play. 

Meanwhile the offensive left tackle, the defensive 
guard having withdrawn slightly toward center, 
can hope no longer to cut through on the inside. 
He charges, therefore, by the most direct path to 
cut ofiE the nearer defensive quarterback; failing 
in which, he assumes the regular play of an 
interferer. • 

The left end's assignment is the same as it was 
against the seven-men-on-the-line formation. Inci- 
dentally, it is always vastly better judgment, where 
the blocker and the man to be blocked are separated 



162 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



by a considerable distance, to rush to the vicinity 
of the man carrying the ball and do the blocking 
there, rather than attempt it further away. The 
man who is finally to be blocked is bending every 
effort to get at the runner with the ball. The nearer 
he draws to the runner the smaller opportunity 
he has to avoid being blocked without foregoing his 
purpose, and the easier it is for the blocker to find 
him. 



CHAPTER XXII 



SIDELINE PLAYS AND STRAIGHT BUCKS 

Some of the worst errors committed in football 
are due to the failure of the coach to drill his team 
in the plays necessary and the best method of get- 
ting away from the sideline. Of course, there is 
always the well known method of running the ball 
out of bounds, thereby securing the privilege of 
carrying it in as far as fifteen yards. But sup- 
pose a case where the offensive team finds itself 
close to the sideline, with only room for the guard 
outside of center, perhaps not even that, on a 
third down. Plainly now the ball must be gotten 
away in one down, if the fourth down is to be 
saved for a punt or try at goal, forward pass or 
other scoring play. 

The tackle and end of both teams, having no 
room to play between the ball and sideline, must 
go to the other side of center. Surely this is handi- 
cap enough against the team carrying the ball, as its 
probable direction of attack, barring a sideline 
play, is known. The defensive men who have gone 
over find it perfectly natural to take their places on 
the unaccustomed side of the line and to tear into 

163 



164 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



the backfield. The offensive tackle and end, hbw- 
ever, have no means of knowing what positions these 
men will take; nor, without coaching, have they 
satisfactory knowledge as to just what to do. 

What they should do depends entirely upon the 
intention of the play. For example, suppose the 
extra defensive tackle and end assume positions in 
the vicinity of the other end, leaving a wide space 
between him and the regular tackle. If the play is 
one which starts wide for the end, cutting inside 
him finally, it would be foolish for the extra offen- 
sive tackle and end to move out to give battle to 
their former opponents at the extremity of the 
line. Plainly they should take positions immedi- 
ately outside their regular offensive end, ready to 
charge on the secondary defense; or one of them to 
help the regular end with the tackle. 

As a general proposition, the principle of offense 
in the line must always be fight the first loose man 
who could get to the play. This idea should be 
taught carefully, to prevent mental confusion 
arising among forwards when they encounter 
novel defensive methods. Such instruction further 
prevents the forwards from wasting their efforts 
on men already taken care of. 

In passing let me say, that the sideline play will 
never be old. 

The old-fashioned end run, except when a four- 
man backfield is employed, is passing into the dis- 
card. As a matter of fact, on regular formation, 
attempting anything on the offensive farther out 



SIDELINE PLAYS 



165 



than a skin-tackle play is a questionable effort. 
Plays at or around the end by deception, such as 
kick formations or double and triple passes, are 
possible and advisable. But from close formation, 
with a balanced line, or an unbalanced line for that 
matter, except possibly on the short side, where the 
defensive end is closer, it takes too long to get the 
backfield to the line of scrimmage. 

Moreover, during the process of getting to the 
line of scrimmage, the backs are running for the 
most part with the sides of their bodies toward the 
defense. Their merely lateral resistance is sub- 
jected to the direct power of the defenders. Their 
efforts are further weakened by a fast charging end, 
who if he is successful disrupts or scatters the 
interference. 

Players, however, should never be allowed to 
consider their wide -running plays as merely intended 
to relocate the ball on the field of play, if such 
plays are given and taught to them. 

One of the best plays to get the ball away from 
the sideline, in order to be able to take advantage 
of a diagonal wind in kicking, or to avoid the danger 
of punting out of bounds, is a quarterback run based 
on the deception of a straight halfback buck through 
guard and tackle. So far as I am concerned, this and 
similar plays are much to be preferred to the ordi- 
nary end run. To make the run effective, however, 
the defensive team should have been taught to 
expect the line attack, and it is well to have at 
least one old-fashioned end run for possible use in 



166 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



getting out from the sidelines in the early moments 
of the game. 

For the straight buck, the backs are in straight, 
parallel formation, four and a half yards from the 
line of scrimmage and a yard apart. The ball is 
passed by the quarterback, in this case, to the right 
half, who will charge between defensive guard and 
tackle. Most coaches are afraid of this play, on 
account of the danger of a fumble. As a matter 
of fact, there is no excuse for a fumble. The quarter- 
back, however, needs considerable practice. 

The chief thing that he must guard against is 
lost motion. Having placed his hands under 
center to receiye the ball he should not, as is a 
common fault with quarterbacks, draw the ball 
in toward the stomach. From the point of receiving 
the ball to the point where the pass is made one 
continuous, slightly curved motion suffices to send 
the ball in the proper direction. 

The pass on straight bucks is not made to the 
back, as this would mean that he must receive it on 
the side; thus slowing up his speed, which is the 
chief element for success. It is a short pass, made 
into the air, at the height of the runner^s waist and 
in front of him. The back's right elbow is held 
near his side, with the forearm and open hand 
extended at right angles to the upper arm and fingers 
spread wide. This hand is used merely to stop the 
ball. The left hand is held three or four inches 
below the right, open, parallel to the ground, palm 
upward, and not far enough from the body to leave 



SIDELINE PLAYS 167 



a space through which the ball might drop when 
stopped by the right hand. The ball should drop 
into the left hand. 

If the pass is a bit farther forward than the half- 
back expected, the right hand must be extended to 
stop it. In this case the left hand goes with the 
right, in the same relative position as before. What 
happens to the football is this : the right hand stops 
the ball, which, while dropping into the left hand, is 
encircled by the right hand and wrist, and the two 
hands together draw it firmly to the chest. 

Never forget the motion of drawing the ball to 
the chest. It helps the runner to bend forward and 
strike hard with head and shoulders, his protective 
muscles in the very best position. When the 
motion of drawing the ball to the chest is completed, 
the left hand and wrist, like the right, encircle it. 
The impression given is that of a man folding his 
arms. The ball is almost completely covered by 
the forearms, wrists and hands. 

Incidentally, this is the best method of carrying 
on all quick thrusts and bucks through the line, 
where the straight arm is of little or no avail, but 
where both arms are absolutely necessary to insure 
the safety of the ball. This position of carrying 
the ball and hitting the line gives a back the greatest 
assurance imaginable. I have never seen it used 
except by my own teams, but I consider it not only 
a strong guarantee against loss of the ball, but the 
method which concentrates the maximum of mus- 
cular power. There is here no tendency to carry 



168 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



the ball under one arm, even supported by the other 
hand, a position in which, on account of the unnat- 
ural strain on one side of the body, the straight- 
ahead hitting power is impaired. The ball, when 
carried as I have suggested, is hugged to the middle 
of the chest. The method is natural, quick, easy 
and efficient. 

Should the back succeed in breaking into the 
open sufficiently to consider the use of the straight^ 
arm, he has a sure grip on the ball with both arms 
and can quickly and securely transfer it at his 
option. 

Returning now to the straight buck, let me say 
that this is one. of the fastest plays in football. It 
cannot be stopped without gain by bringing aid to 
the line. If the runner is stopped without gain it 
must be done by the defensive guard or tackle. 
The defensive quarterback is the main reliance of 
the defense, but he cannot arrive early enough to 
prevent a substantial gain. Naturally, therefore, 
the three men in order of importance considered by 
the offense are the tackle, guard and defensive 
quarter. It is one of the few plays which, when 
properly executed by the quarterback and halfback, 
can take advantage of the small hole that is bound 
to be opened for an instant by a fast-charging tackle 
and end, but may be closed very abruptly. But 
the defensive guard or tackle must block up the 
hole conclusively in order to stop a gain. This is 
a difficult task against a capable end who is charging 
the tackle and a tackle who should have the defen- 



SIDELINE PLAYS 



169 



sive guard at his mercy, on account of their relative 
position in this particular play. 

The offensive end, who has the more difficult 
problem, should find out very early in the game 
whether the tackle will go out with him when he 
shifts, wide, and how far. If he can succeed in 
drawing the tackle out even a foot, although a 
yard is much better, he should acquaint the quarter- 
back with this fact immediately, suggesting this 
particular play. Having thus deceived the tackle 
into the belief that he is endeavoring to place him- 
self for a skin-tackle play (in which case he would 
prevent the tackle from coming out), he is now in a 
position to shift his charge quickly and cut the 
tackle off. 

Asstmiing that the defensive guard and tackle are 
effectively blocked, the next man to be considered 
is the defensive quarterback. A fast right guard 
should be able to reach this defender, as he has no 
one to interfere with his charge. He need not defend 
the quarterback, as the pass is so rapid, unless the 
defensive center is a man of extraordinary speed. 
Even in this case, if the snapper-back, immediately 
upon the release of the ball, throws his body toward 
the right guard position, that protection undoubtedly 
will suffice. The left guard, left tackle and left 
end charge through the spaces to aid the halfback 
if he succeeds in clearing the line. 

Now we come to the part of the play wherein 
many coaches fail. It is evident that the other two 
backs, originally parallel to the runner, cannot 



170 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



contribute directly to his success. But these backs 
must be given a task that will have a specific, help- 
ful, practical result. They must not be wasted. 
In cases of this sort, many coaches dismiss the extra 
backs with too little thought, giving them, perhaps, 
a fake retreat into the backfield as if to receive and 
throw a forward; or sending them criss-crossing 
without sound reason. 

On this particular play, note the natural result of 
the assignment of the two remaining backs. Their 
duty is to start immediately with the snap of the 
ball for the defensive left end; not one behind the , 
other, Indian file; but the fullback outside the left 
half, so that each has a chance at the end. 

There is one very important thing to be said here 
which applies especially to backs. Every man who 
is sent on a deception assignment, unless especially 
instructed otherwise, must be a good actor. He 
must be realistic to the last fine shade. If he is not, 
the mental picture drawn for the benefit of the 
defense is insincere, and the latter will not and does 
not react as hoped for by the maker of the play. 
And so, in this case, if the two backs do not dash 
out at top speed and take a btimp at the end they 
will have done serious injury to their offensive. 

Suppose the charge by these two backs is espe- 
cially realistic. Note the results. First, on the 
defensive tackle. The picture his mind receives of 
the play as it starts is blurred. He has a vision of 
a possible play inside of him, another of a possible 
play outside of him. During his uncertainty as to 



SIDELINE PLAYS 



171 



his best plan of defense, the end buts him. The 
defensive quarterback receives the same inconclu- 
sive impression. He, too, has his fractional second 
of extra uncertainty as to the point where his serv- 
ices will be required. The defensive end finds it 
expedient to give most of his attention to avoiding 
the two backs, but he, too, is perplexed. 

All of these things not only materially assist the 
runner with the ball, but also contribute to a beauti- 
ful setting for another play, wh,ich is not only a fine 
ground-gainer, but to which I have already referred 
as one of the best for getting the ball away from the 
sideline, in order to improve the kicking or running 
situation. This play contains the same assignments 
as the actual buck in nearly every particular. The 
quarterback receives the ball, and makes a natural 
feint, as if to pass to the halfback; who appears to 
receive it, slaps his arms, double over and crashes 
between defensive guard and tackle. The defen- 
sive quarter, having seen the original play, with the 
halfback carrying the ball, has his mind temporarily 
but firmly set on stopping that halfback without 
gain. This is fine for the attacking team, for the 
halfback is instructed that the defensive quarter- 
back will be coming for him and in a perfect position 
to be cut off from the wide run that is planned. 

The defensive tackle, having seen the original 
line buck also, has only one purpose: to nail the 
line bucker in his tracks. Accordingly, he falls 
victim easily to the offensive end. If, by any 
chance, the defensive tackle snaps into the hole so 



172 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



quickly as to elude the offensive end, the latter con- 
tinues his charge and nails down the defensive 
quarter. 

The attacking quarterback, on previous line- 
bucks, has avoided giving any suggestion to the 
defense of the possibility that he may or might run 
with the ball ; and now his fake pass, to be thoroughly 
realistic, involves a very slight element of delay. 
He may need better protection than when he merely 
passed the ball. His right guard, there being now 
other and better means of reaching the defensive 
quarter, accordingly devotes himself to blocking the 
defensive center, thus affording the necessary pro- 
tection to his quarterback. But if the defensive 
center is on the further side of the offensive center, 
the guard will, as before, charge for the defensive 
quarter. If he misses him, he can at least continue 
on to the wide wing, to give his aid, with the for- 
wards on his left, to the runner with the ball. 

Meanwhile the quarterback shoots with the ball 
under his outside arm for the territory outside the 
defensive left end, passing immediately behind the 
supposed line-bucker as the latter enters the line. 

Now we come to the defensive left end, who is 
being sorely tried. He has acquired the habit of 
avoiding as well as possible the two wild backs, 
who are continually hurling themselves upon him 
whenever the straight buck is played. He is 
mentally a,nd physically in the worst state possible 
to stop a play which he does not expect. If he does 
expect the play, to stop it will be difficult, with no 



SIDELINE PLAYS 



173 



aid from the tackle and probably none from the 
defensive quarterback. 

At least one of the backs attacking the end should 
stay on his feet, and both should do so if they are 
sure, by the position of the end, that by merely 
blocking him the runner will be safe. They can 
then continue on their course with the very important 
task of taking down the defensive halfback on that 
side, who has discovered the nature of the play and 
is on his way to rectify the harm done. 

I have seen this play gain over two htindred 
yards during one game against a good team. Its 
full value is obtained by withholding it until the 
opponents have defended against the actual buck 
two or three times. Needless to say, the success of 
the end run depends upon two things principally; 
on how well or poorly the straight buck operated, 
and the efficiency of the two halfbacks in deception 
when the quarterback is not coming behind them 
with the ball. 



1 



CHAPTER XXIII 

SEQUENCE PLAYS IN THEORY AND 

REALITY 

What the pitcher in baseball accomplishes by 
change of pace, a football general sometimes attempts 
by means of a series of plays prearranged in order 
and carefully rehearsed, thus suddenly increasing 
the speed of the attack, since not ime is lost in 
giving signals between plays. A sequence is sup- 
posed to rattle off as fast as the attack can line up. 
The speed of it ought, theoretically, to sweep the 
opponents from their feet, especially where the 
element of complete surprise is present. 

The modem football match is geared to a slower 
gait than the parent games of the nineteenth cen- 
tury and early twentieth. Quarterbacks cannot 
run their teams with the speed and abandon shown 
in the old days of five yards to gain. They have, 
nowadays, to consider and choose among a greater 
variety of more complex plays; including plays 
designed for particular situations, which depend 
for success upon particular positions assumed by 
defenders, and especially the secondary. Hence series 
plays ought to contrast sharply with ordinary 
speed of attack. Inject a sudden sequence into a 
deliberate and slow advance, and, if successful, it 

174 



SEQUENCE PLAYS 



175 



catches the opposing team faster than it can Ime up. 
Unless the defenders recover instantly from their 
consternation and readjust themselves to the 
change of pace, the going is often easy. 

Sequence plays are wonderful, except for one 
thing: no sooner do you get them started than you 
find out something on accotmt of which you would 
prefer to stop them. They are very apt to disor- 
ganize most teams using them. There is seldom a 
concerted plunge on the part of the whole team. 
Penalties for offside are frequently deserved. Worst 
of all, a string of plays run off in sequence wakes 
up the players of the other team; and it is often far 
better to let them sleep. A sequence is such an 
exciting thing that it enthuses everybody. 

There are so many intricacies, so many unexpected 
things arising during the course of a sequence that 
it is very often better to stop it after one or two 
plays. Moreover, a sequence is quite likely to 
result in a heavy gamble on the fourth down, with 
two yards to gain and a punt the logical alternative 
to another running play. 

In addition to the difficulty on sequence plays of 
getting one's own men back on side quickly and 
properly braced for the snap of the ball, there is 
usually the ultra-clever defensive player to be con- 
sidered. This individual manages to tie himself up, 
innocently of course, with an offensive player's 
arms and legs, preventing all attempt at a speedy 
lineup and also giving his rattled mates a chance to 
steady down. 



176 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



It is further the weakness of this method of 
attack that some one defensive line player, roused 
to the danger, and making a fine defensive plimge 
against a forward who is not quite ready, is able 
often to set the poor old sequence back several 
yards. This special spurt will raise immediately 
the gravest question as to the advisability of con- 
tinuing the sequence. 

There is much debate generally as to whether 
three plays or four should be included in a sequence. 
Personally I believe that a two-play sequence is 
the best, to be started on a first down; leaving two 
downs for readjustment in case of failure. But 
my experience has been that a good team against 
which even a two-play sequence has been attempted 
becomes at once the liveliest and most wide-awake 
aggi'^g^'tion imaginable. It becomes, in fact, de- 
plorably and disgustingly alert. 

Generally, sequences are run off on the snap of 
the ball, no signal numbers being given after the first 
play. Sometimes a -snap signal only is given after 
the first play. The team is less likely to start off 
like a bunch of stragglers if the snap signal is used. 
Even with a snap signal in use, the ragged offense 
of the attacking team often overbalances the strong 
points of sequence plays. It requires a vast amount 
of drill to accustom players to line up fast after the 
first play of a sequence, ready to start again with 
the snap of the ball. When these series plays were 
new and novel they were highly successful in many 
instances, but it becomes increasingly difficult to 



SEQUENCE PLAYS 177 



upset a well coached team by their use. I question 
whether a sequence of more than two plays is worth 
the amount of time that must be put upon it to 
get results. 



CHAPTER XXIV 



LONG AND SHORT FORWARD PASSES^; 

As a rule, forward passes from a set formation are 
much less effective than those thrown unexpectedly 
from a running formation, with the defensive 
backs already on their way to protect the spot 
threatened by the supposed run. Under the latter 
condition, coaches and players can figure to a 
nicety the probable position of the secondary 
defense at the time the pass is to be thrown. This 
greatly lessens the chance of intei ception, even 
when the thrower's accuracy is only moderate. 

The one general law regarding forward passes is 
to throw them when possible ahead of the nmner as 
he is facing. He is surer of the ball and surer of 
an additional gain if he can field the ball while in 
motion. However, the pass, if particularly quick, 
must be thrown accurately to the receiver. Short 
forward passes can be thrown equally well by any 
man in the backfield, if five yards behind the line, 
assuming equal proficiency among the backs; but 
many of the very effective long passes are thrown 
to best advantage by the quarterback behind the 
deception of a fake running attack. Other decep- 
tions such as double or triple passing may be 

178 



FORWARD PASSES 



179 



employed to give the eligible receivers time to get 
down the field. Or the long passing may depend 
for execution upon the original deep backfield posi- 
tion of the thrower, as in a kick formation. Place- 
ment kick formations provide a particularly effec- 
tive mask for forward passing intention. 

The forward pass may be said to have accomplished 
its original mission in football. That was to keep 
the defense sufficiently open and sufficiently in a 
state of uncertainty to render it possible to make 
ground consistently by running attack. Even when 
the pass is only used as a threat, its primary pur- 
pose appears to have been achieved. In fact, it 
may be questioned whether the rule-makers have 
have not gone a little farther than they really 
intended. They have given the offense a weapon 
with which, when expertly used, no defense can 
cope. Almost any coach can devise forward pass 
plays against w^hich there is literally no protection 
which will not weaken beyond hope the scrimmage 
defense of the team attacked. Fortunately, the 
himian equation enters in to save the situation. 

The forward pass is a great disorganizer of a 
team which is excellent against straight attack. 
This team is often tight against the strongest plays 
at or around the tackles; but let two successful 
forward passes be thrown, or even one, and the 
effect on scrimmage defense is often surprising. 
Unless the pass is restricted, offense will incline, I 
think, to its use more and more. There are many 
possibilities in the way of forward passes completed 



180 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



behind the line of scrimmage which have not been 
realized. As a team could gain consistently were 
it not for the defensive quarter, evidently forward 
passes directed behind his position will continue to 
have at least a fifty-fifty chance of success, and 
against long passes there is really no adequate 
defence that will not hopelessly weaken the defense 
against running attack. 

It is a mistake to grip the ball in making long 
forward passes. In bringing the ball sharply around 
in the act of throwing there is sufficient resistance 
to give control and to impart the necessary spiral 
twist, provided the three longer fingers are firm 
on the part of the lacing nearest to the end of the 
ball, which is balanced on the palm and thumb. 
But while drawing the ball back behind the ear, 
where it is held pointing toward the right and rear 
(in the case of a right-handed thrower), the left 
hand is used to press it firmly against the right hand, 
and this pressure is relinquished only in the act 
of throwing. The ball is really thrown sideways, 
but as the thrower's arm completes the arc which 
points the projectile in the direction intended, he 
twangs the lacing as he snaps his wrist, thus impart- 
ing a definite rotary motion to the ball. 

Long passes should never be made to the runner, 
but into a zone beyond and preferably inside of the 
runner in the general direction of his flight when 
the ball is thrown. When he changes direction 
to field the ball he will be able to see it by a 
slight turn of the head without loss of speed. 



FORWARD PASSES 181 



He may also discover any special danger of inter- 
ception. 

Some of the best long forward passes I have used 
start apparently as cross-tackle bucks, with the 
quarter under center. 

The backs give every appearance of making a 
genuine line play. They charge the end and tackle, 
while their tackle takes the guard. The quarter, 
having faked his pass to one of the backs, hustles 
to a point five yards behind the tackle, taking 
advantage of the backfield's protection. He makes 
his spiral pass to either end, although the more 
diagonal pass is the easier to recover. 

The ends have gone down the field in a wide course, 
in order to run past and around the defensive half- 
backs. The latter are forced to make their turn 
inside of the ends, who when twenty yards down 
the field are some fifteen yards outside of the half- 
backs' original positions. These backs are never 
able to field a pass of sufficient carrying power, or 
even to overtake the runner, provided the latter is 
not compelled to wait for the ball; the ends being 
fairly on top of them by the time the ball is in the 
air. The end is going at full speed, and with per- 
fect assurance, to a zone known to him and unknown 
to his opponent. 

A pass carrying twenty-five yards beyond the line 
of scrimmage cannot be fielded, in fact, by either 
the halfback or the fullback. This statement 
might be incorrect in case the fullback makes an 
immediate guess as to which of the ends will receive 



182 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



the ball. If he backs the wrong guess, a touch- 
down results. If the ball is thrown poorly, too near 
to the center of the field, the full back may recover 
it ; or he might have a fair chance to field the ball 
if he were playing closer to the line of scrimmage 
than he ought; in which event the quarterback 
would no doubt have elected the surprise kick 
instead of the forward pass. As the ends are at 
least fifteen and often twenty yards down the field 
before the fullback can be certain of the direction 
of the ball, and as they are in motion while the full- 
back is not, the latter's chances to interfere with 
passes up to forty yards in length have practically 
the value of a zero from which even the cipher has 
been eliminated. 

The receiver can watch the ball and the half- 
back while running, while the halfback must lose 
sight of the receiver if he turns to look for the ball. 
So that the advantage remains with the attack, 
even if the pass is a trifle short. Of course, if the 
pass is altogether too short, the halfback may be 
expected to get it. There might be such a thing as 
a pass too short even for the halfback. But the 
problem of getting distance is generally the least of 
the passer's worries. The ball has only to be thrown 
with sufficient height to ''stay up." The great 
difficulty is to find ends who will run and not lag, 
and who will field the ball as an outfielder in base- 
ball fields the drive over his head. 

Covering the last fifteen yards with arms out- 
stretched has cost many a receiver many a pass. 



FORWARD PASSES 



183 



His first duty should be to get under the ball. The 
best ends let the ball come to them, have a neat 
basket of hand, chest and forearms ready for its 
reception, and continue the run without losing a 
stride. They have timed their speed to effect a 
perfect junction with the arrival of the ball. 

Another very dangerous pass is thrown behind 
the deception of a center buck, on which it depends, 
in fact, as the defensive quarter must be drawn into 
the line. The tandem forming on the left, the 
quarter fakes his pass while swinging around to his 
left foot. He must remember to point his left toe 
sharply at a right angle to the scrimmage line, as 
his next move is to take a long step with his right 
foot, another with his left and another with his 
right, which swings him into position for his throw. 
The pass is taken six to ten yards over center by 
either of the ends, one long, one short. The ends 
time the pass, and the one certain of his ability to 
make connections hails the other with the familiar 
'Tve got it," or ''I have it," of baseball. The other 
end, relieved of his responsibility for the pass, turns 
his attention instantly to the nearer defensive half- 
back, and prepares the way for a run. 

Preliminary to both of these pass plays the ends 
show every intention of nailing the defensive tackles, 
as usual, but as the latter, no less than the defensive 
quarter, have every reason to expect a line play, 
they will, if necessary, throw the ends down the 
field, rather than attempt to impede their getaway. 
There are many other passes, and they all place a 

' I-' ■ 



184 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



tremendous burden upon the secondary defense. 
It must know the combination of both defenses, 
against running plays and against passing. If 
passes are used continually, the defense will set 
itself for them; but too often the tendency will be 
to play the halfbacks too far back or the fullback 
too far up. 



CHAPTER XXV 



THE ONLY STARTING SIGNAL 

All teams on attack should use a starting signal, 
rather than attempt to watch for and charge with 
the snap of the ball. Few teams, however, have 
possessed a starting signal which gave them a clean- 
cut edge on the defenders, as such a signal should 
do. Starting signals generally in use afford the 
teams using them such a slight and problematical 
advantage over elevens which cling to the ancient 
method of keeping all eyes on the ball, charging on 
the snap, that there is little to choose between the 
two methods, so far as the starting is concerned. 
There is, however, a slight recommendation for the 
commonly used starting signal in that no player 
except the quarterback has any cause to watch the 
snap of the ball. The men on the line, and perhaps 
one back, who are so placed as to have great diffi- 
culty in seeing the snap of the ball without turning 
their heads, or bending their bodies slightly out of 
the best charging position, are relieved of this 
necessity. 

Signals should be as simple as possible; easy to 
acquire and memorize; easy to change in case of 
detection, without causing confusion, because the 

185 



186 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



fundamental principle remains substantially the 
same. It then becomes supremely important to 
possess a starting signal which effectively conceals 
the moment of starting from the opponents; which 
enables a team to diregard watching the ball; which 
enables it to charge with, not after, the snap; which 
eliminates all nervous tension due to waiting, in 
strained and listening attention, for a number to be 
uttered or repeated, one knows not when; which no 
uproar of cheering or blare of band music can drown^ 
which permits of perfect preparation for, and result- 
ing unity in, the charge. 

The string of numerals barked out by a quarter- 
back as the tearas line up contains a play number, 
variously arrived at. It may contain a so-called 
key number, telling when to listen for the play 
number. Sometimes, as in the more primitive 
methods of signal giving, the players are numbered, 
and the signal contains a number representing the 
player who is to take the ball. In this case, the 
spaces between the men on the line are also num- 
bered, and the number of the space selected as the 
point of attack must also be included in the signal. 
Finally, we have the starting number which when 
heard or heard repeated sets ball and team in motion 
and begins the scrimmage. 

Usually the starting signal in question is a cer- 
tain number to be given and later repeated ; the snap 
of the ball following immediately on the repetition. 
Sometimes the snap is made on the number following 
the starting signal, or the starting signal repeated. 



THE ONLY STARTING SIGNAL 187 



Sometimes the signal is merely permissive; the center 
snapping the ball as soon as he chooses after, but 
not until, the significant number is given. Some- 
times the starting signal is the repetition of the 
play ntmiber. Another method is to snap the ball 
on some predetermined nimiber in the signal 
sequence, the fourth or the fifth or the sixth. Some- 
times it is the key number which is repeated to give 
the starting signal. 

None of these methods ever accomplished the 
primary purpose of the starting signal, which is to 
produce absolute unity of attack, simultaneous 
with the snapping of the ball; an advantage over the 
players on defense, who are always compelled to 
watch for the actual movement of the ball, or the 
start of the fastest opponent, in timing their own 
charge. 

Take, for instance, the start on a certain number 
in the sequence following the play number, on the 
fourth number, let us say. Assume the play number 
to be 36, following a key nimiber the second digit 
of which is 9. The complete signal is as follows: 
42—27—89—36—3—6—8—5. These four numbers 
are snapped off in regular, accurate cadence, and 
every man on the offensive team charges on the 
exact instant when the number 5 ( the fourth num- 
ber) is being pronounced. There is a perfect unity 
of charge and not the slightest loss of time after the 
snap. Charge and snap are simultaneous. But 
the continual charging on the fourth nimiber after 
the signal nimaber becomes so obvious that the 



188 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



defensive team cannot fail to pick up the idea very 
early, with the result that a defensive charge ensues 
which is just as well timed, and much of the advan- 
tage is lost. 

Or let us take the method which involves repeti- 
tion of the second digit of the play number as the 
snap number. Assuming the play number as before 
to be 36, the same signa^l would run : 42 — 27 — 89 — 36 
— 51 — 23—46. As 36 is the pl^ay number, the whole 
team is watching for the next 6, in the second digit 
of some number yet unknown. When the number 
finally does come in the form of 46, it is just about 
as big a surprise to the offensive as to the defensive 
team. There is an unnecessary, nervous tension, 
because of the uncertainty of the team with the ball 
as to when this number is to be announced. Result 
— not a charge as a unit, but a charge as soon there- 
after as each man can accomplish it. The former 
method has half the idea of the correct starting 
signal, but gives too much information to the 
opponents. The latter method fails. 

The old method of watching the ball and starting 
with it means a delayed start, and in certain forma- 
tions one or more players are almost unable to see 
the ball as held in position by the snapper-back. 
There is absolutely no advantage in clinging to this 
method of starting with the ball. 

Here is the only starting signal method which 
combines everything that can give entire superiority 
to a start on the snap of the ball. Let some ntmiber, 
as the one before or after the play number, contain 



THE ONLY STARTING SIGNAL 189 



the starting signal. It may be the first digit of a 
double number. It may be the second. It may be 
the result of adding the two, or of subtracting one 
from the other. Then, grasp the meaning of this 
starting signal. It does not mean a start on the repe- 
tition of the number when heard. It does not mean 
a start after as many additional ntmibers have been 
given as the signal ntimber indicates. It does not 
mean a definite preparation like that of a sprinter 
who awaits the explosion of the cartridge in the 
starter's pistol. It means that the quarterback 
shall call off his numbers in rhythmatic staccato; 
and that every player knows how many numbers 
he will have to wait. He makes his charge with, 
not after, the utterance of the starting number; the 
charge, the snap and the quarterback's bark all 
going together. 

Now for example, let us say that the addition of 
the first two ntmibers makes up the play signal; 
in this addition, the second number should never 
be larger than five. I have seen many players who 
were poor on signals but have never seen one who 
could not add up to five. This addition becomes 
so instinctive that at the end of one week it can 
scarcely be called addition at all. Thus : 26 — 5 ; 27 — 
4; 28 — 3; 29 — 2 become 31 when uttered, and with- 
out mental effort. The next number of the signal 
is what would be termed the starting signal. It is 
not literally the starting signal; in fact it seldom is. 
It signifies on which number, of a series of single 
digit nimibers to follow, the ball will be snapped. 



190 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



Take an example. The play is to be number 31, 
the starting signal so called is 4. The quarterback 
calls out: 28 — 3 — 4. Then comes an appreciable 
break, the length of which depends upon the period 
of the season. For the first week or two the break 
is sufficiently long to make sure that everybody has 
the very easy signal. Sometimes in the early season 
I have had the quarterback repeat the signal, with- 
out request from the players. The three numbers 
are known to include the entire signal. The team 
is set. The break after the signal, 28 — 3 — 4, having 
been completed, every man on the team now knows 
that his play is 31, and that on the fourth signal 
number called by the quarter the ball will be snapped 
and the team will be off. 

Now the quarterback announces in even rhythm, 
not varying his spaces between numbers one iota, 
after the habit is acquired, 3 — 7 — 9 — 8—4 — 6 as 
many numbers as he pleases. On the nimiber 8, 
the ball and team go. There is no waiting to find 
out what the number will be. It may be any num- 
ber from 1 to 10. But every one knows it's the fourth 
number. The number, the snap of the ball and the 
charge of the team are simultaneous. The team 
merely says: *'Vll count with the quarterback, one 
two, three, go!'' The center says: *'ril count with 
the quarterback, one, two three, snap!" The 
quarterback says: *'They are counting with me. 
Let's all count together," and he simply calls out, 
'Three, seven, nine, eight," instead of: **One, two, 
three, go!" 



THE ONLY STARTING SIGNAL 191 



The numbers following 8, which is the fourth 
number, are merely a cloak, and are oftentimes, in 
the enthusiasm of a hard-fought contest, never 
uttered. I would advise that the quarterback call 
out at least one of these meaningless numbers, in 
order not to give too great emphasis to the fourth 
(in this case) . 

In order to make sure that the lesson is under- 
stood, let us give one further example. We will 
say that the play nimiber is 36. Signal: 31 — 5 — 3; 
then the break, equivalent perhaps to three or two 
seconds according to the time of the season; then 
the quarter continues: 9 — 6 — 4 — 8. The ball is 
snapped on 4. The quarter knows it, the entire 
team knows it. At the very instant that *'4'' is 
uttered, the entire movement, including the snap, 
occurs. Neither center nor line nor backs wait 
for the number. There is no offside, no starting 
before the ball. 

The center must pass the ball, if at all, at that 
precise moment. If there is interference with the 
snap, or if for any other reason he decides not to 
pass it then, he does not pass it at all. The line 
and backfield may charge, because the center has 
had no opportunity to notify them of his dilemma 
by calling out, Signal;'* but there is no penalty 
attached, for there has been no movement of the 
ball, and therefore no play. 

I give this in its very simplest form, for demon- 
stration. There are nimiberless combinations to 
accomplish the same thing. For example, you may 



192 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



make the first number of the signal the key to the 
starting number, as I prefer to call it. Or you may 
make the addition of the digits of the first ntimber, 
or the third number, or any nimiber, the key to the 
starting number. For example, 21 — 27 — 4. In 
this case the two digits of 21 added make 3. On 
the third count in the (complete signal following 
21 — 27 — 4, each of the three numbers being pro- 
nounced on absolutely even rhythm, the entire team 
takes its plunge. In this case it will be seen that, as 
before, we are adding the signal nimiber, 27 and 4. 
The play is 31. For example, let us make the key to 
the starting signal the first number, and for purposes 
of explanation let it be one of two digits. We shall 
add the two digits to obtain the key to the starting 
signal. Let the number be 21. To avoid any con- 
fusion we shall add the second and third ntmibers 
to obtain the play signal. We shall call those two 
numbers 27 — 4. This means that the play is 31, 
and we are to start on the third nimiber which fol- 
lows after the break, as before. The completed 
signal will now be, 21 — 27 — 4; 8 — 6 — 4 — 9. Remem- 
ber the break after the completed signal, 21 — 27 — 4, 
in order to give the team opportunity to digest the 
complete meaning of the signal. The snap and the 
charge and the number '*4'* are simultaneous. 

After many years' experience with this starting 
signal, I can scarcely recall an instance when my 
team was penalized for offside or starting before the 
ball. Teams have been penalized for standing 
offside, or where some back, after a quick shift, 



THE ONLY STARTING SIGNAL 193 



became overbalanced, and was in naotion when the 
snap signal was given. But these instances were 
in no way attributable to the starting signal. With 
all due regard to modesty, I am convinced that this 
is the best starting signal ever used. 

There is no straining of ears, no mental anxiety 
lest the repetition of a ct ;tain number be missed. 
Nobody is off his balance or unready or unsteady 
when the count is completed. It is a one-two-three- 
go proposition, with absolute periodicity of 
rhj^hmic cotmt, impossible to miscalculate or to 
miss. Even if the noise from the side lines is so 
great that the players cannot distinguish the num- 
bers that are being called and can only hear the 
voice of the quarterback, that is sufficient. 

Certain numbers are preferable to others for 
starting, because of the punch that is in them. The 
more encouragement and fight the quarter can con- 
vey by his command to charge, the better the 
response. Four is the best number of all, 1, 2, 8 
and 10 second best, 3, 5, 6, 7, and 9 least desirable. 
This information is really for the quarterback. The 
men will go on any number. Repetition of 4 or of 
any of the numbers from 1 to 10 can do no appre- 
ciable harm, because the team is starting while the 
number is being pronoimced. 

Simple arithmetical processes, so easy that they 
scarcely call for mental effort, are to be preferred 
every time to the waiting for a key number which 
win be followed by the play nimaber. Nervousness 
and anxiety are to be avoided rather than a childishly 



194 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



simple problem in addition or subtraction. Never 
add or subtract a larger number than five. This 
gives you five combinations for your signal. Num- 
bers ending in a cipher, where addition or subtraction 
is used, should be avoided. Players are sometimes 
uncertain whether the quarterback has said 30 — 4 
or 34. Elimination of key numbers gives one less 
cause for tension and worry. 

I have used the same system of signals for years. 
For the first two weeks of the playing season add 
your first two numbers for your playing signal, and 
use your third number as the key to your starting 
signal. Then shift to the very same system, except 
for the substitution of subtraction for addition; 
never subtracting a higher number than five, just 
as in the addition never adding a higher number 
than five. After two or three weeks at subtraction, 
with the very simple alternative of going back to 
addition, in case opponents appear to be detecting 
the signals, I shift to a third very easy method. I 
use double digits for the first three numbers, and 
take the second digits of the first and second ntmi- 
bers for the play number, and the second digit of 
the third nimiber for the starting signal. Let us 
say, for example, that the play signal is 28, and the 
starting signal is the fifth number after the break. 
Here is the complete signal: 32 — 48 — 25; 4 — 6 — 9 — 
— 8 — 3 — 7. The second digit of the first two 
numbers make 28, the break comes after 25, and the 
charge comes simultaneously with the pronounce- 
ment of the number 3. 



THE ONLY STARTING SIGNAL 195 



I have used three sets of signals similar to these 
for many years, and have yet to find any serious 
difficulty in making the change from one to another. 

I shall merely mention that I have found it 
advisible to have the odd numbered plays nm to 
one side and even numbered plays to the other. 
As this is a very common custom, and as simple as 
any, I doubt if it needs any further comment. 
However, by way of double assurance, it may be 
well to say that if my center buck to the left of center 
were 31, the same play to the right of center would be 
32. 

Coaches and players often wonder why their 
signals appear to be known to the opposing team, 
especially in the second half. They are convinced 
that their signals were carefully covered, and were 
known to themselves only. Yet here is the bald 
fact staring them in the face, and to their own great 
disadvantage. The mystery becomes clarified when 
we consider that nine out of ten coaches have one 
punt signal only; and that formulated according to 
the same system as all their other signals. 

Stealing signals is not considered decent by any 
coach who would hope to retain his self-respect, 
nevertheless one meets a coach now and then who 
will condescend to this method of winning a game, 
or attempting to do so. He is not in any sense 
analogous to the player who during a game, and by 
perfectly legitimate means, through the frequent 
repetition, for instance, of a poorly disguised signal, 
is able to anticipate a play and warn his team- 



196 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



mates. The unscrapulous coach places a man on or 
close to the sideline, who writes down four or five 
or six punt signals during the first half, also the 
signals given for some particular running play, 
generally a powerful one, and one frequently used; 
a skin-tackle play, for example. The punt signal, 
under the above conditions, is the key to the entire 
signal system. The spy has these four, five, or six 
signals, each unquestionably different from the 
others, but each carrying signs of similarity suf- 
ficiently plain to show by comparison the general 
scheme. The possessor of these ill-gotten gains 
rushes out to his secret comer, and in a compara- 
tively short time,^ having verifiedliis discovery of the 
punt signal by finding the same formula correct as 
to the tackle play signal, is able to produce to his 
master the complete story. 

A careful coach must guard against this possi- 
bility. In order to do so he must have several 
punt signals. This gives the dire plotter a very 
different and difficult problem, for when he finds 
that adding or subtracting numbers, or first and 
second digits, or any other calculation, leads him 
to an evidently erroneous result, he may and prob- 
ably will be unable to solve the puzzle in time to 
make the solution of any benefit. 

In the very large colleges and imiversities, where 
material is plentiful, it may be advisible to sub- 
divide the entire squad into Squad A and Squad B. 
In a general sense the team for the year will be 
picked from Squad A, barring an extraordinary 



THE ONLY STARTING SIGNAL 197 



development by some player in Squad B, which 
demands that he be transferred. Squad B will be 
composed of ineligibles, transfers, men restricted by 
other faculty regulations, and timber for future 
years not considered good enough or necessary for 
the present season. 

Under these conditions an entirely different 
system of signals for the two squads would be con- 
sidered necessary and advisable. It can be seen 
easily that a team from Squad B playing against 
Squad A, with a different system of signals and 
starting, can furnish a much more satisfactory 
workout, especially from the standpoint of the 
varsity's defense. But in the general run of foot- 
ball teams, even some of the best, there is no such 
enviable embarrassment of riches; they are fortu- 
nate if they are able to bolster up their varsity team 
with first-class substitutes, when not compelled to 
scrimmage one side of the line against the other in 
practice workouts. In their case, it would be 
wholly futile to attempt to have one set of signals 
for the first team and another for the second. Such 
a course would compel the first team substitutes to 
learn two sets of signals. The less mental burden 
of this sort the better for the player. 

It is far from satisfactory that each team must know 
the other's signals. It gives to the varsity team on 
defense a greater advantage than it deserves, against 
its weaker opponent; makes a genuine try out and 
full development impossible and weakens the in- 
stinct for diagnosing plays. 



198 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



In order to offset these unfortunate conditions 
as much as possible, one of the coaches or extra 
players can be placed behind the defensive quarter- 
back of the varsity team, to give the second team 
its signals by holding up the fingers. If the play is 
thirty-eight, he will call out ''Signal/' then hold up 
three fingers, followed by eight fingers. The 
quarterback then rattles off a string of numbers, 
meaningless except as it does contain a starting 
signal. This process may be continued throughout 
the afternoon with the waste of very little time, as 
the coach can himself, or through his assistant, 
order always and promptly the plays on which he 
desires to lay especial emphasis. 

An ultra-modem complication is the giving of 
* 'defensive signals.'' The team not in possession 
of the ball which indulges in this practice is ever 
loud in its declaration of innocence, always main- 
taining that the man selected to give these signals 
has been especially coached to detect plays, has 
shown a miraculous power of diagnosis, and has 
no intention to annoy or upset the attacking team. 
The rule regarding unsportsmanlike conduct, and 
its provided penalty, should be sufficient to protect 
the team in possession of the ball against this par- 
ticular form of petty persecution. 



CHAPTER XXVI 



ESSENTIALS IN SCOUTING. 

Scouting of opponents has become a 
thoroughly established custom, despite the expressed 
displeasure of a number of those who consider it an 
abominable practice. These visitations are consid- 
ered a proof of good sense in football circles, and I 
find it difficult to sympathize with those who hold 
that it is unsportsmanlike to take advantage of any- 
thing that a prospective opponent may reveal in his 
public exhibitions, especially where admission fees 
are charged. It might, however, be argued, with 
a good show of reason, that spectators at practice 
ought to regard themselves as friends, or at least 
as neutrals, toward the team whose guests they are. 
This view of the matter, if generally accepted, 
would, it seems to me, solve the problem to the 
satisfaction of nearly every one. Incidentally it 
would do away with the abuse of excessive secret 
practice, which tends to weaken a close, enthu- 
siastic relationship between the football team and 
the school or college body. 

The distinction between scouting a team in 
practice and in games is sufficiently a matter of 
commonsense and common imderstanding. The 

199 



200 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



stranger appearing on the field at practice who gives 
ground for being regarded as a probable spy is not 
infrequently treated almost as a spy would be in 
war; whereas it is a common custom to notify the 
coach of the team that is to be scouted in a game 
of the intended visit. Usually the notification is 
accompanied by a request for a few of the best 
seats. Under these frank and friendly conditions, 
for which all coaches can vouch, it is difficult to see 
wherein the critics of the custom of scouting have 
serious grounds for adverse criticism. At any rate, 
all coaches are aware that their team will be scouted. 
They know, too, that the scout will begin his task 
by focusing his attention upon the center-rush, as 
the logical starting point of everything. 

The chief thing to know about the * 'enemy'* 
center rush is whether he has different styles, 
actually used in a game, of passing the ball. It 
would seem hardly likely, at this late day in football, 
that a center should have one method of making his 
short passes and another, decidedly different, for 
his punt passes. Yet I have found this to be the 
case on many of the biggest teams. 

It can be seen at once what a tremendous advant- 
age is given to a rival team by advance possession 
of this knowledge. For example, if the opposing 
quarterback calls for a kick formation and remains 
under center, but the latter, by the position of 
his hands on the ball, shows the defense that he 
intends to pass to his mate in the punter's position, 
the possibility of line attack can be excluded imme- 



ESSENTIALS IN SCOUTING 201 



diately. The value is entirely subtracted from a 
formation otherwise not without its good points; 
for did the center refrain from giving the play away, 
the quarter could keep the defending team in doubt 
up to the last possible fraction of a second as to 
whether he would take the ball either to run with 
it himself or to pass it to another for the same pur- 
pose, or whether the ball would be passed to the 
kicker for a ptmt, run or forward pass. But if the 
center by some fault or mannerism reveals his 
intentions, the word can be passed along immedi- 
diately by signal to ends, tackles and secondary 
defense, who need no longer worry as to line attack, 
and may adjust themselves at once for an end nm, 
forward pass or punt. 

One of the best potential teams I ever saw spoiled 
its season by having two methods of passing from 
center, the one for long, the other for short passes. 
No doubt, football strategy as it grows subtler will 
often manifest itself by pretended irregularities in 
passing; and centers will become versatile in such 
deception. A center instructed to camouflage his 
intentions by mixing up his passing, now and then 
using his long pass technique in delivering the ball 
to the quarterback, might be able to accomplish 
the imdoing of the cleverest defense. But after 
watching the center's passing for the eleven to 
which I have referred, the scouts, after several 
games, discovering no intent to deceive, were able 
to put that team at a decided disadvantage in its 
most important games. 



202 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



Once informed as to the habits of the **enemy" 
center with regard to passing, a coach would pro- 
ceed to ask his scout whether the rival team played 
a zone offensive and whether a four-man backfield 
or with the quarter under center. Next, as to the 
defensive plan; with special regard to the exact 
positions of the men in the secondary defense; 
how far the ends station themselves from the tackles 
and whether the ends charge in fast or play a wait- 
ing defense; whether the center defends as a rover, 
whether the line employs a stand-up, straight-arm 
defense, or charges from a position on the ground* 
Next in point of significance would be considered 
the habits of the quarterback, the position he takes 
on formations, and his favorite plays. 

Some quarterbacks develop a habit almost 
approaching a disease of taking the ball themselves 
for a dash through center when the distance to be 
gained is less than three yards. The coach is 
interested in any information revealing this ten- 
dency, or concerning tricks or mannerisms by which 
the quarterback is inclined to reveal any of his inten- 
tions at any time. The coach's eagerness for indi- 
cations that plays are apt to be ''telegraphed 
ahead'* applies also to the backs and to all other 
members of the team scouted. 

Some quarterbacks cannot refrain from directing 
their signals or their eyes at the halfback destined 
to carry the ball. Often a quarterback shifts his 
whole modus operandi, with even a perceptible 
alteration in the tones of his voice as he gives the 



ESSENTIALS IN SCOUTING 203 



signals, when he finds that he has picked himself to 
run with the ball. Frequently, in addition to 
giving the signals, he begins talking. Usually, in 
this case, his remarks are intended to enable him 
to get away, as in case of a dash by himself through 
the center of the line, while his backs are standing up. 

When a team is working on a starting signal, 
carefully hidden, the quarterback frequently be- 
comes nervous over one feature, namely that the 
center pass the ball in time to enable him to handle 
it. He is quite likely to throw his hands open, or 
make some other gesture to which the center re- 
sponds. If the defenders in the center of the line 
discover this failing, they can charge, very often, 
before the offensive backfield starts, thus more than 
balancing the usual handicap of the defense, which 
seldom has that advantage. The scout would be 
questioned closely as to the punting. He would be 
asked whether the punters inspected were forward 
passers also, or dangerous runners with the ball 
from kick formations. The coach would inquire 
how many men were called upon for punting, 
whether any lineman was drawn back to perform this 
duty, and which was the best kicker amongst them. 
Did any of these men seem to place his punts.? 
Did they stand close and kick from running forma- 
tion, or, if they stood back, how far from the center .^^ 
How did the centers pass from kicks? On the 
regular starting signal, or when ready himself, or 
at some signal by the punter, as for example a 
sudden opening of the hands? Was there any 



204 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



specialization in blocking kicks; and, in the pro- 
tection of its own kicker, where in the line was 
weakness revealed ? 

To all of these questions, the coach who is keen 
must require answers in detail; and the scout 
should be able to indicate within a foot of ground 
the relative positions of secondary defense players 
and ends on kicks and regular formations. 

Are they charging from the ground on the defense, 
or standing the attacking forwards off with their 
hands? If charging from the ground, whether the 
charge is carried through with determination? Or, 
if the standing, straight-arm defense is used, do 
the defenders - show an immediate, well defined 
effort to back up plays on the other side of center? 

These are the vital things in one-game scouting. 
There are many other things for the scout to watch 
and report, if he has time and opportunity, and the 
coach naturally will ask many questions not here 
enumerated; and of course going into the passing 
game with the scout as well as possible. The coach 
should also inquire as to any special defensive for- 
mations, for example the defense against a spread 
line, if exhibited. 

It is a great aid to a coach to have at least one 
first-class scout, more if possible, who can watch 
future opponents in their preliminary games, 
and report accurately on the significant features of 
their play. The scout must have a thorough 
knowledge of the game, combined with genuine 
reportorial ability ; and if he is also a coach, who can 



ESSENTIALS IN SCOUTING 205 



assist in * 'putting on" the rival teams' formations 
with the second eleven, so much the better. It is 
advisable for a coach, if he intends to make coach- 
ing his business, to judge a scout cold-bloodedly by 
the results of his work. It is easy enough for a 
would-be scout to tell an interesting story. The 
serious question is: was his observation accurate 
and his information helpful ? 

If the game is of sufficient importance, the 
coach should himself see the opponent play at least 
once, even though he have entire confidence in his 
scout. There is nothing like seeing with one's 
own eyes and in actual competition the team that 
one must defeat if possible. The experience gives 
added confidence to the coach and to his own team, 
which argues that he saw the adversaries in a game, 
and therefore the information he is giving is reliable. 

Whether the players, also, or any of them, should 
be given opportunity to see their principal oppo- 
nents in action, is a question which cannot be 
answered by yes or no. As a general proposition, 
it is better answered in the negative, inasmuch as a 
positive affiirmative must so often be withheld. 

The advantages, whether for effect on your own 
team, or on opponents when they learn that their 
rivals have seen them play, are wholly psychological. 
So are the disadvantages. Circumstances alter 
cases. 

There are many men who, though fairly competent 
in their own particular assignments, are yet imable 
to confine themselves to these phases while watching 



206 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



the play of an exciting game. They at once become 
merely spectators, and the progress of the ball com- 
mands their entire interest. They emerge from the 
spectacle with a confused and unreasonable sense 
of their future adversary's strength or weakness, 
which depends entirely upon whether said adversary 
has won or lost. Palpably, such men should be kept 
at home, at their own knitting, until the day of the 
great game arrives. 

But if you have two or three good men, who com- 
mand the confidence of your team, and who can be 
spared from the home game, by all means take them 
along to see the big adversary play. One of the 
number should be your best quarterback, who 
should sit with you and to whom, from time to 
time, you can point out a significant thing. 

If, as is done by some colleges, the chief rival is 
watched in every game it plays, and also, whenever 
possible, while at practice, both scout and coach 
should make out lists of things to be watched. As 
the season advances, additions can be made to this 
list. Ordinarily, however, the rival team is observed 
in three games, at most, and often in only one. If 
a team is observed only once, the scout will have all 
he can do to portray the general outlines of what he 
sees. There are, even then, many details on which 
he can be prepared to report. And if he can show 
the formations that rivals use, and their general 
style of play, his coach will know at least what to 
expect on regular attack. 

It is unnecessary for the scout to attempt to watch 



ESSENTIALS IN SCOUTING 207 



and diagram every play. Instead let him diagram 
plays of particular strength, or unique character- 
istics. There are a few general questions which a 
coach would naturally ask a scout returning from 
a "foreign" field with his budget of information, 
but in getting down to details the discussion natur- 
ally begins with the work of the center of the rival 
team. The center is the logical starting point of 
everything. It is the beginning of the game, and 
may be the finish of the game if the snapper-back 
is not a thoroughly competent man. A false move 
by the center knocks the foundations from under 
the whole attack. 



CHAPTER XXVII 



PUNTING— THE SURPRISE KICK 

For punting, the quick kick is the quintessence 
of effective kicking. It is far and away the favorite 
of coaches who value the element of complete sur- 
prise. This punt from a regular formation never 
fails to amaze a-nd confuse the defending team, even 
before the result of it can possibly be known. It 
may be a well placed kick that finds the defensive 
fullback too close to the line and sails over his head. 
It may be a kick that finds the same player advan- 
tageously placed to recover it, with no special dis- 
advantage to him or to his team. Yet the seed of 
uncertainty has been planted in often fruitful soil: 
the sensation of being up against a dangerous oppo- 
nent. This kick, no matter how often tried, never 
fails of its disintegrating effect upon opponents. I 
am not sure that it is not as good a kick as any, 
even on fourth down, when properly employed by 
a cool and clever team. 

The team that is known as a dangerous forward 
passing aggregation, especially with long passes, 
usually can count on a tendency by the defensive 
fullback to creep up on the rushline. A deep 
defensive, played by a speedy runner, would be 

208 



J 

THE SURPRISE KICK 209 



much better, as a charge in the wrong direction 
from a position too close to the line is often fatal. 
The defender cannot tell positively until the ball is 
in the air what its direction is to be. Nevertheless, 
the defensive fullback often seems to be drawn for- 
ward as the moth by the flame, until suddenly the 
ball is booted over his head on a regular formation 
play, filling with consternation the defending team 
as they see their hapless fullback pursuing the 
bounding leather, his chances of returning it reduced 
to nil and the chances of a fimible increasing with 
every stride. 

There is no kick like the quick kick for ruining 
the nervous system of the defensive fullback and 
his mates. Often it spoils them for the remainder 
of the ga^e. This surprise kick makes the defense 
grow old fast. It makes opponents give you credit 
for more stuff than you ever had. Combined with 
a little extra bit of luck, it often gives the team 
employing it a tremendous and decisive advantage. 

The kick is easy to accomplish. It makes little 
difference which of the backs kicks the ball, so far 
as the formation is concerned, provided the kicker 
is in a natural position to receive a direct pass from 
center. 

He should be placed in the formation at least three 
yards from the line of scrimmage, so that he will not 
be compelled to take too many backward steps in 
order to be six or seven yards from the line when he 
receives the pass. 

In the parallel back formation, the backs being 



210 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



about four and a half yards from the line of scrim- 
mage, the ball may be passed naturally to any of 
them. Immediately before the snap of the ball, the 
intending kicker takes two full steps backward, 
timing himself so that he will receive the pass as 
he completes this retrograde movement. He then 
has opportunity to take two steps forward in order 
to get up speed and kick naturally. 

If the kicker is the fullback, his right halfback 
charges immediately for the defensive left tackle, 
assuming that the latter will be the most likely 
blocker of the punt. The left half charges for the 
right tackle, under a similar assumption with regard 
to him. 

If the right halfback is kicking, the fullback, tak- 
ing care not to interfere with the pass, charges the 
left tackle; the left halfback doing as before. If 
the left halfback is kicking, the fullback, first guard- 
ing against blocking the pass, assumes the left half- 
back's former duty, and charges the defensive right 
tackle; while the right halfback charges the defen- 
sive left tackle. 

The kick should be made from a point four and 
one-half to five yards from the line of scrimmage. 
This renders very remote the possibility of a block 
by either of the defensive ends. Furthermore, the 
charge of the non-punting backs gives the play the 
appearance of a running attack or a trick play. 
And as both these backs charge well inside the 
defensive ends, the latter are immediately put upon 
their guard against the possibility of a play going 



THE SURPRISE KICK 211 



just inside or possibly just outside of them. This 
further adds to the improbabihty that they will 
take any prominent part in blocking the kick. 

This kick, to be blocked by the end, would neces- 
sitate too sharp an immediate charge by the latter 
into the backfield; and would expose him hopelessly 
to a run around his end. Even if he diagnosed the 
play in time and correctly, he would not dare to 
charge at an angle so narrow with respect to the 
line of scrimmage, and tempt the punter not to 
kick the ball, but to run around him. 

As there is every indication to the defensive 
guards that a play is coming through one tackle or 
the other, the regular tight-line charge by the five 
men from tackle to tackle, substantially hitting the 
defensive center trio and then going down the field, is 
sufficient line protection on this kick. The defen- 
sive center, if on the line of scrimmage, is the only 
dangerous man, provided the halfbacks perform the 
simple duty of blocking the tackles or driving them 
outside. In case the well known tandem backfield 
formation is used, it would be advisable to make the 
pass to the last man in the tandem; the first man 
blocking the tackle on his side, the second man 
blocking the tackle on the other side. 

The quarterback on this kick has a very important 
task. I have always used the play with the quarter- 
back originally under center. I see no reason why 
it should fail in any way if he should happen to be 
one of a four-man backfield. This being a surprise 
formation, the quarter calls the substantial part of 



212 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



the signal ntimbers while standing in his position. 
As he begins the call of the sequence numbers con- 
taining the starting signal, he rushes toward the 
wide side of the field to a point approximately on 
the scrimmage line, without taking any chances, 
however, of being offside. He comes to a dead stop 
immediately before his call of the starting number 
itself, and charges down the field under the kick 
with the call of the starting nimiber. 

This gives the kicking team the advantage of an 
extra man to go immediately down the field. The 
danger of disaster to the team using the quick kick 
is very slight. The kicker, to be sure, should not 
kick a low ball; The defensive line, discovering 
late that there is nothing more serious on than a 
kick, and having been allowed to ooze through 
between the forwards who go down the field, will 
make a tardy attempt to block, but it should not be 
dangerous. If, on account of serious inferiority in 
the kicking team's line, it is considered specially 
dangerous to allow the line from left guard to right 
tackle to go down at once under the kick, there is 
at least the consolation that the left end and tackle, 
right end and quarterback have started immediately. 
Even in this case, the surprise feature of the kick, 
and the fact that, except on fourth down, there is 
seldom more than one receiver in the far backfield, 
are decisive points of superiority over the punt from 
regular formation. 

I have said that even on fourth down this kick 
has its good features. I believe this to be true; but 



THE SURPRISE KICK 213 



frankly, I have never so used it. A certain amount 
of excusable misapprehension would be experienced 
by the kicking team, due to the almost positive 
foreknowledge of the defense as to the nature of the 
play. This misapprehension is actually no greater 
than the defending team would experience seeing 
the attack lined up in any other than a decisive 
kick formation; yet the mental attitude of one's own 
team, facing a foiu*th down in the vicinity of its 
goal line, appears to be a sufficiently important 
factor to compel the use of the steady, settled kick 
formation under such conditions, with all defensive 
and offensive preparations carefully made before 
the ball is snapped. In other parts of the field, even 
on fourth downs, the surprise kick, with its alluring 
opportunities for trick plays, has its strong points. 
On other than fourth downs, with a good kicker, it 
is easily superior. 



CHAPTER XXVIII 



PUNTING— THE REGULAR FORMATION 

For those who will have none of the quick kick 
there are several punt formations which might be 
called standard. The one best known calls for a 
kicker back in position, two backs forward in tan- 
dem on the right and one on the left. That is, the 
quarter does not remain under center. Of course, 
there are many excellent plays possible from this 
formation; especially if the man in the punter's 
position possesses the threats of accurate forward 
passing or known speed in running the ends. But 
here we limit ourselves to the kick itself, and the 
assignments of the whole team when a kick is in 
order. 

It will be noted again that I have taken the quar- 
terback away from center, and put him in one of 
the three positions mentioned to aid in the protection 
of the kicker. Take first the assignments of these 
three backfield men. The reason so many kicks 
are blocked by men who should be stopped by the 
protecting backs is very simple. The backs move 
from their positions prematurely. The single man 
on the left is assigned to block the right tackle. He 

214 



THE REGULAR FORMATION 215 



is placed about two yards directly behind his own 
left tackle. The front man in the tandera on the 
right is placed in the same relative position behind 
his right tackle. The second man in the tandem 
is about a yard behind him, and his specific task is 
to block the left end. A better way to put it is as 
follows : the defensive guards in regular position and 
the center between them, or their equivalent, are 
included objectively in the close charge of the five 
offensive forwards from tackle to tackle. The first 
loose defensive man outside the charge of these 
five-line men must be blocked, if the kicker is to be 
given a fair opportunity. Therefore the first loose 
man outside the offensive left tackle must be taken 
by the single backfield man on the left of the kicker; 
and the first loose man on the outside of the offensive 
right tackle must be stopped by the first man in the 
tandem on the right of the kicker. The second 
loose man outside the right tackle must be managed 
by the second man in the tandem. 

These three men, who must be prevented from 
getting at the kicker, are generally the tackles and 
the defensive left end; but this may not be so. For 
instance, the defensive right tackle may move out 
and the defensive quarter, having decided to take 
a chance, may come up to fill his space. Now, if 
the protecting back on the kicking team insists 
upon blocking the tackle, and him alone, the defen- 
sive quarter will go through with a fair chance to 
cover the kicker's leg. Or, the defensive quarter 
may go up outside of tackle on the other side, and 



I 

216 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



if the second man in the tandem still undertakes to 
block the end, this new man, who is nearer the 
kicker, will go through without obstacle. 

It is also possible that a team may split its line 
against very probable kicks. One big eleven for 
several years blocked a considerable number of 
seemingly inevitable or dangerous kicks by bunching 
guard tackle and end as close together as they con- 
veniently could run outside of the offensive tackle, 
and leaving the center and defensive quarter alone 
in the middle of the line to defend as best they could 
against an improbable thrust in that direction. 
Plainly these two men, against a well directed center 
attack, would be ineffective. Their danger materi- 
alized in 1911, and nearly cost this team one of its 
* big games, when opponents on a place-kick forma- 
tion, let the ball be snapped to the pretended place- 
kicker direct, instead of to the kneeling quarter, 
who was supposed to place and hold it. The runner 
dashed through center without serious opposition 
except by the fullback. No team should go on the 
field without such a play. 

The way to manage kick formations is to call: 
*Tlace kick formation,'* * 'drop-kick formation," 
"punt formation." Announce them thus. Give 
your team plenty of time to form, taking plenty of 
time yourself to size up the positions assumed by 
the defense. Then give your signal. Having a 
play corrective of any tendency opponents may 
show to split their line, your team will find itself 
at no disadvantage if that formation does appear. 



THE REGULAR FORMATION 217 



The punter on any of the standard kick formations 
should retire at least ten yards from the ball, and 
he should be preferably ten yards back from the 
spot of the snap when he makes his kick, or twelve 
yards originally. The extra two yards is an impor- 
tant item in giving the line its opportunity to get 
down the field. And, of course, it is also so much 
additional protection against blocking. 

The offensive ends must make certain that they 
are in a position to get away immediately without 
the slightest interference. If possible, they should 
maintain their regular position in offensive attack, 
which, as elsewhere stated, gives them considerable 
latitude; they being instructed to shift in and out 
continually, in order that they may be able to assume 
the especially desirable position when the attack 
depends particularly upon their ability to block the 
tackle. Here the chances are that the tackle will 
be glad to let the end alone, thereby increasing his 
own opportunity to block the kick. If the end is 
forced to go outside of the tackle, he should wait 
until the last possible moment before so doing. 

The end's necessity of secining freedom of choice 
and action is one of the strongest reasons for con- 
tinuing to use a starting signal in case of a punt. 
Then the end can know to a fraction of a second when 
the snap of the ball is to occur; and, if the tackle is 
especially persistent, he can jtmip away from him 
in a safe position and be barely set in time for his 
start down the field. Usually the defensive tackle 
is glad to let him alone, and to be let alone, in order 



218 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



to give his entire attention to the more inaportant 
mission of blocking the kick. 

The rest of the line from tackle to tackle is in 
close formation, and if there is any slight distance 
between individuals, in order not to create too great 
a certainty of a kick, or in order to include the defen- 
sive trio or duo (in case one of the three drops back) , 
they must make a converging charge. No one must 
be allowed to break through. The kicker, if his 
hands are in position to receive the pass, should 
specially guard against closing his fists and opening 
them on the snap number. Plainly this is too much 
help to give the enemy. Now we are ready for the 
snap number. It is called. The ball is on its way 
to the fullback. 

The entire line of seven men is on its way, the 
rushline from tackle to tackle charging with^ a ten- 
dency toward convergence, and striking hard, with 
head and shoulders, the central opposition; then 
sliding off these opponents, the center rush continu- 
ing straight down the field until he receives the 
necessary intelligence; guards and tackles, now 
separated enough to have free movement, also wait- 
ing for further enlightenment ; ends charging straight 
for the defensive halfbacks, under no circumstances 
slowing down their utmost speed. For it is the end 
who hesitates that is broken down by an opponent. 
Every man on the rushline has three instinctive 
thoughts in mind. One, to dodge the interferers, 
without slowing down. Two, to listen for warnings 
from the kicker as to the direction of the kick. 



THE REGULAR FORMATION 219 



Three, to watch the action of the opponents down the 
field, in order to pass judgment (and act accordingly) 
without wasting time in looking up for the ball, 
as to the probable distance and direction of the 
kick. Having determined the probable landing 
place of the punt, the center changes his course and 
heads for the catcher. The entire line also con- 
siders the catcher as the basis for general direction; 
but spreads slightly, like a fan, with the idea of 
enmeshing him with seven men instead of two or 
three. 

The ends now charge in a direction slightly out- 
side the receiver. They continue to advance out- 
side of him imtil judgment tells them that they can 
reach him direct. The forwards will not all arrive 
together, nor will they arrive in the shape of a per- 
fect fan; but as they approach the catcher they 
converge upon him, guards, tackles and center 
making him their direct target, while the ends con- 
tinue to keep on the outside as long as doubt exists 
as to their ability to reach him. But each man 
should be filled with the firm intention to take a 
hard drive at the receiver, whether he misses him or 
not. In going down under kicks it is not the man 
who misses his tackle who should receive censure, 
but the man who stays on his feet, watching the 
gyrations of his would-be prey until the latter 
finally sifts past him and breaks into the open. 
In case either tackle discovers that his end has been 
taken down, he must change direction and play his 
man a little wider than before. In fact, the idea of 



220 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



fan-like convergence must be kept in mind. This 
is the only way to pull down without chance of 
escape a shifty, fast-dodging receiver. Do not let 
him keep his poise. So long as he does, he is dan- 
gerous. Drive him percipitately from the hand 
tackle of the first and perhaps the second man into - 
the arms of the third. So long as he can dance he 
is never down. 

We must now return to the busy backfield. The 
three protecting backs, with open eyes and quiet 
intelligence, are poised; calmly braced, knowing the 
positive line of attack that their individual adver- 
saries must take, if any one of them is to be in time 
to block the kick. ^ Each knows that if his individual 
prey assumes a false direction it is nothing more than 
a stall, to draw him off balance, in order that the 
would-be blocker may dodge immediately back into 
into his proper line of approach with the minimum 
waste of time. 

Instead, the protector waits until the last possible 
instant, and then coolly picking his direction, and 
with all his energy, crashes hard and fast with head 
and shoulders and body following into his advanc- 
ing opponent. If this is done as here stated, the 
punt goes on its way. If any one of the three misses 
his man, it is needless and often worse than useless 
to chase him, at least with any idea of restoring 
the opportunity. In case of a bad pass, lost or 
fumbled by the kicker, he announces to his mates 
in the backfield his predicament by the immediate 
cry of "Ball." 



THE REGULAR FORMATION 221 



In this case, whether the protectors of the kicker 
have blocked their men or not, it is their plain duty 
to rush to his aid; always ready by blocking to 
prevent an opponent getting the ball, unless positive 
of a better solution, to wit, ability to recover the 
pigskin by outspeeding the others. Returning now 
to the point where the charging enemy has been 
blocked or missed, there having been no indication 
but that the ball has been properly received and 
kicked, the protectors have two immediate thoughts 
in mind. One, to get down the field at once. Two, 
to see with their own eyes the distance and direc- 
tion of the kick. The same thoughts should now 
be in the mind of the kicker. He has called in his 
clearest, loudest tones the direction of the kick: 
"Center!" "Left!" "Right!" 

All the backs, kicker included, should materially 
help, if it is physically possible, in the event of a 
successful nm-back of the kick. 

In the case of a particularly poor kick, to the left 
or right, these four men become the last reserve. 
If they do not operate immediately and effectively, 
the milk is spilled. Referring for a moment to the 
protector who has failed to block his man, it is a 
question whether he should follow out the instruc- 
tions just given, applying to the man who has 
blocked his opponent, or whether he should rally 
to the kicker, not with the hopeless idea of over- 
taking the blocker, and blocking the kick himself, 
if particularly unlucky or climisy, but with the idea 
in mind to engage in the race for the ball if the kick 



222 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



is blocked. The decision in this matter must defend 
upon the known conditions, namely, the speed of 
the eluding blocker, the direction taken by him, 
and the further probability of his being able to 
block the kick, having in mind the skill and speed 
of the kicker. The back's good judgment must be 
exercised according to circimistances. 



CHAPTER XXIX 



PUNTING— BLOCKING KICKS— THE 

SPIRAL 

More kicks are blocked through the vanity or 
over-eagerness of forwards who are anxious to get 
down the field and shine in the open than through 
poor pa-ssing or slow handling. The left tackle of 
the punting teana no longer leads the linemen down 
the field. Instead, the whole line from tackle to 
tackle is supposed to make its charges as a solid wall, 
taking out everything that is in a bumpable position. 
After bumping and delaying the defensive center 
trio, the linemen slide off from these contacts and 
go on down the field. The better lines have been 
specializing intensively on going down tmder kicks. 
There is enough pride, conceit or ambition in most 
forwards to induce them to go down as fast as they 
can, to do something brilliant in the open field. 

The ambitious forward, however, will thus some- 
times take too many chances, and give a crafty 
defending lineman a chance to sift through fast and 
block a kick. In the long run, right guards have 
blocked many kicks because left tackles, with bril- 
liant down-the-field reputations to sustain, have 

223 



224 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



made haste to depart, leaving the guard to his own 
devices. But the whole blocking system goes to 
smash if the tackle jumps away and leaves the guard 
loose. 

One of the more effective methods of blocking 
kicks is to inject an extra man into the line. Some 
teams accomplish the same purpose, that of gain- 
ing additional strength which cannot be covered, 
by splitting the defensive line; trusting, that the 
kicking team will be so foolish as to insist upon 
punting, instead of running the ball through the 
thin center of the line. 

Probably the worst thing that can happen to 
spoil a kick is to have the right tackle, purposely 
avoiding the left guard, start on his way down the 
field in all his eagerness or selfishness. The guard 
has naturally taken a position almost directly in 
front of the right tackle. In fact, it is well worth 
while and particularly clever on the part of the left 
guard who intends sometime during the game to 
block a kick, to make no pretense of attempting to 
block two or three, but to spend all his time inter- 
fering with the tackle's getaway. Whereupon the 
tackle, being hard put to it to figure in the down- 
the-field work, and noting that the guard is making 
no effort to block the kick, soon decides in his sim- 
plicity that his first main effort must be to evade 
this guard. 

He is now properly baited, and the guard awaits 
his next opportunity. With a great demonstration 
before the snapping of the ball, he intimates to his 



PUNTING— BLOCKING KICKS 225 



tackle adversary that this particular time he is 
going to stop him completely in his tracks. The ball 
sails back to the kicker. The right tackle makes 
a terrific jtimp, in the only open direction left to 
him, outside the defensive guard. Not at all 
strangely, he finds himself free to go ; for the guard 
suddenly ceases his blocking activities, and charges 
point-blank through the space the tackle has just 
left. Having probably the shortest route to the 
kicker's foot of any man along the entire defensive 
line, he continues with all his speed for the fullback's 
kicking leg and jtrnips high and squarely into the 
air, with arms raised high and hands wide open. 
The kick is blocked, and the game perhaps lost, 
through the error of the kicker's right tackle. 
We read frequently of the guard who bursts through 
the opposing line and blocks a kick. Here is the 
inside story of that occurrence. In conclusion it 
should be stated that if the tackles never get down 
the field in time to take part in bringing down the 
receiver of the kick, they must at least pound and 
restrain the guards. 

It may be questioned, why cannot one of the 
backs stop the guard. The answer is that he could 
if he knew the guard was to be left imcovered. He 
has his plain duty marked out for him. If the back- 
field man assigned to stop the tackle, seeing the new 
danger, should shift and block the guard, the tackle's 
menace would become almost as great. 

There is no excuse for the blocking of a kick 
where the pass is good, the individuals of the team 



226 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



properly complete their assignments and the kicker 
is reasonably fast in getting the ball away. The 
spiral pass has lessened the likelihood that a kick 
can be blocked, and if, in addition, the punter 
stands a dozen yards from the scrimmage line, a 
perfect pass, perfectly handled and booted, could 
hardly be blocked by an unopposed sprinter in 
track shoes and costume. Yet kicks are blocked 
occasionally, and occasionally will be. The effort 
is worth making; although there is no reason why a 
defensive line should not know not only the theory 
of blocking kicks, but also the technique of blocking 
lines that are going down under kicks. A decisive 
run-back of a kick may turn the tide in a game, and 
is a very disturbing incident for the team on the 
wrong end. 

If the particularly fast, dangerous man can be 
prevented from going down the field, it may be 
worth while for his opposite to disdain the blocking 
of the kick. If the line is particularly tight, the 
three center men of the defense can materially in- 
terfere with the charge of this line down the field, 
provided they elect to so do instead of attempting 
to block the kick. 

There are several theories of punting, including, 
of course, the pass for the punt. All that a punter 
can be expected to do, if not rushed, is to punt the 
ball in the general direction he intended. Punting 
in a game and punting in practice are two entirely 
different things. Against a good team the punter 
will have to hurry. In order to get accurate direc- 



PUNTING— BLOCKING KICKS 227 



tion the ball must be dropped accurately, and the 
foot must be swung against the ball accurately. 
There will be a slight variation in both the dropping 
of the ball, and the meeting of the ball with the foot, 
on almost every kick. Either will be sufficient to 
thwart the punter in any intended specific deflection. 
I will not say that no punter has ever placed a kick 
while under pressure; for in a general sense of 
direction I have seen it done with a fair degree of 
frequency. But when we hear of a punter making 
successfully a forty-yard or a fifty-yard kick, with 
the calculated intention of having it cross the side- 
line at the five-yard mark, the statement never fails 
to excite considerable scepticism among those who 
have observed the vagaries of the prolate spheroid 
when booted. 

A coach shows his backs his style, and there are 
many styles. The theory of distance, whether you 
kick a spiral or not, is in the drive and follow through, 
just as in golf. If the kicker who comes to you 
ready made is getting satisfactory results in his 
own style, it is seldom advisable to alter it. If his 
work is already good he is bound to improve it, 
and any coach is satisfied with a good, fast kicker. 
Oftentimes an extremely long kick has operated 
against the kicker. It is extremely difficult to regu- 
late the length of the punt when the kicker is under 
fire; and beside the undesirable possibility of a 
touchback resulting from a long kick, we have the 
even more dangerous condition which exists when 
the kicks are too long to be covered. 



228 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



The moral is that kicks of moderate length, 
covered every time, are eminently satisfactory. 

Briefly, there are three generally accepted styles 
of punting. Least often seen is the kick which 
begins with the kicker holding the ball very low, 
about two feet from the ground; the player being 
actually in a crouched position. The only apparent 
advantages of this style are increased accuracy in 
dropping the ball, and the meeting of the ball with 
the foot more precisely as intended. It has been 
very ably followed by several fairly prominent 
kickers, and with good results. But unless the 
man came to me with this style well developed, I 
should not be in favor of it. It generally yields a 
low kick, with a consequent increased danger that 
it may be blocked. The distance of flight is seldom 
as great as other styles produce. But it does have 
the advantage that, if not caught on the fly, the ball 
has a long roll and carry, and is difficult to 
handle, as all rolling, bounding balls ever are. 

The other extreme, used by many of the best 
kickers of recent years, is the kick produced by 
holding the ball very high and dropping it to meet a 
long swinging drive, which is carried through to 
th^ p'.nvy of the high kicker of the older days, who 
used to practice on a tambourine. This style 
yields a very high kick, of tremendous power, and 
when carried through accurately the ball is given a 
slightly spiral effect. But the spiral effect soon 
wears off, and the ball drops dead and straight, and 
so becomes very difficult to handle. 



PUNTING— BLOCKING KICKS 229 



In both of these styles the swing of the leg is very 
nearly straight, which is sufficient of itself to lessen 
any tendency toward a pronounced spiral. 

The third style, and to me the preferable one, 
begins by holding the ball at a height even with the 
chest, slightly to the side of the body; the end 
pointing in the direction intended for the kick, and 
slightly lowered in order to fit the ball to the instep 
more perfectly when dropped. The ball really lies 
on the right hand, string up, steadied with the fingers 
of the left hand; held at full reach well outside the 
kicker's leg; released by dropping the hand after the 
last step is completed, and met slightly on the outside 
of the instep. The toes are extended downward, the 
knee locked and the leg rigid. Impetus is given by 
the circular swing which is necessitated by the drop- 
ping of the ball in the position as indicated. The 
carry-through will bring the foot level with the left 
shoulder, the toe pointing decidedly to the left. The 
swing is such that were the ball missed the kicker 
would describe almost a complete revolution, with 
his left foot as an axis. The ball should be dropped 
as far forward as it is possible to drop it and still 
fulfil the conditions outlined, because the greater 
the extension of the leg, the greater the speed of the 
movement and the distance acquired. This kick 
is not difficult to learn, and gives a beautiful cut, 
productive of a spiral that will bore its way through 
a hurricane. 

In addition to being the best kick against the 
wind, this particular punt gives superior results with 



230 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



a wet ball or on a slippery field, the kicker in the 
latter case having less liability or sensation of 
losing his footing and toppling over backward. 

The kicker, as well as the forward passer, must 
always be ready for qiiick reverses. A badly mis- 
directed kick to the side, like a forward pass of the 
same kind, demands decisive action, as the kicker 
or passer is usually the last man in the backfield 
when the mishap occurs. 

Very weighty argtiments for the use of the rhyth- 
matic starting signal are found in the fact that the 
ends are able to get away more quickly under 
pimts when that signal is used. They know that 
the ball is going to be kicked. They have formed 
their complete plan of getting down the field, and 
now they can await the starting signal with the 
assurance that they are to receive a liberal, although 
absolutely legal, start. This should be cause for 
increased confidence on their part, and confidence, 
surely, is one of the greatest assets to an end going 
down xmder kicks. 

This same benefit accrues to the entire rushline, 
with the additional slight though very important 
advantage that the kicker has a small additional 
fraction of a second in which to get the ball away. 
When one considers that a ball kicked one and 
four-fifths seconds after the center moves his hands 
to pass in the ordinary kick formation is considered 
perfectly safe, provided it rises at a reasonable 
angle of departure, whereas a punt delayed for two 
and one-fifth seconds should be blocked, it will be 



PUNTING— BLOCKING KICKS 231 



seen how precious are the fractions of a second. 

If any man other than the captain and the quarter- 
back is entitled to speak his mind on the football 
field and assert his own individuality, that man is 
the punter. Entirely on a co-operative basis, he 
should work things out with his field general. 
Thus: "Tom, keep the wind in mind. I'm here to 
kick whenever you say, but I don't want to kick 
out of bounds ten yards from the scrimmage line. 
I want to have freedom to kick in my natural 
position." Or: *'This is the day for high punts if I 
want to get dista^nce. I find the wind is a good deal 
stronger up above. So give me plenty of room. 
You know me, Al.'* 

A team loves to feel that it has a quarterback 
who can run the game. The players are also espe- 
cially pleased with the knowledge that the captain 
is listening to every signal, though he almost never 
enters into the selection of plays, and that if he 
does intervene, he will come mighty near to being 
right. Also the thought is very pleasant and 
reassuring that the punter's kicks are being manipu- 
lated not only in accordance with the best judgment 
of the pimter, but in complete accord with the 
intent of both quarterback and captain. **Now," 
say the other men on the team, *Ve are able and 
ready to do the rest." 



CHAPTER XXX 



PUNTING— THE RUN^BACK 

The run-back of a kick depends almost entirely 
on the individual skill of the receiver, against a strong 
offensive team. There was a time, not many years 
ago, when all the receiver had to think about, 
immediately on catching the ball, was one end, or 
perhaps two. On the better teams the left tackle 
might also be a factor. These being the immediate 
arrivals, great efforts were made to erase them from 
the landscape. But, nowadays, with the strong 
tendency and great improvement of teams in getting 
a large part of the rushline down under kicks imme- 
diately, the job of protection by the receiving team 
has assumed practically impossible proportions; 
with the unfortunate result that ends are now able 
to go down the field with much less serious oppo- 
sition than formerly. It is not uncommon, in fact, 
and incidentally it is a delight, to see some big 
guard or center performing the unwelcomed atten- 
tion of slapping the receiver to the ground. Certain 
it is that the player who hopes to run back a kick 
must be ready to evade four or five tacklers, unless 
he is fortunate enough to catch the ball on the dead 
run off to the side where his opponents cannot cover 
him properly. 

232 



PUNTING— THE RUN-BACK 233 



With the forward passing game developed as it 
is, it is not feasible to give the receiver more than 
one helper. The helper should be the best punt 
catcher of the three secondary defense backs. Con- 
trary to the general impression, there are very few 
punters who can place the punt with any degree of 
accuracy. I now refer to the pimter in his big 
games, and all games should be played on the same 
system as the big games. The punter of the team 
which is up against its equal usually has pretty 
nearly all he can manage to get his punt away. A 
right-legged kicker who has instructions to kick 
to the wide side of the field when that side is on his 
right, is very fortunate in the assistance given him 
by his protective backs if he has time enough to 
turn and kick directly in line with the tackle and 
end who are charging in to block. The same thing is 
substantially true if the same kicker attempts to 
kick to the left of the field. Ordinarily, the defen- 
sive right end has little opportunity to block the 
kick, but that opportunity is increased if the kicker 
makes a pronounced turn; to say nothing of the 
right tackle. In other words, the kicker is gener- 
ally forced by a good defensive team to use the less 
dangerous space directly in front of him to get his 
kicks away, rather than to swing to left or right. 

If, as sometimes happens, however, a team finds 
itself up against a kicker who can place his punts 
with a fair degree of acciuracy, the defensive full- 
back should play the wide side of the field. The 
second man who is sent back should take the 



234 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



center of the field, slightly to the narrow side. But 
if the punter, either because of strong defensive 
charging, or his inability, does not place his punts, 
then the defensive fullback should defend the 
general center zone, with the second man protecting 
on the wide side of the field. 

I have often heard and read of one back or the 
other playing the short side of the field, but have 
never been able to arrive at a safe conclusion as to 
what is meant by it. I recall a big game, a few 
years ago, in which one of the contesting teams 
played the short side of the field on the kicker's 
right. The kicker almost invariably throughout 
the game kicked well over the short-field player, 
at the expense to the latter's team of perhaps one 
himdred yards, with the additional penalty that the 
chances of runbacks were practically eliminated. 
No pimter, with the rules as they are, intends to 
kick short, except the otiside kick or where a long 
kick would result in a touchback. The proper posi- 
tion for the fullback and his helper to assume are 
those which best cover the kicking field. 

If the man who goes back to assist is one of the 
defensive halfbacks, the defensive quarter of course 
takes his place. If there is still danger, on account 
of the position of the kicking team, of a forward 
pass, one of the center trio falls back into the defen- 
sive quarterback's position. A second member of 
the center trio assumes a position where he can keep 
watch over the offensive quarterback, if the latter 
maintains his position under center. If a punt is 



PUNTING— THE RUN-BACK 235 



a practical certainty, either because of the down or 
the position of the offensive team, the center remains 
in the Hne. 

The defensive fullback's regular position is twenty- 
five yards from scrimmage line, until he discovers 
that opponents have a kick from running forma- 
tion which he cannot handle at that distance. In 
this case he increases his distance to thirty yards, 
which is also his distance on kick formations against 
average kickers and under normal conditions of 
wind and stm. His helper should play approxi- 
mately the same distance from the line. If alone 
in the backfield, the fullback should incline toward 
the center of the field. If the ball is being scrim- 
maged fifteen yards from the side line, after going 
out of boimds, the fullback should play twenty-five 
to thirty yards from the side lines. As the distance 
to his own goal line diminishes, the defensive full- 
back's position must be governed by the same con- 
siderations as before. He must be able to defend 
against forward passes or long runs on either side, 
but his liability against long punts decreases as the 
distance shortens. If his team is defending, for 
instance, on the twenty-yard line, he would be 
likely to play no wider than his own end on the 
inside of the field, and would stand, perhaps, on 
the five-yard line. He takes the nearest central 
spot to all the things which may happen which are 
in his line and which he can get. 

As the attack nears the goal line, the defensive 
fullback's duties merge into halfback duties or even 



236 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



into rushline forward duties. Many teams 
strengthen the line by injecting into it their heaviest 
back when driven within the fifteen-yard mark. 
The three remaining backs defend against forward 
passes, and also back up the line. The line should 
not be spread when reinforced. Instead, the 
spaces are tightened. Against a team kicking out 
from behind or near its own goal line it is also quite 
usual to put the heaviest back in the line, to increase 
the chances of blocking the kick. If the extra man 
is fast, he can hurry the kicker, at least, by a change 
from just outside right tackle; his chances being 
considerably better than those of the right end, who is 
much farther out. The single man defending on the 
kicker's left, especially if required to swing out from 
the quarterback's position to block, is easy to avoid. 
On the other side of the line, with two protectors and 
three blockers going in, there is usually too much 
congestion to give the extra fast man full scope. 

One reads many treatises and sees much practice 
undertaken with a view to instructing and develop* 
ing the second backfield receiver in order that he 
may be of the greatest possible help to his mate 
who is catching, or has just caught the ball. Gen- 
erally the instruction is along the line that the 
former should direct the catcher as to the better 
direction to take; with some advice as to the pro- 
tection to be given on the run-back. You will 
probably agree with me that this generally results 
in the leader starting away just in time to have his 
teammate picked up by a sure tackier. 



PUNTING— THE RUN-BACf 237 



The man who is advised as to his direction by 
another is by no means as capable of warding off 
trouble as the one who, having caught the ball, takes 
as much time as the circimistances allow, and then 
chooses his own path. In the former case the 
receiver knows that he has turned himself and his 
judgment over to another. He is divided between 
his attempt to follow his teammate and his desire 
to bolt on his account. I have never yet seen an 
interferer select a path straight up the field, where 
the runner would be behind him. At the time when 
he chooses the course, which almost inevitably is to 
left or right, the opponents are nearly upon him and 
the catcher. Natiurally, then, his start, either to 
left or right, leaves his runner entirely exposed, 
and the latter*s aspirations are nipped in the bud. 
Where, then, is the protector going to run, if he 
runs at all? Naturally and logically, in a forward 
course, to all intents and purposes straight up the 
field. 

What is he to do, if he wishes to give the best 
possible protection to the runner? Unquestion- 
ably he must bring down or block successfully the 
most dangerous man of those in his path. Probably 
he will have very little opportunity to go forward 
any great distance. If he blocks one determined 
tackier, whether by nmning into him and keeping 
his own feet, or by throwing his body across him, it 
matters little. In either case, he will be left so far 
behind as to be of little further help to his partner. 
By all means he should keep his feet if he can. 



238 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



He might be able, by very slight blocking, sensing 
the position of his teammate, and knowing the 
latter's ability to avoid difficulties, to save him in 
the first instance, and even to render him further 
assistance. This settles down to a question of the 
interferer's own skill and judgment. But every 
consideration leads us back to the one main idea, 
which is that the second man in the backfield renders 
his best assistance by getting to the catcher, on either 
side, in time to assist in the receiving of the ball if 
fumbled, and, if the ball is caught, by eliminating 
the first man down the field who could spoil the 
runback if let alone. By all means let him take out 
two or three of them if possible, but it is generally 
the case that he can only feature and function once 
on each kick. 

Many other ideas have been tried, such as instruct- 
ing the other secondary defense men to retire into 
the backfield, as soon as satisfied that the ball has 
been or will be kicked, there to put up their battle 
in defense of the catcher. This is excellent in 
theory, but in practice the ends and other members 
of the kicker's side have reached these retreating 
halfbacks about the time the ball is punted. Usually 
they find the retirement of the defensive backs 
more agreeable to them than immediate opposition 
would be. The ends, at least, welcome a trial of 
speed under these conditions. If the backs keep 
pace with the ends they only help to create a barrier 
against the punt-catcher, who finds it almost as 
difficult to dodge friend as foe. 



PUNTING— THE RUN-BACK 239 



The catcher's best path usually is straight up the 
field. It is better to take a chance with the center 
and guards than with the supposedly more accurate 
tackles and ends. The line is running down to 
cover the field. Clever dodging of one or two men 
where the line is thinnest may mean the equivalent 
of dodging the entire line. 

If the advancing tacklers have already con- 
verged upon the catcher, with the ends coming 
slightly from the outside and the others well bunched, 
the chances at the center are probably hopeless. 
There is only one dodge in this case, and only one 
question, whether to the right or the left; the best of 
a bad lot. But I have seen one man who could side- 
step the tackle, jump back into the spot the tackle 
had just left, thus avoiding the end, and go! We 
may not see another Thorpe in the immediate 
future, but it is certain that experienced punt- 
catchers will endeavor more and more to protect 
themselves by the use of stratagem. 

And in this connection, there is another way to 
raise consternation and havoc with the opposing 
team, and that is for the punt receiver to pretend that 
he awaits the ball where he is standing or dancing 
about, when actually the ball is descending rapidly 
several yards ahead, where he intends to take it 
presently by a sudden sprint. Another possible, 
although seldom effective deception is for the helper 
to dance under an imaginary ball, while the receiver- 
to-be stands in nonchalant indifference, but ready 
to tuck away the real ball, which is fast descending. 



240 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



Or the helper may, in another case, cut across sud- 
denly in front of his partner and take the ball on the 
dead run, at the last possible instant. Any of these 
ruses may cause the down-the-field players to be 
penalized for interference. In the first case there 
is also a very good chance that the rushline may 
overrun the ball if the kick be short or high, despite 
the loud warnings of the fullback. It i^ one of the 
nerviest plays in football. 

Of course, the backfield receivers will soon learn 
the calibre and ability of the opposing rushline in its 
down-the-field work. They will sense the amount of 
instruction opponents have had or been able to 
absorb, and will find out the weakness of their for- 
mation. If the ends are playing it too safe, coming 
down too wide in order to keep on the outside, with 
a view to preventing a runback along either wing, 
this gives the catcher his best chance to do his 
dodging around the tackle and end zone, as the end 
is likely to be late, and the distance between him 
and his tackle too great. 

On the other hand, if the formation comes down 
well, with the field immediately in front properly 
covered, to attempt a wide detour at either end 
generally amounts to a guarantee against running 
back the kick. If his teammate in the far backfield 
can take down a determined looking character imme- 
diately in front, this leaves the catcher a pretty 
fair space through which to attempt his runback. 
If the line is badly spread and ragged, though the 
ends are in a formidable position, the straight 



PUNTING— THE RUN-BACK 241 



course is again the better. And always, when in 
doubt, take the direct course. Every yard covered 
is a yard saved, and one successful dodge may mean 
a long gain. 

The job of the other two backs should be to take 
out the ends. They should be carefully instructed 
and given practice in this very difficult part of the 
game. The ends are probably fast, and probably 
excellent tacklers. They are also on the extremities 
of the rushline going down, and if removed by the 
backs it would open the sides of the field to the ptmt- 
catcher. The most important one word of instruc- 
tion to give these backs, by way of teaching them the 
blocking of ends, is never to allow the ends to get 
directly in front of them. Each should step to one 
side, and keep to one side, of the end, so that the 
latter has only a single direction in which to elude 
blocking. Having allowed him to get close enough 
so that he must now attempt to pass on the side 
which he has been forced to select, the back should 
make his drive for the spot where he knows his speed 
will be sufficient to meet his man, throwing his body 
with all the slam and speed possible across the end's 
upper legs. He need not be too much discouraged 
if he misses him, as he has at least driven him into 
making a wider detour than intended, causing him 
to be late down the field ; beside filling him with an 
extra bit of worry and uncertainty for his next trip. 
If you do not make a man worry he seldom has much 
to worry about. Next time, very likely, the back 
will get the end. 



242 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



Fair-catching of punts may be ordered by a 
coach in a specific game or for a special reason; but 
he seldom issues such instructions without con- 
siderable reluctance. The practice savors so little 
of fighting football that the mental effect of it on 
both teams is apt to be as bad as a mishandled 
kick. In theory, the team going down under kicks 
tends to relax its efforts, and thus provide an oppor- 
tunity when the ball is fair-caught repeatedly. 
Actually, the enthusiasm of such a team increases. 
The players, feeling that they are forcing their 
opponents into an admission of weakness, and also 
that they are preventing any return of the ball, 
seem to charge faster and faster on every succeeding 
punt. It is also argued that the kicker's side can 
eventually be baited into an interference with a 
fair-catch; but although the most expert of players 
will pull an occasional **bone,'' this particular 
offense is usually the last that a well coached team 
will commit. 

The receiver is justified in attempting a fair- 
catch when he intends to try a free kick ; in the case 
of a high and short, or a higher and longer, kick, 
which finds him closely surrounded and enveloped 
by opponents in force; and seldom, if ever, other- 
wise, unless specially commanded. It is better to 
play the ball on the bound than to make a fair- 
catch because of fear, when under ordinary pressure ; 
and in case of a very short kick it is nearly always 
good policy to let the ball bound, unless certain of 
the opponents are on side. 



PUNTING— THE RUN-BACK 243 



When the signal is given for a fair-catch, the 
first arrival down the field should remain close to 
the receiver, to recover a fumble or to block him if 
he fumbles, thus preventing his recovery of the 
ball. Later arrivals should be alert for a possible 
loose ball. Fair-catchers should be warned against 
old-fashioned denting the groimd with the heels so 
that the restraining mark thus made becomes 
indeed a restraint upon them to such an extent that 
they cannot manage themselves or recover balance. 
Teach them to stand naturally and they will not 
need even the two steps allowed by the rule. 



CHAPTER XXXI 



DROP KICK AND PLACEMENT KICK 

The starting signal, though admirable for 
punts, should not be used, except for some espe- 
cially important reason, in the case of drop or place 
kicks. These kicks are, in comparison with punts, 
so seldom called for, and have generally so impor- 
tant a specific bearing on the outcome of the game 
that the kicker's mental attitude is considerably 
different. His apprehensions as to blocking are 
more acute, and it is more essential for his peace of 
mind and assurance that he take plenty of time and 
receive the pass only when he has signified his 
preparedness. 

Furthermore, the abominable custom on many 
teams of the kicker opening his hands as the signal 
for the pass precipitates an immediate charge by 
the defensive team which often gets by the officials, 
though slightly offside, and frequently results in the 
blocking of the attempted kick. It may be argued 
that this signal might be used, contrary to the 
rules, for the purpose of drawing the defensive 
team offside; but the great point in the matter is this, 
if the offensive team really desires to score by the 
drop kick or placement route, it surely does not 

244 



PLACEMENT KICKS 245 



care to take a chance on the opponents' offside, with 
a possible blocking of the attempt as a result, as well 
as the uncertainty as to the umpire^s decision on 
the offside. 

The best scheme to follow in case of a try at a 
field goal is for the kicker, having made full prepa- 
rations to receive the pass, to say to the center 
something along this line: *'A11 right. Jack, any 
time you're ready I am.'* This speech has its 
psychological effect upon the center rush, as well as 
a possible effect upon the defense. At any rate, 
it gives the defensive team no specific advance 
information as to the pass. The center then passes 
the ball when ready; advisedly, of course, as soon 
as possible after the notice given him by the kicker; 
in order that there may be no imdue tension caused 
by delay. In this case there is no great disadvantage 
to the kicker's side resulting from its being com- 
pelled to watch for the snap of the ball; for the 
reason that, except for the ends, the first n^ove by 
the offense is a defensive one: protection for the 
kicker. This does not mean that the line should 
not cha^rge. It does charge, just as on a pimt. 
The old theory of a brace is discarded, as the charge 
is a better brace. But there is not that extreme 
necessity of getting down the field immediately, in 
the great majority of placement or drop kicks; for 
it is seldom that the kick, if not blocked, fails to 
result in a touchback, if not in a goal. Therefore, 
the rush line can afford to block more solidly, and 
a little longer, before going down under the kick. 



246 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



There is now no excuse whatever for the selfish or 
over-zealous tackle, who leaves the opposing guard 
while the latter has still the remotest chance to 
block the try at goal. 

Even the end plays a slightly different part in 
this phase of the kicking game than he would under 
a punt. As a special precaution against a poor 
attempt, especially a wide kick which does not go 
into touch, he must go down the field at once; but 
his position when the ball is snapped is close to his 
tackle; whereas he has some power of selection on 
punt formations. His charge now is directed at the 
side of the defensive tackle's body nearer the ball; 
assuming, of course, that the tackle is not a yard or 
more outside the end, in which case the latter does 
not have to bother with him at all. This charge 
at the side of the tackle's body nearest the center is 
made to force the tackle to avoid the end, by charg- 
ing around him, thus making his path to the kicker 
so much the longer and less direct. 

Under this system of protection, the blocking of 
tries at goal should be next to impossible. Even 
a line of very moderate strength should be able to 
prevent a direct block by one of the opposing center 
trio. Its charge, with the slight exceptions noted, 
is similar to its charge on a punt; but the closer to 
the goal line when the try at goal is attempted, the 
greater should be the spread of the line after its 
initial charge. The ends having charged straight 
with their tackles, and staying with the line a 
moment longer than on a punt, are likely to be a 



PLACEMENT KICKS 247 



trifle late in their down-the-field effort to prevent a 
possible run-back. 

The nearer or the farther from the scrimmage 
line that a drop or place kick can be delivered with 
sufficient height to clear the rushlines, the less 
liability of a block. A passer who could deliver a 
fast spiral to a kicker twenty yards away would 
assure absolutely the safety of any kick directed 
high enough in the air to clear a cross-bar. But 
the longer the pass the greater the danger that it 
may miscarry; the longer, too, the distance required 
of the kicker. At fifteen yards the danger that a 
try at goal may be blocked begins to be felt. At 
eight yards the danger probably is greatest, from 
that surge of blockers from the wings which, and 
which only, if his line be sound and properly coached, 
the kicker has to fear. Nearer than that, the danger 
of kicking into one's own line or opponents' increases 
directly just as the danger of a block from the sides 
decreases. 

And this is why the placement kick is much less 
dangerous than the drop-kick close to the scrim- 
mage line. Few drop-kickers dare attempt their 
specialty seven yards from scriramage; fair place- 
ment kickers can attempt theirs from five. The 
angle of departure can always be controlled in the 
place-kick; the kicker needs no more than a third 
of the accuracy required of a drop-kicker in this 
respect, and in other respects also. The nearer 
to the scrimmage line the more nearly impossible 
the detour that the wingmen must describe in order 



248 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



to arrive in front of the kicker's toe; the more 
effective the protection given by the backs, who 
increase the distance of that detour, and the shorter 
the time in which the defense can operate. 

And the place-kick is much the faster of the two ; 
the ball is already kicked when a drop-kicker 
would still be turning it in his hands to avoid the 
lacing. At seven yards or less from the scrimmage 
line, the defensive tackles, practically speaking, are 
the only opponents who could block the kick. 
The ends are too far away. To block, they must 
take the same paths as the tackles; in other words, 
they must follow the tackles if the latter charge 
through in time^ or collide with them if the latter 
are late. Moreover, an end would hardly dare to 
charge so close to the line of scrimmage as to block 
the kick he must do. If he did, he would be wholly 
at the mercy of a trick play around him. 

It is not too difficult to understand why white 
sheep eat more hay than black ones. But the 
explanation throws no light on their respective 
merits as sheep. Similarly vague is the equally 
imchallenged statement that more scores in football 
are made by drop-kickers than by placement- 
kickers. This is unquestionably true, but it fails 
to compromise my contention that the placement 
kick is surer than the drop kick; that it is quicker, 
easier, and less likely to be blocked. 

There are a dozen drop-kickers for every place- 
kicker. But this, after all, is easy to understand. 
Given a boy and a football, and a few newspaper head- 



PLACEMENT KICKS 249 



lines for romantic inspiration, a tree or the side of a 
bam for a goal, and the development of drop-kickers 
may begin very early in life. 

The place-kick, on the other hand, involves the 
participation of an assistant whose comparatively 
inglorious role may breed boredom, rebellion even. 
The drop-kicker may drop-kick all day. It is not 
so easy for him to find the willing slave who is con- 
tent all day to poise and steady the ball. More- 
over, in games^ the holder of the ball, though his 
part in the performance may be comparatively 
insignificant, shares not a little in the credit of 
achievement. To be sure, the center who passes 
the ball deserves a third share in that credit; but 
centers, from of old, are hardened and accustomed 
to neglect and oblivion. EckersoU of Chicago twice 
kicked five field goals in one game, so history 
records. History makes no special mention of the 
centers who passed to him. Neither was the name 
of the boy who poised the ball considered worthy 
of record in the case of Alfred Griggs, a California 
schoolboy credited with fifteen goals from place- 
ment in a single game. But, even so, drop-kickers 
get a very special thrill out of the originality and 
uniqueness of their single-handed, or rather single- 
footed, achievements; whereas the place-kicker, 
while neglecting as a matter of course the center^s 
claims to recognition, is compelled to admit after 
the game that he who caught, placed and poised the 
ball also did well. 

This individual catches and places the ball 



250 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



upright, with scarcely more than a single motion, 
at the same time revolving it so that the lacing is 
on the side farthest from the kicker. The placer 
should have plenty of practice with the center in 
receiving the pass while in a kneeling position and 
in placing the ball accurately and straight up on 
a smooth spot previously selected and indicated to 
the kicker. The ball is held firmly in place by the 
finger tips of either hand. 

It may be argued that the placement kick seems 
to involve the accuracy of two men instead of one 
only; but the placer need not be a wonder. If he 
be the quarterback, as probably is the case, he is 
already well accustomed to the handling of the ball 
from center; while the actual placing of the ball is 
an exceedingly simple assignment. The kicker, 
knowing precisely where the ball is to be placed, 
locates himself where a line from his advancing toe 
through the center of the ball will bisect the goal, 
if there is no wind. Like the drop-kicker, he must 
calculate the speed of his kick and its height, and 
make proper allowance for the wind. But his ad- 
vantage over the drop-kicker in ability to control 
and regulate the direction and the angle of depart- 
ure is positive. Prompt and decisive elevation on 
placement kicks can be acquired by anybody. 
Many drop-kicks, especially if driven hard in order 
to obtain distance, leave the ground at a low angle, 
and would assuredly strike one rushline or the other 
if kicked from five, or even seven, yards behind 
center. 



V 



PLACEMENT KICKS 251 



The drop-kicker comes to the coach all made, 
almost invariably. His specialty involves the 
utmost accuracy, the result of constant practice, 
but there are almost as many ways to execute the 
kick as there are drop-kickers. Some drop the ball, 
some actually throw it to the ground. Some meet 
the ball with the toe, some with the instep and not 
a few with the shin-bone. Probably there have 
been very few successful college drop-kickers who 
were not proficient as schoolboys. It is part of 
their special distinction that they develop them- 
selves. Early in life they get acquainted with their 
own mannerisms, and practice their kicks a thousand 
times. If you want to prove it, leave a few loose 
footballs around during practice for the students 
and town boys to amuse themselves withal. You 
will discover that you have more drop-kickers in 
your student-body than you have men on the squad, 
and also that the first thing a small boy does, when 
given possession of a football, is to inaugurate his 
career as a drop-kicker — unless he makes up his 
mind, owing to sloth and general disability, that he 
is going to be a guard. 

Drop-kickers attach themselves to football 
squads, and are retained even when the team has 
an excellent place kicker; on the theory, never 
adequately proven or disproven, that for long 
distances the drop kick is the surer. There is also 
the idea that long drop-kicks may be used instead 
of ptmts. 

Most coaches secretly abhor both drop and place 



252 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



kickers, in the belief that to put reliance in them is 
a weakening influence upon the rushing spirit of the 
team; an influence which may eventuall force a 
team to depend upon the method of scoring which 
they provide. Many a high-class drop and place 
kicker has been graduated without attaining great 
reputation in football, although a member of the 
squad every season of his eligible career, because 
he has not had sufficiently nimierous opportunities 
to display his consistent ability, the spirit and incli- 
nation of his teams having been to score touchdowns. 



CHAPTER XXXII 



KICK-OFF AND THE RUN-BACK 

Some of the best kickers build a very high tee for 
their kick-off. They have estabHshed the very 
good habit of swinging with the knee locked; and 
the left foot on the last step before the kick-off is 
placed considerably farther from the ball than if 
the ball were placed on a low tee. This necessitates 
a great extension of the right toe, in order to meet 
the ball. Kicking in this position, with the leg 
in the condition stated, the high tee is necessary, 
or the cleats of the right shoe would catch in the 
turf as the kicking leg passes the other. 

On the other hand, many of the long-distance 
kickers operate with not much more in the way of 
a tee than a few grains of sand. They rely on their 
speed to put the power behind the ball. The left 
foot, before the kick is made, is very close to the 
ball. This kick-off is generally best achieved by 
the speedy, wiry player. It may be noted fre- 
quently that the kicker experiences practically no 
difficulty in maintaining his speed without a break; 
whereas the kicker with the long, pendultmi-like 
leg-drive is usually brougfit to a stop by the act 
of kicking, and, if required to go down the field, is 

253 



254 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



given a bad handicap. The coach is satisfied with 
either type of kicker if he can boot the ball into 
touch. 

On the kick-off, the kicking team should line up 
not according to the general custom, with the 
men covering the entire width of the field. There is 
no justification for starting the end so close to the 
side line that he may be blocked on his way down, or 
rendered useless on a kick into the opposite comer 
of the field. He should start at least ten yards 
from the side line. There is no means of knowing 
precisely where the greatest strength will be needed 
down the field, and therefore it should be distributed 
as equally as possible on both sides of the ball. 
The ball should be kicked to the weakest back, if 
there is a known weakness. But otherwise it 
should be kicked down the center of the field. 
That gives the team its best chance to bring col- 
lective ability to bear in preventing the run-back. 
To avoid kicking to strength, kick to the left- 
hand comer if possible. The two best tacklers 
should be so placed in the line as to give them the 
shortest possible route to reach the probable receiver 
of the kick. As in going down under a punt, the 
chief word of advice here is speed, speed, speed. 
It is far better to be blocked and thrown flat, while 
going fast, than to stand around the field dodging, 
without even the satisfaction of bumping the man 
who knocked you down. Every man going down 
should be specifically instmcted to mn straight to 
the receiver and to take a hard, smashing drive 



KICK-OFF AND RUN-BACK 255 



at him, miss or no miss. The receiver's interference 
is rendered useless to him if he is compelled to dodge 
tacklers instead of taking advantage of that inter- 
ference. 

The ends may be reminded that they are the 
guardians of the wings. A mistake that allows the 
runner to pass inside of them into the range of 
some one's else hard tackle is much less dangerous 
than the mistake which allows the runner to pass 
between the end and the side line. If every man 
is coached, day after day, to follow these instruc- 
tions, calling upon himself at every stride down 
the field to nm, nm, run, there will be no serious 
run-back of any kick-off, in the present inadequate 
development of that play. 

One accurate tackier should be left behind at 
midfield as a reserve against a possible failure to 
carry out these instructions, and also to save his 
team as much ground as possible in the event of a 
return kick; a play neglected in recent years, yet one 
of the most thrilling in football; and one of the best 
plays in the game, provided the opportunity is 
offered to a good, accurate kicker. As a rule, this 
man has plenty of time to make his return kick, 
with only one opponent to cover it. If he has any 
ability whatever in placing a kick, he can at once 
put his team out of danger. In a large majority of 
cases he needs no assistance, and has plenty of 
time to make his kick from his own fifteen-yard line. 
His single opponent is generally standing at the 
center of the field, especially if the retiun is not 



256 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



expected. A reasonable kick in distance and direc- 
tion should roll well down into the enemy's ter- 
ritory, with delightful possibilities in the way of a 
recovered fumble. 

Wonderful opportunities are open theoretically 
to the team receiving the kick-off. But the required 
skill, co-operation and finesse necessary to their 
realization cannot be acquired except by intensive 
practice of a most exhausting kind. This to the 
exclusion of drill in other important requirements. 
During the course of the short football season no 
other department of play is more neglected than 
the initial play of a contest. Successful coups on 
the kick-off keep some coaches awake and bring 
dreams to others. But in actual practice coaches 
soon become lukewarm, realizing that the players 
cannot, or will not, specialize with enthusiasm, or 
even fulfil ordinary kick-off assignments, unless 
strong pressure is brought to bear. The kaleido- 
scopic appearance of the broken field seems to 
exert a species of mesmerism on most players, and 
they fail to act. On the kick-off there is a great 
deal of running about and a general air of excite- 
ment, but it is very seldom that more than one 
man of the team coming down the field is checked so 
hard that he is actually thrown. Players who 
become thoroughly accustomed to ordinary scrim- 
mage conditions, so that they feel entire self- 
possession and accustomedness in the heart of the 
battle, seldom outgrow the sensation of bizarre 
strangeness which the kick-off produces. It is 



KICK-OFF AND RUN-BACK 257 



evocative of all the nervous strain and stage fright 
which can be associated with one's first moment of 
participation in a regular game. The amount of 
lost effort and wasted motion indulged in by the 
players receiving a kick-off can only be matched by 
similarly misdirected effort of the equally rattled 
battalions who come charging down the field. 
Yet this play, the despair of coaches, infinite in its 
possibilities, is bound to be mastered in time by 
some combination of team, temperament and ability 
which will really undertake with seriousness to 
make something out of the kick-off; instead of being 
content, as most teams are, to get a run-back by 
dint of reasonable effort and individual skill which 
shall be at least equivalent to a touchback. 

I am convinced that it would be worth a coach's 
while to have laid out a minature gridiron some- 
where on his athletic field, where kick-off plays 
could be demonstrated and practiced by walking 
through them. Then the loss of time and the 
excessive fatigue involved in drill on the making 
and receiving of kick-offs could be avoided. The 
blackboard, also, is an instrument whereby a great 
deal of valuable instruction can be given to a team 
which has really made up its mind collectively to 
develop the extraordinary possibilities of open 
field play. Nearly everything that can be imagined 
in connection with the kick-off has, of course, been 
attempted, at one time or another. The trouble 
is that these attempts have seldom, if ever, been 
carried out with the necessary faith, enthusiasm 



258 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



determination and careful devotion to detail which 
players and coaches willingly expend on other 
matters. 

The two chief reasons why most planning for the 
run-back of kick-ofis comes to naught are, first, the 
individuars failure to pick out definitely the man 
to be blocked; second, the failure of him who does 
pick a man to stay on one side or the other of this 
individual. Instead, the blocker inveterately places 
himself directly in front of his charging opponent, 
who is thus enabled to force the blocker to two 
guesses as to the direction in which he will dodge. 
It should be a long step toward the working out of 
really brilliant kick-off plays when blockers univer- 
sally accept the idea that the way to function 
surely is to stay on one side of the man to be blocked, 
and force him to go to the other side. The blocker 
must then be alert, ready to spring, and all as con- 
vincing in his final lunge as if he were a tackier and 
his opponent a runner with the ball. As a matter of 
common experience, this degree of sincerity can 
seldom be found at the kick-oft except where the 
blocker has the incentive of knowing that the 
actual runner with the ball is directly behind him, 
and must be protected. 

The players are seldom altogether to blame for 
their Laodicean mental attitude. It is very infre- 
quently the case that there are many specific arrange- 
ments to guide forward blockers. The receiver, 
whether he has a plan or not, is exceedingly likely 
to run where he sees opportunity. Most coaches 



KICK-OFF AND RUN-BACK 259 



are content that he should do so, if he is a speedy 
and capable man. But when the receiver does 
throw a prearranged plan to the winds, it means 
simply that the blocker cannot be certain whether 
he is driving his man into the runner or away from 
him. The resulting decline in his sincerity of 
effort is at least pardonable. There are many 
sensational plays in which an ideal team receiving 
the kick-off might be as well instructed as is the 
ordinary team in its everyday working offense. 
There are also a few simple combinations with which 
even an ordinary team may experiment profitably. 

There is, for example, the run by an outside back, 
eventually down the side line, but not imtil he has 
made a feint toward the center. Here the runner 
starts in the direction that the blockers intend to 
charge their opponents. As the feint is made 
toward the center, the blockers place themselves 
outside their respective victims, thus allowing them 
the path they now desire. Then, at the proper 
moment, the blockers charge their men, dropping 
them if they can; at least driving them still farther 
toward the center of the field. The nmner with 
the ball turns toward the side line at the same 
moment. The players assigned to interfere for 
him, knowing his eventual course, place themselves 
where they can aid him if he does reach the side line. 

Another plan with an everyday working possi- 
bility of success is to put all the strength possible 
on the two outside men of the kicking team, on one 
side of the field or the other, according to the direc- 



260 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



tion of the run; sending the runner, with whatever 
interference can be given him, straight up the field. 
This plan presupposes a kick to either corner. 

As for the often practiced general retreat of the 
receivers to a point where they can form a solid 
wall, or wedge, for the runner's protection, it can 
only be said that this manoeuvre usually results in 
the entanglement of the runner in such a maze of 
arms, legs and bodies that he cannot make any 
progress. It is a mere confusion of twenty-one men, 
and a hopeless task. The cloudof interf erers may serve 
somewhat to mask a well-ordered criss-cross play. 
But even then there must be a very careful organi- 
zation of forces for the taking out of converging 
tackles on the side where the ultimate runner is 
intended to emerge. The criss-cross, unfortunately, 
only serves, as a rule, to bring kicking-side players 
into effective action who would otherwise find them- 
selves unable to participate in the play. 

For any team which has no definite program for 
the receiving of kick-offs, and for all teams on short 
or on low, fast kicks, a straight run up the field is 
always the best move. The runner at least obtains 
some positive result, measurable in yards; whereas a 
detour seldom succeeds. Moreover, the runner 
who goes straight will encounter the fewest possible 
number of men who must be dodged. 

Most teams, as I have said, are satisfied if they 
are reasonably confident, in a hazy sort of way, that 
they can at least run kick-offs back to the twenty or 
twenty-five yard line, and that their opponents can 



KICK-OFF AND RUN-BACK 261 



do no better, But the team which could be equally 
certain, and with a better show of reason, that it 
could reach the thirty-five yard mark with any 
kick-off which did not go deep into touch, would be 
a very hard team to beat, other things being any- 
where near equal. Coaches should know after 
hearing reports on the personnel of opponents in 
two or three games, where the likeliest path Hes for 
a run-back, in case the receiver has the power of 
selection. If possible, also, the coach should care- 
fully diagram the opponents Mineup for the kick-off 
and indicate and identify the men to be blocked. 
But few coaches actually go much further than to 
develop blocking by their center, guards and tackle 
as far as possible, coimting on their ends and backs 
to interfere as well as to block. They do this 
usually without giving specific assignments, as 
the players on the kick-off are so far apart that 
there is little likelihood of several blockers picking 
the same man. They merely enforce the general 
rule that the fastest man is the man to take out. 

A word as to the position of receivers on the 
Idck-off : it is qmte unnecessary to stand the ends, 
tackles and outside backs so close to the side lines 
as the usual arrangement does. The backs, more- 
over, commonly play too deep. The center should 
stand twelve yards from the ball, and be instructed 
to let it alone if it comes fast to him. If he attempts 
to handle it he may fimible, with the odds tre- 
mendously against recovery. He should handle all 
"topped drives," however, and slow-rollers generally. 



262 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



The two guards should play some three yards 
deeper than the center, thirty yards apart and 
equidistant from their respective side lines. The 
tackles should station themselves at the twenty-five 
yard line, the quarter at the twenty, the ends 
eighteen yards from the goal line and the three 
backs at the ten-yard mark. These positions are 
interchangeable, in the sense that the best men 
running with the ball should play the deepest. 
The quarter and the fullback should be centered 
with respect to the goals. The tackles and outside 
backs, or those substituted for them, should stand 
ten yards from the side line, and the ends fifteen 
yards from the borders of the field. 

This arrangement gives a much more closely 
united formation than is generally seen, and the 
problem of becoming effective is simplified thereby. 
Any kick that is likely to go out of bounds can be 
covered, if it seems to be good judgment to cover 
it; while on long kicks the backs have ample time 
in which to retreat. Usually it is very unwise to 
attempt a run-back if the kick goes into touch; 
and at best it is a rash procedure. 

The kick-off is a somewhat dangerous play, as 
plays go, from the standpoint of safety from injury; 
but the danger would be largely eliminated if the 
players executed their assignments with the proper 
degree of enthusiasm. The universal use of head- 
gear, and determined effort with muscles properly 
expanded, would eliminate finally whatever special 
danger may be said to exist. 



CHAPTER XXXIII 



ONSIDE KICK AND PUNT-OUT 

The onside, or quarterback, kick decidedly 
deserves to be included in the repertoire of a first- 
class team. It is a play of tremendous possibilities, 
with many incidental advantages accruing even 
when it is not successful in its main object. Not 
even the long forward pass gives opponents a more 
acute mental shock. The ball should be kicked 
flat, as in the case of a punt-out, with the long axis 
held at right angles to the kicking foot instead of 
in a line with the latter. A backfield jump shift to 
the right preferably precedes the kick, which should 
be directed high enough to go over the defensive 
halfback's head if sent to the wide side of the field; 
or it may be kicked thirty-five or forty feet in the 
air, giving the outside backs time to get under it. 
Being onside they are entitled to catch the ball, 
even though in so doing they interfere with a catch 
by an opponent. They need not look up for the 
kick until the last moment, as the defensive half- 
back will indicate the spot to them. Success 
depends on their speed. 

The ends and the left tackle, although not on 
side, are going down the field. They should look 

263 



264 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



up and locate the ball, to cover it in case the kick 
is fiimbled by an onside player of either team. 
The remainder of the line, together with the kicker, 
also get the direction of the ball as soon as they 
hear the sound of the kick and cover the danger 
zone to prevent a possible run-back. 

Figure the possibilities for yourself. In case the 
ball strikes the ground, you have six players of the 
kicking side against one of the opponents, with 
the defensive fullback coming up late. Viewed 
from any angle, this play, properly worked, gives 
more than fifty per cent of the chances to the kicking 
team, if the backfield is reasonably agile. If the 
ball is recovered by the kicker's side, a touchdown 
is imminent. Anywhere between your own forty 
and your opponents' thirty-yard line, the onside 
kick is a standard play. 

Warning is elsewhere given against heeling a 
fair catch so as to prevent the catcher from taking 
even the two additional steps which the law allows. 
This applies especially to receivers of the punt-out; 
concerning which play a few suggestions occur. 
The team making a punt-out has ten raen left. 
Four of them should cover the field ; or this number 
may be reduced to three, if the kicker is especially 
accurate. The remainder should line up as near to 
the goal line as the rules allow; because the sooner 
blocking starts, the less the speed of the players 
scored upon, and the more effective the blocking. 

This line-up should not be a scattering of players 
indiscriminately. If the kick is decently directed 



ONSIDE KICK 



265 



it will fall at a point somewhere in front of the goal. 
At any rate, so the scorfed-on team 'supposes, and it 
makes its charge there. The blockers should so line 
up as to cover approximately the width of the 
goal. They should not charge. Three of them 
would be likely, if they did, to pick the same charger. 
They should await the advance, each blocking the 
most natural man. The special punt used for this 
play should be practiced often. The ball is kicked 
flat on the instep, and dropped with its length 
parallel to the body, instead of at a right-angle as 
in punting generally. This is a very simple kick, and 
for short distances can be very accurately delivered. 

The method of holding the ball for a try-at-goal 
after a touchdown or puntout is as follows: 

The holder of the ball having placed himself on 
the side of the kicker's leg, preferably lies on his 
stomach and elbows. This position gives him 
absolute ease and steadiness, the knuckles of the 
left hand touching the ground, the lower end of the 
ball resting on the forefinger and middle finger 
spread, the end of the ball protruding slightly 
below the fingertips, the upper end of the ball con- 
trolled by the forefinger and middle finger of the 
upper hand. It may be necessary to raise the right 
elbow from the ground, depending on the length of 
the holder's forearm. Now as the holder moves 
the ball to place it on the ground the fingers do not 
interfere in any way and have no tendency to tilt 
the ball when they are withdrawn. This is the 
most important feature. The pressure by the 



266 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



fingers of the right hand is only sufficient to steady 
the ball. 

Zealous referees often annoy the kicker con- 
siderably on this play. In their anxiety that no 
advantage shall be given the kicking team they fre- 
quently place themselves too close to the ball. 
They could as readily see the ball placed and signal 
the defenders as promptly from a convenient dis- 
tance. At the request of the kicker the referee will 
be very willing to retire to a position equally as good. 



CHAPTER XXXIV 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 

As in most modem affairs, there is a marked 
tendency in our football to over-systematize. I 
refer particularly to zone play. Zone play, as is 
well known, calls for certain specific strategic moves 
when a team has the ball near its own goal line; 
for another set of hard and fast niles when the ball 
has been secin'ed toward the center of the field, or 
as its progress is toward either sideline, and for 
almost equally conventional tactics within the 
forty-yard line of the opponents. 

This perpetual, more or less logical, shifting of 
attack and defense, according to position in the 
different zones of the plajdng field, has been so 
well advertised and taught by football writers and 
coaches that its importance and necessity have 
asstimed the purple of accepted fact. But its 
actual value is all the more debatable for that very 
reason. 

Zone play is perpetuated very largely because of 
the natural imwillingness of coaches to bring down 
upon their own heads a storm of adverse criticism, 
seriously weakening their prestige, by adopting 
unconventional tactics which might not operate 

267 



268 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



successfully. A football coach occupies a very 
difficult position. He often wishes to try plays that 
he knows instinctively would baffle the defending 
team, but his aversion for injurious criticism, as 
well as his fear that his judgment and knowledge 
may be questioned, deters him. It is to be regretted 
that a successful forward pass from the throwers* 
five-yard line would be heralded as a fine oit of 
deception, while the same play, meeting with 
failure, would be everlastingly held up as proof of a 
coach's utter lack of sense or judgment. Such a 
criticism as this the astute coach must hope to 
avoid. 

The inevitable result of his consequent self- 
repression is a style of play in the attacking team's 
own territory so conservative as to allow an experi- 
enced player on defense to predict almost without 
failure what the opposing quarterback will elect 
to do. Of course, this robs the game of much of 
its natural dash, ingenuity and thrill. It impreg- 
nates football with two much of that rather unde- 
sirable quality of conservatism. There is no 
reason why the game should be injured, or a com- 
petent coach attacked, because he dares to attempt 
more than his rivals. 

Better football would be seen if players could be 
taught to feel that the presence near the goal line 
of opponents with the ball is particular cause not 
for despair but rather for thrills, offering opportunity 
to do something really big. I venture to say that 
the team which disregarded adverse criticism and 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 269 



constantly attempted the ''desperate chances'' 
throughout the season, even though failure should 
result now and then, would show the greatest 
comparative degree of improvement at the end 
of the season, and the finest spirit on defense as 
well as on attack. 

Some of the biggest games in late years have been 
lost by the withholding of a particularly strong 
running attack, or of a particularly strong runner 
from the team, until the auspicious moment is 
expected to arrive when the team shall be within 
striking distance of the enemy's goal line. The 
time to score is in the first minute of the game, if 
possible; if not then, in the next minute. The 
earlier the lead, the surer the victory and the brighter 
the bonfire. Why should abundant dash, strength 
and virility be saved for a final crash ? It is a poor 
player whose strength does not increase as he 
lessens the distance between himself and a touch- 
down. 

Not so very many years ago a football game con- 
sisted of two forty-five minute halves, undivided into 
periods with breathing space between. Substi- 
tutions were infrequent, and the player leaving the 
game might not return. Men were kept in until 
practically exhausted. The game itself was fully 
as rugged as it is today. Possession of the ball was 
considered four-fifths of the game. Kicking as a 
means of offense was considered only in connection 
with a strongly favoring wind, and by many of the 
best teams not even then. The backs involved had 



270 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



no more stamina than ours. Yet they rushed into 
their line-smashing, head-crashing plays and their 
foot-crushing revolving wedges without a thought 
of physical collapse or fast-approaching senility; 
and considered it a great disgrace to be removed 
from the game. Yet we moderns are perpetually 
wonying lest we waste too suddenly our halfbacks' 
physical power in a short game of an hour ; with two 
resting spells between periods and fifteen minutes 
between the halves; with considerably fewer than 
half the actual number of plays; with considerably 
less physical exertion per play; with a great cloud 
of substitutes, most of whom get into the game; 
with the right of resubstitution, so that players 
bathed, rubbed, warmed, fed, newly equipped and 
rested for a half hour or more, are able to return to 
the game. 

Send your quarterbacks into the game untram- 
meled by the superstition of zone play, and start 
the game with your strongest lineup under the 
conditions. Zone play is an invention of coaches 
based on excessive, however excusable, conserva- 
tism and their distrust of their field general's good 
sense. Unquestionably, from the standpoint of 
danger, the offensive team near its own goal line 
is by far in the more nervous condition after the 
first kick-off. This applies to teams of all classes, 
and a touchdown by opponents caused by a bad 
fimible in the early moments of the game would 
have a most depressing effect. With this excep- 
tion, quarterbacks should be encouraged to use their 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 271 



offense and not to withhold it; kicking before a 
strong wind or by a highly superior kicker naturally 
grouping itself under the head of offense. Zone 
play practically amounts to this: coaches who 
would like to instruct the quarter before every 
play, and may not, instruct him instead for a series 
of plays. These plays are so conservative that 
nothing short of a fimible can resolve the situation. 
Unless you kill the zone play idea in your quarter- 
back you are perpetually reminding him of the 
possibility of a fumble. Is this wise.f^ 

Let us put two teams on the field. One has 
kicked off, the other has made a reasonable run- 
back, and is somewhere near the twenty-yard line. 
According to the tactics laid down for a team which 
is presimiably using zone play, and eliminating the 
wind altogether, there is now but one thing to do — 
kick the ball. The fullback retires to about the 
ten-yard line. The game has just started. Both 
teams are nervous. The kicking team is by far in 
the more dangerous position, and consequently 
much the more nervous of the two. 

The more nervous team now elects to do a much 
more dangerous thing than running with the ball. 
The center must make a long and, at this stage of 
the game, an exceedingly dangerous pass. If his 
nerve is good, he may send the ball over the kicker's 
head. If his nerve is doubtful, probably he will 
make a low pass, which the kicker cannot convert 
into a successful punt without serious liability to 
blocking. Even though the pass be excellent, there 



272 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



is still danger from blocking, and no little likelihood 
of a poor punt. In cold blood, does punting appear 
to be good judgment? 

Let us say that the best which may be hoped 
for happens. The ball is punted, the kick is covered, 
and it is first down for the receiving team at the 
middle of the field; a very good boot, and no run- 
back. The receiving team, which is also an expo- 
nent of zone play, probably will make two attempts 
to carry the ball, at least one of them at tackle, 
and, if unsuccessful, will punt. Many teams, 
however, I am glad to say, will either set forth on 
the path to a touchdown, or punt on the first down. 

By all means ^at this time the very best men are 
in both lineups. If there was ever a time when they 
are needed it is in the early part of the game, when 
not even veterans are proof against nerve shock. 
The ball is punted to the fifteen-yard line, the 
receiver catches and is nailed with a slight gain. 
It is now up to the team in possession to punt 
again, with the kicker stranding somewhere in the 
vicinity of his five-yard line. He faces all the 
difficulties that beset him before, with perhaps 
slightly less nervousness. With a reasonable break 
he cannot hope to get better than the middle of the 
field again, where the ball goes once more to the 
opponents. 

Looking at the game from any fair angle, with 
both teams evenly balanced and both teams 
handling punts cleanly, these exchanges might 
reasonably be kept up throughout the period; with 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 273 



the great mental burden on the team which is 
backed up against its own goal line. If a break 
does occur, it is reasonably certain that this team 
will be the sufferer by it. Therefore, nothing could 
have justified this team in continuing to kick except 
pronounced superiority in the kicking game. Under 
ordinary circumstances, the team playing its big 
rival knows its superiority or inferiority in the 
kicking game before it goes on the field. Surely, 
then, if the teams are balanced in kicking, or if 
the team receiving the kick-off is inferior in this 
respect, zone play has no justification whatever. 
It is very easy to see, then, that without a favoring 
wind, or a much better kicker and ability to cover, 
the less favored team must depend upon luck, or 
find some other means of getting out of its dilemma. 

The only justification for even the first punt is 
the nervousness apparent at the beginning of the 
game. Even then, and because of this very nervous- 
ness, it would be better to try one running play, 
with the surest back to carry the ball. Even if this 
play is unsuccessful, and probably it will be, the 
first wild moment of panic is at an end, and the team 
is in much better condition to kick. 

On the other hand, should a substantial gain be 
made, even of three or four yards, we are justified 
in considering the probable result of a kick. We 
know that in a few minutes or less we shall have 
the same problem on our hands again. The team 
has cooled down and is steady. It has been some- 
what surprised and very much pleased by the 



274 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



result of its first attack. You have told your team 
that they are a crowd of fighters, and they believe 
it. Why not attempt to end the everlasting defense 
of the goal line before it begins? If this can be 
accomplished, even the hardened advocates of zone 
play will cheer for you. 

I do not wish to make myself an advocate of 
senseless, indiscriminate offense as the means of 
getting out of a difficult situation. The quarter- 
back should not resort to a hap-hazard pounding of 
the line at this or any other time. 

The football coach should plan each play, with 
almost no exceptions, so that, perfectly executed, it 
should score. But there are certain plays which 
have greater probabilities than others. The quarter- 
back should have full authority to use any play in 
his list, if warranted in so doing by any modifica- 
tion in the defense. Zone players play zone play 
on the defense as well as on the attack. They 
assume zone play by the attacking team, and are 
accustomed to act accordingly. The quarterback, 
watchful of defensive readjustment, should take 
any possible advantage of it. 

For example, zone players against a team strug- 
gling in this part of the field will immediately 
assume a preponderance of tackle or end plays, trick 
plays, perhaps, but no forward passes. What then 
is more strategic than plays inside a wide-playing 
tackle, or a forward pass in which the risk of inter- 
ception is negligible ? 

All competent coaches would attempt these 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 275 



things but for the fear of ruinous adverse criticism. 
One of the big varsity teams of the east so invariably 
assumes its opponents are slaves to zone play that 
year after year it crowds its secondary defense 
within six yards of the line for two downs, in the 
firm conviction that no forward pass will be dared 
by a team in its own half of the field, This uni- 
versity has suffered defeats by scores by no means 
indicative of its very genuine excellence in many 
departments of football. Against a team so play- 
ing its secondary defense, it is a very simple matter 
to throw deep forward passes from running attack 
formations without the slightest possibility of 
interception. Against any team there are various 
long forward passes not always recoverable by one's 
own ends but always safe from interception by 
opponents. 

Returning now to our theoretical team which has 
received its kick-ofif, lined up at the twenty-yard 
mark, tried one play to steady itself and gained 
some four yards. Its quarterback has decided to 
make an immediate attempt to put his own goal 
line well behind him, instead of attempting to 
defend it for perhaps a full period. Asstiming 
normal positions by the defense, his best attack, 
in my opinion, would be as follows: inasmuch as 
the defense is set, fresh and determined to stop the 
only kind of attack outside of a kick that it expects 
as probable, I would attempt first the long, safe 
forward pass. The defensive fullback, who is 
especially sensitive to the probability of a kick 



276 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



under these conditions, is playing deep. The 
attempt, whether successful or not, is a big shock to 
the defensive team. I will not admit that, properly- 
planned, it is of special danger to the offensive 
team. If it is successful it means a very substan- 
tial gain, probably well into opponents' territory. 
If unsuccessful, the next best play from the standpoint 
of danger to the offensive team is a simple, carefully 
executed trick play, while the defense is in a 
slightly perturbed frame of mind, probably expect- 
ing another forward pass so that its secondary 
defense is slightly drawn back. If this play is 
successful, conditions have altered greatly to the 
advantage of the team carrying the ball. If unsuc- 
cessful, the last possible play that the defense can 
expect will be a straight attack. The quarterback 
should size up quickly, without giving special evi- 
dence of so doing, the positions of the defensive 
linemen. After two such plays, and in the thorough 
expectation now of either a punt or a wild, long- 
distance effort, the line probably will be well spread. 
If so, I would make a strong attempt inside of 
tackle. But if the defensive line is normally spaced 
I would try to carry the ball outside of tackle. 

''Bat," comes the possible objection, **it is now 
fourth down, and you must punt. Therefore the 
defensive team will make a particularly whole- 
hearted effort to block the kick.'' Is there likely to 
be any effort here to block the kick that would not 
have been present had the kick been attempted on 
the first down? My answer would be, no. But 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 277 



the team has had three opportunities to alter the 
aspect of the game in its favor. Had it succeeded on 
any of the three, the necessity of a continual goal 
line defense would have been averted; and this was 
the necessity we expended our energies to dispell. 
Next it is objected that we are expending the rushing 
power of our team in a part of the field where it does 
no good; taking, furthermore, the chances of a 
fimible which easily might spell disaster. So far 
as the ftimble is concerned, what is the difference 
between a fumble here, with slight chance that the 
adversary could run away with the ball if he got it, 
and the fumble of the everlasting kick that he will 
everlastingly force us to handle at the fifteen-yard 
mark.f^ That ftmible, if it occurs, will be received 
by him, beyond any reasonable doubt, and very 
possibly for a touchdown. The greater danger 
lies in the latter. 

As for the exhaustion of the team in running 
attack, what has been done so far to produce exces- 
sive fatigue? There have been exactly four plays. 
We have heard so much talk, and read so much 
criticism, on the subject of zone play, which claims 
for its principle in this part of the field the conserva- 
tion of energy, that our cool judgment and common 
sense have been stifled. One might suppose our 
football team composed of eleven anemic cripples. 
Another objection: **You have now only one down 
in which to kick.'* The answer is that no team 
needs more, unless it has reason to suspect its own 
kicking game; and in this discussion we are assimiing 



278 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



competent teams at the height of their season. I 
have seen high-grade teams attempt a field goal on 
the second down. I would look upon such an 
attempt favorably if attempted from the forty-five 
yard line. It would have the effect of a punt at 
worst, and if successful would be a heart-breaker for 
the opponents. But as the attempt was made 
from the thirty-five yard line, it gave the impres- 
sion that the team was saving downs against possible 
poor passes or f imibles ; and such a reckless waste of 
opportunity is a great breeder of timidity. There 
is a possible fimible in every play. 

At any rate, we are now going to punt, on the 
fourth down ; although there are a nimiber of things 
which I would rather do. Here is undoubtedly 
sound cause for a kick. The average man expects 
it. In three downs you have failed to gain your 
distance. Unquestionably good judgment calls for 
a kick. But that judgment is based on conservatism. 
We pimt accordingly ; though sound judgment is rob- 
bing us of our very best opportunity. There is not a 
man on the opposing team who would not wager 
his quarter's allowance that the play is to be a punt, 
and we do not disappoint him, for even Achilles was 
not brave every day. 

But for the sake of illustrating further the oper- 
ations of attack in different parts of the field, let us 
assimie that each of our three attempts succeeded 
in varying degrees. Let us take first our tackle 
play, which carried the ball to the forty-yard line, 
let us say. 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 279 



We should now have two guiding thoughts: 
First, if we are forced to kick, through inability to 
advance the ball otherwise, we are relieved from 
the strain of working under the shadow of our 
goal posts; and this displeases our opponents as 
much as it pleases us. Second, teams which are 
strongly inclined to the habit of zone play, whether 
they call it by that or by some other name, expect 
that, under the present conditions, with the ball 
on our own forty-yard line, we will try two running 
plays; and, if not successful, we will punt on the 
third down. If the two plays are fairly successful, 
almost accomplishing a first down, and we line up in 
kick formation, the only other serious fear they will 
have is the bare possibility of a forward pass from 
this formation. But the thought of their opponent 
attempting a forward pass on either the first or 
second down they would not dream of entertaining. 
Therefore we have the key to the most logical 
possible play for either the first or second down, 
namely a forward pass. But on the previous first 
down we tried a forward pass. And we must 
assimie that otir opponents are bright enough to 
take the tip. Our team is bold and rash enough to 
violate the laws of the Medes and Persians! The 
forward pass is therefore the play they now are 
more than half inclined to expect. So instead we 
will take a crack at the other tackle; or try the same 
tackle hole again with a different play. In either 
case our gain is small. But we have gleaned a 
little information. 



280 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



Now, says the quarterback, we will try a forward 
pass. W . want to make particularly sure that it 
will not be intercepted. Let us try the one we 
failed with before, but pass the ball to another 
eligible man. The quarterback is about to give 
his signal when his rapid survey of the defensive 
lineup apprises him of the fact that the defensive 
fullback has doped out another long forward pass 
as the probable play. Having been caught too 
deep in the backfield on the previous occasion, the 
fullback has now stationed himself some twenty 
yards from the line of scrimmage. Immediately, 
through thorough coaching, the quarterback sees 
that a quick kick from regular formation undoubt- 
edly will sail over the fullback's head. There is no 
indication from the offensive formation that a kick 
is threatened. 

The signal is given, the ball is snapped and the 
first indication of danger is when the defensive full- 
back hears the thud of a halfback's foot against the 
ball. In consternation he sees that he has fallen 
into a trap, and that the ball is sailing far over his 
head into the sacred regions that he was supposed 
to guard. 

A kick that goes over the fullback's head and does 
not go into touch is a very long kick. A mediocre 
kick, if allowed to roll, will go fifty yards. This 
particular kick is made from as good a spot as any 
to go far enough and not too far. Now let the zone 
playing team, with the shoe on the other foot, 
attempt by zone tactics to get themselves out of 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 281 



difficulty. Our team has played six plays, and, 
under assumptions that are not unreasonable, the 
ball is now in possession of the team kicking off, 
far down near its own goal line. 

But let us suppose that we reached the middle of 
the field on our trick play, in the first series of 
downs. The quarterback who takes his team for 
first down on the fifty-yard line should remember two 
things. He can at any time without adverse 
criticism call for a punt; for the punter will be but 
sixty yards from the adversary's goal line. If his 
team is able to prevent a run-back, it will place oppo- 
nents in the same unenviable situation which the 
so-far successful team occupied at the beginning of 
the game. A kick even on the first down would be 
good football. On the other hand, a perfectly good 
quarterback would be showing sound judgment 
in attempting a march for a touchdown right 
here. 

**But,'' urge objectors, **why continue to reveal 
the character of your offense at this time, giving 
opponents such full opportunity to study and 
diagnose it that in the second half they will be able 
to meet yotu* plays with perfected defense?'* This 
objection will surely be offered. I am entirely out 
of patience with such reasoning. If the ball hap- 
pened to be on opponents' forty instead of fifty- 
yard line, the same objectors would throw off the 
quarterbacks' harrassing instructions and give the 
command: *'Now hit them with everything you 
have for a touchdown." Admittedly it may be 



282 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



more difficult to cover fifty yards than forty; but 
why throw away opportunity? Logically, zone 
play advocates should recommend a kick on first 
down when at noidfield. They weaken their argu- 
ment by essaying any plays whatever, as they do, 
before kicking. 

Regarding the supposition that diagnosis and 
special coaching between halves can kill an offense, 
it may be true if the coaches, whoever they are, can 
supply their team with the determination it lacked 
in the first half. The team that has failed thus far 
has known for the past week, at least, the general 
style of its opponents' offense, and a very large 
majority of the plays that will be met. It has 
received the best instruction available to defend 
against them. Instruction given during inter- 
mission may be very useful. But the intermission is 
hardly long enough to embrace a discussion of an 
entire system of offense. 

Diagnosis, as a matter of fact, is as necessary for 
the attacking as for the defensive team. A team 
may try a play half a dozen times before it discovers 
the diagnosis of the other team, to the extent of 
taking full advantage of it. On a tackle play one 
must know the defense of the tackle and end not 
only, but of the guard and defensive quarter as well, 
before specifying to an exact degree the one best 
point to puncture the line on that play. Further- 
more, the particular action of the guard, as well as 
the defensive quarterback, gives a complete key 
to the weakness of the guard position if we run a 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 283 



play through guard from this same formation; a 
delayed buck, for example. 

The quarterback must have information as to the 
habits of the defensive line and its methods of 
defense before he can pick his plays with certain 
knowledge. The sooner that a team can start its 
offense, within reason, the sooner it will know the 
defense it must break down. Holding back 
attack for the second half* means that you do not 
know enough about the defense to take advantage 
of its weaknesses when you do cut loose. 

'*Does this apply to the trick play?*' Have we 
then only one? How many teams ever used in 
their final game all the plays they had? YouVe 
always some more stuff, and the time to use any 
play is the time when one is satisfied that the play 
will work. 

Now let us take the third case and suppose that 
our long forward pass, thrown so imconventionally 
early in the game, was recovered. On this pass, if 
entirely successful, the runner can only be stopped 
by the defensive fullback. If the end is a good 
runner, the fullback has less than an even chance to 
get him. But suppose that the runner is pulled 
down at opponents' twenty-yard line. The one big 
thing we are up against now is that we have had no 
opportunity to try out the defense of our opponents 
by running attack. Therefore in the selection of 
plays our quarterback can have but three important 
guides: first, his best ground-gainers throughout 
the season; second, any apparent defects in the 



284 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



positions assumed by individual defenders; third, 
information through scouting concerning individual 
weakness in defense. His supreme thought, until 
conditions make it impossible, is a touchdown. 
His teammates to a man must know ^:hat this 
thought fires his heart, soul and body. Every man 
on the team is inspired by the same desire, includ- 
ing the drop-kicker or place-kicker if you have one. 
It is a tense moment for the good captain. He 
knows very well what he considers now to be the 
best play. He knows even better that this is the 
time above all times that he should keep off. He 
must do nothing to break the unanimity of thought 
and action. 

The best this quarterback can now do is to take 
it easy; show confidence in his teammates; speak 
words of assurance to them; call out the word, 
* 'Signal,'' in order to get the defensive players set 
as nearly as possible in their defensive positions; 
digest whatever information he can thus obtain; 
consider the information that he had already regard- 
ing individuals in the opposing line, and adapt the 
total to his strongest play. He must avoid above 
all things at this stage a forward pass of such length 
that, if not covered, it would result in a touchback. 
Every quarterback should know this, but I have 
seen the error committed often. He should play 
at least two of his best playisi, in my opinion three; 
and then take in his situation as to his next move. 
Of course, unless he has received specific instruc- 
tions to the contrary, his final move will depend 



GENERALSHIP vs. ZONE PLAY 285 



upon the success or failure of the three plays at- 
tempted. If it is reasonably possible to make first 
down on the fourth play, the attempt should be 
made. A forward pass on the fourth down is ex- 
pected by the opponent, unless a position is assumed 
by the attacking team to try a field goal. The coach 
must have his quarterback instructed carefully in 
generalship under these very conditions. There 
must be a decision here whether the ball shall be 
rushed, with a good chance to rush it, or whether 
a special scoring play shall be attempted. Many 
if's, and's and but's crowd themselves upon the 
quarterback's mind. 

In case the chance for a first down is hazardous, 
the decision must be made between a stroke for a 
touchdown and an attempt at a field goal. The 
efficiency of your drop-kicker is one of the factors 
to be considered. The field goal opportunity should 
not be passed up unless the quarterback has an 
especially deceptive trick play or forward pass 
which the coach has given him with special instruc- 
tions for its use at just such a time. At this stage 
of the game, any score puts the team scoring in the 
lead. If the field goal is particularly sure, it is a 
hard thing to pass up. If it seem slightly surer 
than the scoring play, take the field goal. If the 
chances are about even, take the big scoring play. 



CHAPTER XXXV 



''H HOUR" 

The preliminary schedule of games should pro- 
vide plenty of first-class competition, and nothing 
less than that accords with the proper and high 
ideals of the game. It is a great mistake, however, 
for a coach to arouse and excite the players before 
every contest. He may happen to possess genuine 
ability as an orator and spell-binder, but decidedly 
he should reserve his efforts for the greater occa- 
sions, urging his men for the present only in accord- 
ance with the importance of the game. 

He should lay special emphasis on the features of 
the practice during the week, the new plays acquired 
and their practical application in the forthcoming 
contest. In very concise, unemotional language he 
should recite, first to the players according to their 
positions and finally to the team, the do's and 
don't's which he desires to make a part of their 
second nature. If this is done before every game 
he can make the lesson so familiar that before the 
final game he can review it practically in pantomime, 
and very quickly, before turning loose the flood of 
his final appeal. I append an outline of what I 
usually say in the dressing room in the way of 

286 



HOUR" 



287 



general instruction. It runs substantially as follows : 
Centers: Remember that you are masters of the 
ball — whether you are in possession or not, be the 
first to get to the ball when a down is declared. 
You are the guardians of the ball. Take care of it, 
within the rules, whether on attack or defense. 
When you pass, send it through with confidence and 
get away to the charge. Your backs will take care 
of the ball. In your enthusiasm to charge, don't 
raise the ball and leave it in the air, in the belief 
that you have passed it. A fimible by the quarter 
usually means the center's failure to complete his 
pass. It is perfectly simple to make the pass and to 
charge simultaneously. When passing for a kick, 
remember that it is just as easy as it was in scrim- 
mage against the second team. Be sure of your 
preparations, and then give the pass no further 
thought. Send it back hard. We'll get it. Don't 
roll it on the ground. 

Guards: You have a great opportunity. Don't 
be picture guards. You have the best opportunities 
to block kicks. You have as good a chance as any- 
body to go down under punts and tackle the runner. 
Guard on the short side of an unbalanced line, 
besides your other duties remember that you 
charge through to get the quarterback on his runs 
at center. You have another special task, to watch 
the center for information. Watch the position of 
his hands in passing. If you see a change, warn 
your team as you have been instructed. 
Tackles : You must bear the brunt of the defense. 



288 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



The number of runners with the ball you take down 
is of no account. On close formation charge through 
end, with head, shoulders and arms. Go behind the 
enemy's line of scrimmage. Don't play defensive on 
the other side of the line by chasing plays. You 
are not a diagnostician, you are primarily a wrecker 
of plays at or near you. Charge through your side 
of the line when sure the play is going the other side. 
After you have done this, then chase the play and 
try to figure in it. It means more wear and tear to 
your opponents when they lack the determination to 
fight you off which they would have were they trying 
to build a hole through you. Furthermore, you are 
likely to meet a check play on your way through. 
Tackles on kick formations, I want you to do two 
things going down under kicks. Here they are in 
order of importance: charge the defensive guard 
hard; tackle the receiver of the punt. You may not 
aspire to AH- American tackle by getting under 
kicks fast and tackling accurately down the field 
if in doing so you have allowed your guard free path 
to block the kick; because you won't be on the team. 

Elads: I am looking for you today to do well two 
jobs. On offensive, beat down the tackle. I must 
have this, or you can't play end. Remember your 
great aid; to worry him by continual shifting of 
position when the play is going to the other side of 
the line. Then get him right, when you need it. 
Early in the game, try this defensive tackle out. 
See how far he'll go out with you. If he's generous, 
take advantage of it later. This perpetual shifting 



"H HOUR^ 



289 



will make it easier to go down under forward passes 
and kicks. When on the defensive, your great job 
is to camp in the opponents' backfield. Break 
through their plays before they are formed, Play 
slightly closer when the strength is on your side. 
Don't worry about your opponents gaining ground 
when their formation is on your side; worry about 
it when that formation is on the other side. When 
you charge into the backfield then, watch the 
scrimmage line and quarterback on your immediate 
side. Be ready for fakes, checks and criss-crosses. 
Always hurry the forward pass. Never mind about 
the passes over your head. Some one else will care 
for them. Going down under kicks, remember your 
whole line is with you. Without any wide detour, 
force the receiver inside. Remember the best way 
to dodge the defensive halfback is by speed. If you 
hesitate his work is partly done whether he takes 
you down or not. 

Quarterback : We are depending upon your judg- 
ment. You pick your own plays, until you are 
positively wrong. Keep the team in hand. If the 
wind is bad, or you are close to your goal line, he 
cool, go slowly, give your next play plenty of thought. 
When you've made your choice, snap your team 
into the play fast and hard. Your passing is good 
enough so that your backs will take the ball as a 
matter of course and without worry. In playing 
defensive fullback, keep in balance with the teams, 
keep the play within reach on both sides. Never let 
a loose runner face you straight ahead coming down 



290 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



the field. Get him on one side. Then don't waste 
effort. A few yards now will make little difference. 
Yotir job is to stop a touchdown. Hit him hard 
and take him down. We have a strong wind today. 
It's blowing diagonally across. When it's with you, 
use it. In the second half it may be gone. It's 
the legalized twelfth man on the team. Don't 
force your kicker, if it can be helped, to kick close 
to the side line toward which the wind is blowing. 
Watch for bad spacing in the defense. Keep your 
eye on the secondary. If the fullback is playing 
short, put one over his head. Use the plan of attack 
that has been outlined to you, but, above all, use 
your best judgment. 

Backs : Work hardest when you are faking, but be 
natural. If you fake at the end, keep him busy. 
You've been shown and you know that you can break 
through the line if the enemy is not breaking through. 
Prove it. Wear yourselves out as quickly as possible. 
Then come out. The subs will take your place. 
If you don't work, they'll take ypur place anyway. 
They are improving, and they need the work. If 
you must look around, look around before the 
signal is given. Take it easy ; your signals are simple. 
Don't get the habit of yelling : '^Signal." At the last 
moment if you don't know the play, call out. Com- 
plete every assignment. Don't know you are down 
till you can't get up. On defense, keep your eyes 
on the quarterback if he's under center. You can 
then see the two ends. Halfback on the side away 
from the formation, you can't leave your position 



HOUR" 



291 



till the backfield is positively on its way and you are 
sure where the ends are. This doesn't mean loafing; 
you'll see it all in the small part of a second. De* 
fending against kicks, get the end, on one side or 
the other, and take him down or make him run 
wide. Take it for granted his motto is speed. 

Defensive quarterback: You are the main prop 
of the defensive line. You have one of the finest 
jobs in the world. You need lots of eyesight. 
You can pick the attack on the line from the fake, 
for a lot of the backs can't fake. Don't go too 
seriously till the quarterback goes. Make them 
hesitate to stick their noses beyond the line. Hit 
them hard when they come through. It's a great 
job, and a man's job. Make the most of it. 

Kickers: Remember the direction of the wind. If 
you are up against it on the side line on fourth down, 
be sure to tiuii your ball in toward the center of the 
field. With the wind, spend your extra energy 
trying to get height. Against the wind, try to hold 
them down. Remember the direction of the wind 
is as important against it as with it. When time is 
taken out, talk your kicking game over with your 
captain and quarterback, now and then. 

Team: I want you to remember especially one 
thing today as always. Hate and abhor the scrim- 
mage line! It is a restraining mark. By the rules 
of the game you are held there until the ball is 
snapped. Get away from it as quickly as you can. 
Leave it behind you. It will never get you anything. 
I want to see this rushline, on defense, whether in 



292 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



opponents' territory or on its own one yard line, 
on the ground, charging as one man with the snap 
of the ball; head and shoulders set; muscles dis- 
tended; eyes forward and alert; fighting to the play, 
ready with body and arms at all times to take 
down the runner or his interference. If you do 
this, they can't come through. I want to see the 
whole line down under kicks, every man prepared 
to make the tackle; but I want to see no selfish 
avoidance of the defensive line in order to accom- 
plish this result. Watch the defensive center and 
guards. Perhaps you will kick off. Every man 
who loafs on this play will see the rest of the game 
from the sidelines. Get yotir positive, helpful 
information to the quarterback at the first good 
opportunity. The whole team is to charge as one 
man with the snap of the ball. Don't forget the 
scrimmage line. 



Many coaches make mistakes of expression after 
a game has been played. To conceal disappointment 
by laughing and jesting with players is a mistake. 
To show bitterness toward players who have erred 
is also a mistake. A defeated team is entitled to 
respectful sympathy; best shown by an attitude of 
reserved depression. The team should feel and 
know that the coach is deeply disappointed. He 
should keep to himself within reasonable limits 
until such time as another period of association 
naturally begins. At that time it will be his task 
to put both praise and blame where they belong. 



^CHAPTER XXXVI 



THE FINISHING TOUCHES 

One of the most effective methods of finishing off 
and polishing a team's offense for its final game is 
shadow scrimmage. The coach should stand in front 
of his regular team, and behind the second team's 
line, raising his hands above his head to signify 
plays. The varsity team should go through its 
entire repertoire of plays at a slow trot. There 
should be no tackling, and only a mild resistance 
by the second team. Every first-string player, 
however, should execute his assignment on every 
play in the form he has decided to adopt. 

The object of this drill is to make certain that 
a team has not become careless in the small but ever 
important details; to preserve that last factor that 
makes ground-gaining certain: thoroughness. 

Shadow defense, moreover, gives players a chance 
to consider carefully the particular appearance of 
the opposing backfield in the various plays as they 
approach the line. It raises in the players' minds 
many useful ideas as to the precise manner in which 
certain plays may best be stopped or advanced. 
Thus the player acquires the valuable habit and 

293 



294 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



experience of thinking about these things as the 
plays come to them in harmless form. 

The rope is a physical drill which aids enormously 
in putting the finishing touches on a team when it 
is not wise to order very much scrimmage. Those 
ten-yard charges under the taut-held rope — five 
yards to the line and five beyond, turn again and 
go — are tremendous builders of muscles and endur- 
ance. There is no telling how much rope drill a 
team in condition can stand, but the wisest rule is 
to stop the exercise when you see the good men 
slowing down. Remember that the shorter men 
have an advantage in this drill if charging side by side 
with taller fellows. Therefore the men should be 
assigned to groups according to height. Even then 
it will always be noticeable that the tall men are the 
first to weaken under the strain. 

Even if a coach intends to hold out certain players 
for supreme moments, he ought to start the game 
with his strength. Never give the other team an 
initial impression of weakness ! The coach whojholds 
out important men at any time is taking a gamble. 
I will admit that I have taken risks of this kind 
myself occasionally; but very seldom, and only after 
a careful calculation of the chances. 

For instance, in one game, played under almost 
impossible conditions of snow, rain, hail and deep 
mud especially, I held out four of my best men for 
the entire third period, and sent them back, after 
nearly three-quarters of an hour of rest, warm and 
dry, in fresh uniforms and shoes. I believe that 



FINISHING TOUCHES 295 



they saved my team from defeat ; but I had gambled, 
all the same, that there wotild be no scoring in the 
third period. 

In this game the conditions were exceedingly poor 
for any kind of football, but especially for forward 
passing or kicking. A kick of twenty-five yards 
beyond scrimmage was a fine punt. Both teams 
gave up attempting to catch the ball, which seldom 
would roll five yards. Often it would bury its nose 
in the mud and spin. This was a very exceptional 
game. 

Usually the regular men are so much better than 
the subs that one should play them all the way. 
At the same time, a coach should never hesitate to 
put in a good substitute for a regular man who is 
not going well. One of the hardest lessons coaches 
and trainers must learn is to take any injured man 
out; especially if that man is a star. Yet the good 
substitute, iminjured and fresh, is the better man 
of the two. 

Frequently the source of amazement to the coach 
and rejuvenation to the team is the substitute, espe- 
cially the back; but this only because his work is 
more noticeable than a line player's. He comes into 
the game strong and determined, eagerly embracing 
the golden opportunity. Many a defeat has he 
turned into victory. It took me a long time to 
become convinced of this, even after I had seen it 
done; but to the young coach who has yet to make 
up his mind I offer prayerfully this motto: **Do it 
now.'' 



296 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



I must admit I am not in favor of singing or 
instrumental music for football players on the day 
of a big game. And if the student bands outside 
must play, I would prefer that they confine them- 
selves to martial airs. The making of music, or 
listening to it, does not create a warlike attitude. 
Calm, quiet, dispassionate discourse, or walking, is 
a better way to pass the tense hours before a big 
match, which real football players should regard at 
least with a certain degree of seriousness. 

The mass-meeting is one of the most wonderful 
institutions of college life. It gives a thrill which 
many a man will be able to recall until his dying 
day. This should not, however, be coarsened or 
cheapened by too frequent repetition. One up- 
roarious mass-meeting will do as much as anything 
or anybody can to put the finishing touches on a 
team. Do not have too many of them. Save their 
glorious inspiration for the supreme occasion. 

The best kind of a speech before a big football 
t game is the one which contains not too many 

specific reminders, which might give the players a 
feeling that they are still unprepared. They ought 
to feel that at least they know as much football as 
their opponents, and probably more; that the game 
resolves itself to a proposition of extreme indi- 
vidual effort and team play. The final exhortation 
should arouse the team to intense feelings of brother- 
hood, fealty and self-sacrifice. Within due limi- 
tations of decency and fair play, build a supreme 
determination to win. For while there may be 



FINISHING TOUCHES 297 



honor and glory in defeat, it is not to coiirt those 
glories and honors that a team goes forth to battle. 

Between the halves, as at all other times, the coach 
must remember that the men are himian. They 
will stand for abuse if necessary; but you should 
show them first that the abuse is justified. 

Try to remember that their spirit of elation or 
depression rivals your own. Therefore, for the best 
interests of all concerned, see that the men are as 
comfortable as possible, and that all necessary 
things in the way of physical repair are undertaken 
immediately and silently. Remember that the men 
are watching astutely every move of the coach, 
whom they consider, after all, their main reliance 
in adversity. His first duty is to correct, as dis- 
passionately as circumstances will permit, the errors 
of play, of commission and of omission. His second 
duty is to improve both offense and defense if pos- 
sible. He must avoid generalities at this time. He 
must be specific. Above all things, if he expects a 
response from his men, he must be logical. If he 
does not know what to say, silence is far better than 
hit-or-miss fault-finding. He is, in the minds of his 
men, superior to them in judgment; and he must 
live up to his role. If the team is carrying out his 
teachings as well as it can, if it is simply outplayed 
by a superior antagonist, he must be fair. He 
must never let the team catch him off his balance, 
and thus give the impression that he is at a loss 
how to improve the situation. If the coach is at 
his wit's end, it is far better judgment to take no 



298 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



chances by way of random suggestions. Rather he 
should evolve some scheme by which to hide his 
perplexity. He might, for instance, take in turn 
three or four of his more reliable men, off at one 
side but in plain view of the rest of the team, and 
hold secret conversation with them, urging that 
they pull the team together by their own physical 
and mental power; anything to make it appear 
to the team that the coach is not at the end of his 
tether, and that there is still hope. Having in 
some manner created the impression that help is at 
hand, and that better results must come, the coach 
should make his appeal, putting all his power of 
thought and feeling into the final words. If he is a 
real coach his team will go forth to the second half 
rejuvenated^ encouraged and determined. 



CHAPTER XXXVII 



GETTING UNDER HIS SKIN 

It is well for a coach to discover, if he can, the 
short cut to the best there is in every boy ; the most 
compelling influence that can be brought to bear on 
a given member of the squad. The game itself is 
usually the tie between coach and player, but not 
always. Sympathetic appreciation of what may 
be a mere whim has won the heart of many a difficult 
chap, who later became a tower of strength to the 
team, thanks to some improvement in his mental 
attitude. 

No doubt football instinct, so called, first dis- 
covers itself in most boys, who are destined later to 
become proficient, through the natural inclination 
of red-blooded youth for a rough and timible pas- 
time which contains at least the simulacrtun of 
danger. All boys experience the natural love of 
danger, but there are those who feel that they are 
not brave enough to play, and these are forced to 
satisfy their instincts by looking on; until, in many 
cases, the appeal of the game overcomes timidity. 
In the meantime, however, they are not without 
their value to the cause of football, providing, as 
they do, that chorus of applause which arouses 

299 



300 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



vanity and emulation as surely then as in later 
years. 

Along with the competitive instinct, the cooper- 
ative and protective urge begins to manifest itself 
in our football stars of the future. The youngster, 
in fact, keeps discovering fresh incentives to learn 
the game and become proficient, and presently 
football spirit is evolved for manly boys to reverence 
and cultivate. Football follows naturally and 
logically after the running, dodging and wrestling 
play of children. But there is no occasion for dis- 
couragement with reference to boys who grow up 
under excessive parental restraint like invalids or 
weaklings, or in isolated localities where sport is 
not known. There have been very fine football 
players who never saw a football until enrolled as 
students in some higher institution of learning. 

I have never seen anybody to whom American 
football did not make a strong appeal if he or she 
had studied the game long enough to understand 
the basic features of play. A battle of wits and of 
brawn, football offers the finest combination to 
normal man for opportunity and for glorious achieve- 
ment. Its picturesque and spectacular elements and 
its setting are highly attractive to artistic temper- 
aments and romantic spirits. Moreover, the fall of 
the year is the harvest time of more than the fruits 
of the field. It is the time, in temperate climates, 
when man turns from his more languid stimmer 
mood, seeking and desiring strenuous competition. 
The greatest sense of physical achievement is 



GETTING UNDER HIS SKIN 301 



possible at this time of the year. And there is a 
glamour of romance in football that touches the 
heart of any young man who has ever had the 
blessing to get close enough to the game to arouse 
his interest. 

And young men not only! While I was coaching 
the Denver Athletic Club team, I once sat at dinner 
with an expert accountant, and with a noted builder 
of railroads, whose guests we were. The account- 
ant, whose acquaintance I was then making, took 
occasion almost immediately to remark that foot- 
ball did not appeal to him. He regarded it, he 
said, as a matter of brute strength entirely. As such, 
his attitude toward it was frankly contemptuous. 

I ventured to challenge the position of my new 
acquaintance, observing that I had never found 
football to be a matter of physical strength alone, 
if only for the reason that I was never very strong 
myself; yet had played the game considerably, and 
was supposed, at least, to have been successful. 
**You, as an expert in accountancy,'' I remember 
saying, **should be interested in football: in our 
ability to move a man without touching him; in the 
mathematical calculations by which we arrive at 
our signals; in the often extraordinary sense of 
diagnosis shown by players of the defending team." 
I concluded my appeal by inviting my new acquaint- 
ance to visit the grounds of the Denver club, of 
which club he happened to be a member, in order 
to acquire a little first-hand knowledge of the game 
as a basis for better judgment. 



302 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



**I'm always willing to be shown where I'm 
wrong/' was my fellow guest's answer, and as he, a 
successful man of sixty, had little to do during the 
afternoons, professionally, I was not surprised to 
see him oil the sidelines at the practice the very 
next day. 

I had quite a bit of correcting and explaining to 
do, that afternoon, and, presently, on turning my 
head to locate a man who stood in special need of 
admonition, I was interested to note that my friend, 
the accountant, had poked his way into the midst 
of the squad, and that he was listening to me with 
an extremely flattering air of attention. 

After the practice he approached me and said: 
^'Mr. Cavanaugh: I am a little mite ashamed of 
myself. I never realized that there was so much 
thought involved in every play at football, or that 
you planned so much in every move of the attack. 
I'm afraid I'm long past the age to play football. 
I'm sixty. But would you mind if I attended prac- 
tice here regularly? May I put on a suit and pick up 
what I can by mingling with the boys? I'll try not 
to be too much in the way." I said: Delighted!" 

He never missed an afternoon's practice all that 
autumn. I can remember, as if it were yesterday, 
crossing the cactus-covered fields to Colfax Park, 
and seeing always the shiny, bald head on the 
bleachers of one waiting to find out if we were ever 
going to come. My story of the expert accotmtant 
and the reformation of his attitude toward football 
shows how people often pass up things that would 



GETTING UNDER HIS SKIN 303 



be the joy of their lives, if they would only try them. 

There is something in the swoop and shock of a 
hard tackle at the knees which stirs a racial memory 
and satisfies an ancient desire; but the sense of 
tremendous things well done after making a perfect 
tackle is perhaps a more modem guerdon. After a 
perfect tackle, made in an instant, you realize that 
you are one hundred per cent perfect. That price- 
less thrill of exhilaration need not include the 
slightest sense of gloating over an opponent's 
overthrow. It can be made up wholly of the sense 
that you, personally, have achieved. 

In a boy, too, football expresses and satisfies the 
warlike instincts, the spirit of defense of hearth and 
home. He visualizes the rival team as the per- 
sonification of an ancient enemy. He is conscious 
of fighting for a bright and a lofty ideal : the defense 
of Alma Mater and the furtherance of her glory. 

The nobler idea of co-operation and protection 
glows quite as strongly within him, if he is a fine 
boy, as the pugnacious, competitive instinct. He 
is willing to go through fire and brimstone, for 
cherished comrades not only, but even for fellows 
whom, off the field or out of the playing season, he 
would be inclined to shun. The football player 
participates in the high experience of generous 
physical sacrifice. There is no taint of personal 
gain. There is always the abundant and natural 
satisfaction that comes to the normal man or boy 
of ambition in the accomplishment of things worth 
while. 



304 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



There may be men of honorable life and rational 
thought to whom my portrait of the football player 
might seem overdrawn, idealized too highly; but is 
it necessary for a man to limit himself to God, 
country and fireside in a belief that there are no 
other ideals worthy, in however less degree, of his 
love and toil? Surely affection for college or 
school, or hamlet or city, may be included among 
the things that are worthy to quicken dreams to 
deeds; and football typifies, better than any other 
game, the successes and setbacks of ideal, manly 
life, preparing its initiates for both. 

So much for the ideal aspects of that which Presi- 
dent-Emeritus Tucker of Dartmouth so profoundly 
characterized as the one great academic game. 

The coach must harden himself against occasional 
moments of disenchantment caused by the dis- 
covery that the incentive behind a few of the men 
who are playing football is quite insufficient to 
carry them to the real heights of achievement. 
Perhaps the greatest misfortune to all games is the 
man who finds himself representing a school or a 
college in athletics on a firm, well-defined and 
absolute business basis. On a plane of calamity 
only a little higher is the player preoccupied with 
wondering how much extra money he is going to 
have to spend, or thinking about the job that 
awaits him if, until he is graduated, he can continue 
to be a success as a star player. The player in 
question would be far better fitted for that job, or 
for a better one, if his mind had not been dwarfed 



GETTING UNDER HIS SKIN 306 



by some such subtle or outright promise of employ- 
ment, in the gift of another, given without regard 
to his ability to make good except as an athlete. 

I would not wish to go on record as holding that 
an athlete should lose a legitimate job at college 
or during vacations because he is an athlete. We 
are all human— college faculties, alumni and under- 
graduates are himian. I believe in the desire to 
excel. It stimulates manhood, ambition and civili- 
zation. I believe in the enthusiam of graduates who 
seek to encourage all worthy youths to enroll them- 
selves at the institution which the older men love 
and cherish. But for the sake of the young man 
himself, and his future conscience, I am most 
strongly opposed to the athlete's receiving make- 
believe jobs, or presents in the form of money or 
clothes, donated because he is an athlete. 

The unfortunate young man so mistakenly 
professionalized can never experience the thrill of 
winning or losing for a high ideal; and in the days 
to come can never enjoy the deep satisfactions of 
him who gave freely of all he had in a good cause, 
with never a thought of paltry personal gain. His 
school or college reunions will lack that elixir which 
sends his more fortunate classmate out invigorated 
and rejuvenated by one more fleeting hour of con- 
tact with his Alma Mater. He will be one of the 
poorest financial contributors to his college; for he 
will always feel that he gave more to his college 
than his college gave to him: a lamentable mental 
conclusion. 



306 



INSIDE FOOTBALL 



New coaches, however, must understand at once 
that there are certain impedimenta which they have 
to carry, possibly of the type already described, 
almost certainly of another type, one not wholly 
lacking in the more humorous aspects which frail 
humanity presents. I have reference now to the 
bevy of photograph football players. Football 
managers, or at least the photographers, find it 
necessary to take a picture of the entire squad 
before that squad has been so far reduced as to 
militate against an extended sale of the picture. 
The boys who love to sit in the pictures are usually 
present in rather considerable numbers. After the 
group picture has been taken, the coach must 
expect a falling off in attendance at practice. 

He must not permit himself to become too much 
discouraged. The absent members have already 
gone as far with football as they dare for the small 
reward of getting into the squad picture. That 
reward includes an inproved social status at home, 
and a reputation in the town community, never to 
be forgotten, of having, in their youthful days, 
played on the school or college football team. It 
also gives them a distinct advantage over stay-at- 
home swains in the competition for the favors of uhe 
village belle. 

The coach should not regret the instruction he 
has imparted to the photograph football players, 
for at least they have shown what is, for them, a 
remarkable depth of feeling, and a certain degree 
of admiration for the real football men. Quite 



GETTING UNDER HIS SKIN 307 



possibly these same photograph players, or some of 
them, could they be inveigled far enough into the 
season, might find that they were braver than they 
knew. For, after all, the amount of courage 
requisite to play football is not extraordinary. 
Little by little the novice player learns the habit 
of taking a chance. Seldom, if ever, come moments 
to the enthusiastic football player when he may be 
said to have a desperate chance with time to argue 
pro and con. The photograph player may be 
braver than he thinks he is. He may develop, and 
often has, with much greater courage and love for 
the game than he ever dared to dream. 

The chronic **crab'' represents another difficult 
type which any coach, in sheer self-defense, must 
learn how to handle. If possible, he should by 
clever management so arrange that when the 
* 'crabbing'* begins the other players laugh heartily, 
much to the surprise and even to the delight of the 
**crab,'' whose transition from crabbedness to the 
state of becoming a genuine wit may date, who 
knows, from that very moment. 

Another effective method is to let the "crab" 
discover suddenly that he is a great chum of the 
coach, assistant coach, trainer or whoever can bear 
him. This relationship usually will cause him to 
choke whenever he finds himself inclined to indulge 
in crabbedness. Either he must give up his new 
chums, which he will never do, being at heart an 
enthusiast, or cease his fault-finding, and so become 
a help, rather than a nusiance. 



308 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



I once had on my team such a chronic gloom that 
I was forced to associate with him myself, laugh at 
his outbursts and treat him as a wit. But I very 
nearly lost my equilibrium one fine sunshiny morn- 
ing. He entered my rooms with the profanely 
expressed complaint that he had gone to the 
trouble of purchasing an exceedingly * 'classy*' rain- 
coat before undertaking his two thousand mile 
journey to play on a football team; and that he'd 
bet anything the damned weather would continue, 
thus denying him the slightest opportunity to wear 
the garment in question. After I had laughed, and 
after he had growled and stared, we went down to 
the field, to begin the last week of the season. He 
reached the conclusion that at least it was good 
football weather. And he was the man whose 
work won the championship game. 

Another set of problems is presented by the boy 
who got into football while attending preparatory 
school because, being large and strong for his years, 
he was shamed into playing. Pride and the urging 
of friends at home carry him. on into college football, 
but with no marked degree of enthusiasm on his 
part. His reputation was made on a team where 
he was bigger than the gang around him. Some- 
times he values that reputation so highly that he is 
afraid to chance it. Often he is a fellow of more 
than sufficient means and inclined to be lazy. He 
feels that everything except football will tend to 
make his college life one grand, sweet song. He 
loves the old game well enough, but he loves the 



\ 



GETTING UNDER HIvS SKIN 309 

game as played by others, or as played by himself 
without physical discomfort. 

Therefore he wanders in the lanes of discontent, 
searching for the incentive to keep him going; or, 
better still, for the bright and happy avenue of 
escape. Once he proves his ability to play football, 
forsooth, the bright and happy avenue of escape is 
forever blocked by the coach. The coach, in 
exchange, finds himself, in all fairness, bound to 
provide the man with incentives, if he can. This is 
indeed a trying task, though not without its interest. 
It is, in the first place, absolutely necessary for the 
coach, like a friendly maggot, to get under the 
small-school hero's skin. Companionship, cajolery, 
frequent appeals to pride, even when pride is almost 
entirely lacking, and sometimes moments of blazing 
anger must be employed by the guardian coach. 
Create in the man everlasting respect, and, if pos- 
sible, admiration, for yourself. Such a man will 
do more for the individual, oftentimes, than for 
banquets or for headlines in the newspapers. 

The blase senior. Who has had more than his 
share of the sweets of football accomplishment and 
applause during a long school or college career, is 
another fellow who exists for the exasperation of 
coaches. This man is still able to get up a thrill 
for a big game, but he has lost his interest in practice, 
and it often requires demotion to the second eleven 
to revive it. 

There is altogether too great a tendency on the 
part of the people who claim to be ''in the know,'* 



310 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



and who seldom are, to use rather indiscriminately 
and often the term quitter,*' as applied to football 
players and to athletes in general. To a man of 
red blood, this is a terrible epithet; a hopeless brand, 
which tends to ruin his confidence in himself, and 
may have very far-reaching and unfortunate results. 
After eighteen years of active coaching, I confess 
that I do not know what a quitter is : where to draw 
the line between the fighter and the quitter I am 
unable to discover. 

Once in a very great while, and out of a thousand 
football players, a coach will run upon a man whose 
courage is at all times patently reduced to a rapid 
retreat. In other words, he is so hopelessly with- 
out courage that the puzzling question is how he 
ever got into football at all. This man, however, 
is the rarest of exceptions. 

On the other hand, out of a thousand players 
and would-be players I have seldom seen a man 
who would not do the most extraordinary deeds, if 
sufficient mental impetus were present. In the 
same breath I may say that in all these years I 
believe the men could be counted on the fingers of 
two hands who have not, or would not, **quit," 
within the meaning of that unfortunate word, when- 
ever the mental burden became too great. It is 
not natural for men, except in case of dire necessity, 
or extreme state of mental elevation, to carry a 
great burden indefinitely. 

Courage is never physical, but always mental; and 
this is a glorious thought, for it means that the 



GETTING UNDER HIS SKIN 311 



physical giant cannot, by reason of his stature, 
produce one iota of courage superior to that pro- 
duced by the most insignificant pigmy. It is one 
of the lessons of antiquity most profound, most 
human and most consoling, that the hero who 
pursues his enemy around the walls of Troy-town 
is by him pursued, another day. The ancients 
explained by the intervention of their deities the 
flaws and fluctuations of the human spirit, hour by 
hour. We, who are presumably wiser than they, 
are no less compelled to the conviction, that courage 
or the lack of it depends not upon girth or length of 
limb, not upon giant thews or hardness of muscular 
development. Even Achilles was not brave every 
day. The giant of yesterday may be the pigmy of 
the morrow, not because of physical degeneracy, 
but because of mental change, due to any one of 
many causes. 

Breaking training, whether during season or at 
the end of it, is a mental change before it becomes 
a physical act. With imaginative youngsters, the 
harm done mentally is apt to outweigh considerably 
the physical effect of violating or terminating the 
course of training. To break training may indeed 
be a dark and desperate deed, inwardly, although it 
only takes the form of eating candy, dancing, sitting 
in the park or smoking. There are some things 
worse than others, but whoever breaks training ought 
at least to realize that even at the end of the season 
he is delivering a shock to his system by so doing. 
The system is usually kind enough to stand the 



312 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



shock, or to appear to do so, at the time, but some- 
times grim reminders will crop out in the dim, undis- 
covered future. It is certain, at any rate, that 
breaking training does not help a football player to 
start training another year. 

The man who flagrantly and willfully breaks 
training during season must be dismissed from the 
squad, whatever his potential ability as a football 
player. There are occasions when a coach or a 
trainer can better afford not to be too severe, but 
with due regard at all times both to discipline and 
to the welfare of the individual; and with a very 
special regard to the spirit and disposition of the 
man who has violated some minor provision of the 
code. While the rules of strict training may often 
seem to be unnecessarily severe and restrictive, it 
is impossible to argue against the spirit of them, 
which is that men must be willing to make every 
reasonable sacrifice for a worthy cause. It is in this 
spirit, and not otherwise, that they command 
respect and merit enforcement. 

It is usually after the coach has the probable 
makeup of his team fairly well outlined in his own 
mind that he begins to place himself on a social 
basis with certain players other than the captain 
of the team. He will begin to neglect less frequently 
or even to create, opportunities for a chance meet- 
ing, or a walk with this player or that. What the 
coach will then proceed to say to the player depends 
on what he ought to say to him. As a general rule, 
you want him, for reasons which you understand 



GETTING UNDER HIS SKIN 313 



better than any one else, to know at this particular 
time that you are a human being, ^nd that you 
have a real interest in him, great as may be his 
surprise to learn it. Or, you may have some 
special thing you want to find out, and which is 
easier to find out if you can put yourself on a friendly 
social basis with the player, at least for the time 
being. 

In another case, it may be that you feel it your 
duty to give the player a little gossip, disparaging 
as to himself, which you have received from oppos- 
ing forces, or believe that you did. This to arouse 
his ire, or a bit of extra fight, a very difficult thing 
to arouse, it may be, in this particular man. 

Then you have the player whom you discover to 
be more worldly than most of your football men; 
who needs to be told that Smith or Jones or Brown, 
or all three of them, the heads of great business 
organizations or men who wield vast prestige, are 
going to be at the game for the special purpose of 
seeing your young companion *'go through big.'* 
Or you may impress upon him that many of your 
friends from home will attend the game, chiefly for 
the purpose of seeing him in action. As a rule, these 
things are all true in the particular cases in point. 
Now and then, however, in order to draw out the 
best there is in a man, it is necesessary to use a 
certain amount of imagination. 

While a coach should avoid mixing in fraternity 
rivalries, and should show himself to be a person of 
discretion at all times, it is well for him to possess 



314 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



accurate sources of information as to school or 
college politics, for his better guidance in keeping 
a firm hold on the players. He should have suf- 
ficient influence, at least, if worthy of the name of a 
good coach, to disparage any politics, while the 
season is still on, looking toward the election of a 
captain for next year; or any other politics, in fact. 
Always I have found that this can be done. 

The direct and indirect influence and effect of 
newspaper publicity, and of the college prints, is 
deserving of study by thoughtful coaches, who 
must occasionally intervene to counteract the results 
of over-praise or of blame not sufficiently deserved. 
The coach may d-lso have reason to believe that 
some of his rivals are taking advantage of the power 
of the press to render certain of their own players 
more formidable in reputation than in reality, and 
others less so. Publicity is an aid made use of 
inadvertently or otherwise by nearly every coach, 
and the newspapers have a particularly profound 
influence over the fortunes of coaches who operate 
near the large centers of population. Scarcely a 
morning or an evening edition appears without a 
colimm telling of the electrifying deeds of some 
great back, or end, or tackle, now playing on the 
varsity; whose even more remarkable deeds are 
being kept under cover until the final game of the 
season. In spite of all that can be done by their 
coach to counteract this influence, the players who 
must eventually encounter this terrible man-eater 
are inevitably influenced by all this extraordinary 



GETTING UNDERS HIS SKIN 315 



publicity. The players read the sporting pages with 
bulging eyes, and it becomes necessary for the coach 
to fight fire with fire by disparaging much-touted 
rivals, and to insist that a hard tackle will bring 
any of them down to their proper dust. 

The '^featuring" of certain players is considerably 
more exaggerated and sensational in football than in 
sports which contain less of glamour. The custom 
of holding much of the practice behind closed gates 
deepens the mystery surroimding football, which 
grows deeper and darker still, as a rule, when the 
coaches begin to claim the right of censorship, and 
even of revision, over the reports of the practice to 
be sent broadcast. Writers with space to fill are 
naturally driven to the exercise of their own imagi- 
nations if denied free access to sources of reliable 
information. In this case, however, they are com- 
pelled to accept as reliable the information that 
reaches them, the effect of which on the reader has 
been carefully calculated, in many instances. I 
can recall the case of at least one remarkable foot- 
ball specialist, who was kept at a brilliant gait 
throughout his undergraduate career in football by 
a studied campaign of propaganda; a subtle head 
coach continuing to boost him, and to expatiate 
upon his remarkable qualities, until he managed to 
hold him almost without suspicion for four years. 

Secret practice can be just as secret as the coaches 
care to make it. And in this connection it may be 
said, for the benefit of young coaches, that a big 
varsity team is usually xeady for its championship 



316 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



games, as regards condition and general offense, 
two or three weeks before it plays them. Do not 
scrimmage your team every day, young coach, 
because the papers say that all the big teams are 
doing it. Disregard the startling information that 
any one of these teams has suffered crushing defeat 
at the hands of its own freshmen eleven, behind 
the barred gates. Rather brush up on your funda- 
mentals and assignments, going through the same 
plays day after day. Let fast, snappy signal 
practice, grass drills and rope drills, or substitutes 
for them, and the exercise of your own personality, 
take the place of slavish imitation of what the great 
varsity elevens are supposed to be doing. 



CHAPTER XXXVIII 



THE MYSTIC NEXUS 

Seldom later than a week before the most im- 
portant game of the season I have been accustomed 
to gather the players together for a quiet evening, 
intending it to be spent in discharging calmly and 
dispassionately but with all sincerity the pent-up 
emotions of these hearts young and brave. A 
mysterious nexus known as college spirit goes round 
the room that night. Boys whose vehicle of expres- 
sion is halting and awkward as thek spirit is fiery 
and sincere find somehow the means to make them- 
selves understood by their fellows, imtil the old, 
dim banners hung on the gymnasium walls are 
vague in the fine mist of very precious and sacred 
tears. 

Let it not be tinderstood that on these occasions 
I excite, permit or share a mere emotional debauch. 
Unless all the great things are tawdry and false, 
this get-together evening contains nothing irrational, 
nothing that may not be regarded reverently. 
The justification is this. You have in your squad 
players whose boyish hearts are swelling almost to 
the bursting point; and others, perchance, who 
have never attuned themselves to the celestial 

317 



318 INSIDE FOOTBALL 



music. At the height of the football season you 
will find one thing or another, but mawkishness or 
insincerity seldom. This is the occasion, in my 
experience, when comrades, chums and good pals 
find themselves brothers; when the cold, distant, 
stand-offish chap is discovered almost visibly to 
have a heart of gold; when the schemer's hard 
fibres are touched, and his premature, false cynicism 
falls from him like a ragged garment, discarded 
perhaps forever. 

There is a wonderful power in strong, modulated, 
earnest voices, as young men tell one another what 
college spirit really means to them; of the joys and 
thrills of football; of sacrifices willingly made; of 
fealty joyfully pledged ; of a win and a bonfire and a 
ball for the trophy case as their all-sufficing longed- 
for reward for everything that they have endured. 

These meetings are intended, frankly, to develop 
team and college spirit, for the sake of winning ; but 
there is also and always the deep satisfaction that 
you have taken one of the last real opportunities 
to put into the hearts of these children something like 
the enduring fragrance of flowers; an imperishable 
memory, persisting in the sordid and self-seeking 
atmosphere of the huckster world beyond the 
quadrangle. I have seen them turn to their rest 
with faces hushed and hallowed; and I believe, as 
they, that the august spirit of their Alma Mater 
stood guard beside them through the watches of 
the night. 

THE END 



3477-2 



